JP6652698B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that executes a standby process in a special gaming state .

Conventionally, it is known that when a special combination such as BB is won, the progress of the game is stopped (standby process), and a special combination winning notification is made during the standby process (for example, see Patent Document 1). .

JP-A-2000-061034

The problem to be solved by the present invention is to enable a game machine having a specification in which the operation of a special accessory is repeated in a special game state to output a test signal that clearly indicates the end of the operation of the special accessory .

The present invention solves the above-mentioned problems by the following means. Note that the configuration of the corresponding embodiment is indicated by parentheses.
The invention of claim 1 is
Main control means (main control board 60) for controlling the progress of the game,
Display means (for example, stored LED 71) controlled by the main control means,
The main control means includes:
On the basis of satisfying the start condition of the special game state (1BB is won and 1BB wins), control is performed to start the special game state (1BB game),
In the special game state, the special character (RB) can be activated,
In a case where the end condition of the special gaming state is not satisfied, when the end condition of the special accessory is satisfied, the operation of the special accessory is terminated, and a predetermined period longer than the interrupt processing cycle (a time corresponding to 5 interrupts ( 11.175 ms)), after executing the waiting process (waiting process for 2 bytes (R_2BYTE_WAIT)), the operation of the special accessory can be started again,
By the main control unit, during the predetermined period is configured so that at least one interrupt processing (I_INTR) is executed,
The main control means includes:
In the interrupt processing executed when the special accessory is operating in the special gaming state , a test including a bit string in which the bit corresponding to the special gaming state is ON and the bit corresponding to the special bonus is ON. A process for outputting a signal (“00011000”) can be executed;
In the interrupt processing executed during the predetermined period in which the special accessory is not operating in the special game state , a bit sequence in which a bit corresponding to the special game state is on and a bit corresponding to the special accessory is off comprising test signal and can execute the process for outputting the ( "00001000"),
The main control means includes:
Display data storage means (for example, stored number display data) capable of storing information to be displayed on the display means;
A counter (LED display request counter) that can be updated by interrupt processing (I_INTR);
A segment table (LED segment table 1 and LED segment table 2) storing segment information;
The display means includes a first display unit (digit 1) and a second display unit (digit 2),
When the counter reaches a value for turning on the first display unit, the segment information of the first display unit is designated based on the first information generated from the information stored in the display data storage unit and the segment table. Then, a predetermined segment of the first display unit can be turned on,
When the counter reaches a value for turning on the second display unit, the segment information of the second display unit is designated based on the second information generated from the information stored in the display data storage unit and the segment table. A specific segment of the second display section can be turned on.

According to the present invention, it is possible to transmit a test signal (to a testing machine or the like) that clearly indicates the non-operation of the special accessory by using the standby process .

FIG. 4 is a block diagram schematically showing control of the slot machine in the embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating the storage capacities of an RWM and a ROM according to the embodiment. It is a top view which shows a storage number display LED, an acquisition number display LED, and a status display LED in more detail. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a relationship between digits 1 to 5 and segments A to P. It is a figure showing an LED display request flag and an LED display request counter. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing LED segment tables 1 and 2 and details of segment data. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing data and addresses of LED segment tables 1 and 2. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating input ports 0 to 2 provided on a main control board. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating output ports 0 to 2 provided on a main control board. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating output ports 3 to 5 provided on a main control board. It is a figure showing output ports 7-10 provided in the main control board. It is a figure showing some data (medal management flag etc.) of a storage area of RWM. It is a figure showing some data (input number display LED signal data etc.) of a storage area of RWM. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a part of data (an LED display request counter and the like) in a storage area of the RWM. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a part of data (a number of obtainable sheets at the time of 1BB operation) of a storage area of the RWM. It is a figure showing some data (winning and replay condition device information etc.) of the storage area of RWM. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of a reel. FIG. 4 is a view showing a display window (transparent window) provided in the slot machine, a positional relationship between reels, an effective line, and the like. It is a figure (1) which shows the combination of the kind of combination, the number of payouts, and a symbol. It is a figure (2) which shows the combination of the kind of combination, the number of payouts, and a symbol. It is a figure (3) which shows the combination of the kind of combination, the number of payouts, and a symbol. It is a figure (4) which shows the combination of the kind of combination, the payout number, and a symbol. It is a figure (5) which shows the combination of the kind of combination, the number of payouts, and a symbol. It is a figure (6) which shows the combination of the kind of combination, the number of payouts, and a symbol. It is a figure (7) which shows the combination of the kind of combination, the number of payouts, and a symbol. It is a figure (8) which shows the combination of the kind of combination, the number of payouts, and a symbol. It is a figure (1) which shows the relationship between a condition apparatus, its winning combination, and the order of pushing. It is a figure (2) which shows the relationship between a condition device, its winning combination, and the pushing order. It is a figure (3) which shows the relationship between a condition apparatus, its winning combination, and the pressing order. It is a figure (4) which shows the relationship between a condition device, its winning combination, and the order of pushing. It is a figure (5) which shows the relationship between a condition device, its winning combination, and the pressing order. It is a figure which shows a winning and replay condition apparatus and its winning probability. It is a figure showing an AT lottery table. It is a figure which shows a pushing order instruction | indication number table, its data, and an address. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a pushing order instruction number and an advantageous pushing order. It is a figure which shows an effect group number table and its data and address. FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the transition of RT. It is a figure explaining shift of a main game state. It is a flowchart which shows a program start process (M_PRG_START). It is a flowchart which shows a power return process (M_POWER_ON). It is a flowchart which shows a main process (M_MAIN) process. It is a flowchart which shows a game start set (MS_GAME_SET) process. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a command transmission table 1 and its data and addresses. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a command transmission table 2, and data and addresses thereof. It is a flowchart which shows a control command continuous set (M_CMD_LIST). It is a flowchart which shows control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET). It is a flowchart which shows control command set 2 (C_CMD_SET). It is a flowchart which shows a medal acceptance start (MS_MEDAL_START). It is a flowchart which shows a 2-byte time waiting process (R_2BYTE_WAIT). It is a flowchart which shows an interruption wait (C_INTR_WAIT). It is a flowchart which shows one medal addition (MS_MEDAL_INC). It is a flowchart which shows a push order instruction | indication number setting process (M_ORD_INF). It is a figure showing a main game state check table and its data and address. It is a flowchart which shows the effect group number set process (M_ACT_GRP). It is a flowchart which shows a stop symbol signal set process (S_IF2_SET). It is a figure which shows the symbol stop signal table 1, and its data and address. It is a figure which shows the symbol stop signal table 2 and its data and address. It is a flowchart which shows reel rotation start preparation (M_REEL_READY). It is a flowchart which shows the update process of the number of tokens paid out. It is a flowchart which shows the medal payout (MS_WIN_PAY) by winning. It is a flowchart showing a game end check process (M_GAME_CHK). It is a flowchart which shows 1BB operation management (M_BB_CTL). It is a flowchart which shows RB operation management (M_RB_CTL). It is a flowchart which shows an interruption process (I_INTR). It is a flowchart which shows LED display control (I_LED_OUT). It is a flowchart which shows power-off processing (IS_POWER_DOWN). It is a flowchart which shows control command transmission (I_CMD_OUT). It is a time chart which shows transmission of a sub control data strobe signal and sub control data signals 1-16. It is a flowchart which shows test signal / condition apparatus information output processing. It is a figure which shows ON / OFF state of D3 bit (1BB) and D4 bit (RB) in the operation state flag information output as a test signal. It is a figure explaining the output example of condition apparatus information. It is a figure which shows 2nd Embodiment, (A) is a figure which shows the address of RWM and its content, (B) is a figure which shows a part of flowchart, (C) is a figure in (B), It is a flowchart which shows a control command continuous set (M_CONCMDS_SET).

In the present specification, the meanings of the terms are as follows.
“RT” means that the type and number of condition devices including replays and their winning probabilities are unique gaming states, and “RT transition” transitions from one RT to another RT. This means that the type (number) of condition devices including replays and their winning probabilities fluctuate. Therefore, the type and number of condition devices including replays in one RT and their winning probabilities are values unique to the RT, and the types of condition devices including replays in one RT and another RT include: The numbers and their winning probabilities will never be exactly the same.
The RT includes a non-RT and RTs 1 to 5 in the present embodiment (FIG. 37 described later). Note that “non-RT” does not mean that it is not included in the concept of RT, but is equivalent to “RT0”. Therefore, in this specification, "RT" includes non-RT.

The “main game state” is a concept different from RT and is any of so-called normal / AT precursor / AT preparation / AT, non-internal / internal, normal / special game. This is a concept that indicates
The main game state of the present embodiment includes main game states 0 to 7 (FIG. 38 described later; details will be described later).
The “main game state” includes “a state related to notification (a state indicating whether or not to perform the notification)”, a state related to the AT (a state indicating whether the AT is being performed), a “special mode”, and the like. It may be called.

The “game medium” refers to a medium provided for a game, and is a “medal” in the present embodiment. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to use game balls. In addition to the actual medals, the game media include game media (data related to game media) electrically stored (credited and stored) inside the gaming machine.
"Bet" means to bet a medal (game medium) to play a game. In the present embodiment, the maximum (limit) number of bets that can be bet is set to “3” for any RT. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the normal game (non-special game) is set to “3”, and the special game (1BB game or the like) is set to “2”.

  “Storing” is different from the above “betting” and means crediting medals inside the slot machine 10. The term “storage” may be used in a sense including a bet, but in the present specification, the term “storage” is used in a sense that does not include a “bet”. In the present embodiment, the maximum (limit) number that can be stored is set to “50” regardless of the game state or the like.

“Care” means that the player inserts medals directly from the medal insertion slot 43 described later.
The “care bet” means that the player bets medals by caring for medals from the medal slot 43.
“Care and storage” means that the player stores medals (adds credits) by cleaning medals from the medal slot 43.
“Bet medal” refers to a bet medal.
“Stored medals” refers to medals stored as credits.

The “reserved bet” means that a player operates a bet switch 40 described later to play a part or all of medals stored as credits within a range where betting can be performed in the game. Betting.
The “auto bet” means that when the replay is won, the internal control processing of the slot machine 10 automatically bets the number of medals previously bet in the game. Note that the above-mentioned medal that has been bet-maintained, medal that has been stored bet, and stored medal can be settled thereafter, but the medal that is automatically bet due to the replay winning is not settled.
The term “insertion” includes the above-mentioned maintenance bet, maintenance storage, storage bet, and automatic bet, and means to bet or store medals.
“Payment” refers to paying out a bet medal and / or a stored medal to a player.

  The term “payout” refers to paying out medals to a player based on winning of a winning combination, or paying out medals by the above-mentioned settlement. Paying out medals to a player based on winning of a role includes both storing the medals as credits and paying out actual medals from a payout opening (not shown). In the payout in the present embodiment, “50” credits are stored as a limit number in credits, and control is performed so that medals whose stored number exceeds “50” are actually paid out to the player.

  Note that "paying out" medals to the player by the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment is equivalent to "acquiring" medals by the player. Therefore, from the viewpoint of the slot machine 10 side, it is "payout of medals", and from the viewpoint of the player side, it is "acquisition of medals". For this reason, for example, there are a case called “payout (number of sheets)” as shown in FIG. 19 and a case called “acquisition (number)” as shown in FIG. 3, both of which have the same meaning.

In this specification, a numerical value suffixed with “B” at the end (particularly, 8 bits) means a binary number. Similarly, a numerical value suffixed with "H" means a hexadecimal number. Specifically, for example, a numerical value indicating “16” in decimal is expressed as “00010000B” or “00010000 (B)” in binary, and is expressed as “10H” or “10 (H)” in hexadecimal. .
However, for binary notation other than 8-bit numerical values, the end of “B” is omitted. For example, “0” in a notation such as “register value is“ 0 ”” actually means a binary number of “00000000B”. Therefore, a numerical value without "B" at the end does not always mean that it is not a binary number. Similarly, numerical values without an “H” at the end do not always mean that they are not hexadecimal.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings and the like.
FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing an outline of control of the slot machine 10 in the present embodiment.
A main control board 60 and a sub-control board 80 are provided as typical control boards provided in the slot machine 10.
The main control board 60 has input ports (0 to 2) and output ports (0 to 10), and includes an RWM (main memory) 61, a ROM 62, a main CPU 63, and the like (meaning that only those illustrated in FIG. 1 are included). is not).

The RWM 61 is a storage medium capable of storing (updating) various data (variables) based on the progress of a game or the like.
The ROM 62 is a storage medium for storing programs and various data (for example, data tables) necessary for the progress of the game.
The main CPU 63 refers to a CPU provided on the main control board 60, and executes programs required for the progress of the game, performs calculations, and the like. Is executed.
The main CPU 63 has a built-in register. In particular, in the present embodiment, as described later, a plurality of registers (for example, A register to L register, transmission register, and the like) are provided.

On the main control board 60, an MPU including an RWM 61, a ROM 62, a main CPU 63 and a register is mounted. The ROM 62 may be provided externally, in addition to the one mounted inside the MPU. On the other hand, the RWM 61 is provided only inside the MPU according to the current rules.
On the other hand, an MPU including an RWM 81, a ROM 82, and a main CPU 83 is mounted on a sub-control board 80 described later, and the RWM 61 is provided outside and outside the MPU.

FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining storage areas and storage capacities of the RWM 61 and the ROM 62 mounted on the main control means 60. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the capacitances and regions shown in FIG.
The storage capacity of the RWM 61 is “1,024 KB” in the present embodiment, and has a used area of the capacity “512 KB” and an unused area of the capacity “512 KB”. Data (FIGS. 12 to 16) to be described later and the like are stored in the use area.
The storage capacity of the ROM 62 is “16 KB” in the present embodiment, and has a use area of the capacity “7.5 KB” and an outside of the use area of the capacity “8.5 KB”. Further, the used area has a program area with a capacity of “4.5 KB” and a data area with a capacity of “3.0 KB”.

Here, the “use area” refers to a storage area in which information other than information necessary for preventing unauthorized remodeling or other changes is stored or to be stored (the same in the RWM 61 and the ROM 62).
Further, the “data area” refers to a storage area in which only information other than the program is stored or is to be stored in the used area, and data used when the program is executed is stored.

The “program area” refers to a storage area other than the data area in the used area, and stores various programs (such as FIG. 39 described later) executed by the main control unit 60. The program area may be referred to as a “control area”.
Further, the area outside the used area is referred to as a second program area in the present embodiment. In the second program area, other programs not related to the progress of the game (for example, programs used at the time of a test) are stored. This will be described later. When the area outside the use area of the ROM 62 is referred to as a second program area, the program area of the use area may be referred to as a first program area.

  In FIG. 1, a main control board 60 and a peripheral device for game progress including an operation switch such as the bet switch 40 shown in FIG. 1 are electrically connected through an input port or an output port. The input port is a connection to which a signal from an operation switch or the like is input, and the output port is a connection to transmit a signal to a peripheral device such as the motor 32.

In FIG. 1, a signal from the input peripheral device is indicated by an arrow toward the main control board 60, and a signal from the output peripheral device is indicated by an arrow from the main control board 60 to the peripheral device. (The same applies to the sub-control board 80).
The push button 25 (also referred to as a “push button unit”) connected to the sub-control board 80 can transmit and receive signals in two directions. Specifically, a signal to the effect that an operation has been performed is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 based on the operation of the push button 25, and the lamp provided on the push button 25 is emitted from the sub-control board 80.

  The timing at which the push button 25 is caused to emit light may be a game standby state in which history information on the game (eg, the total number of executions of the normal game, the number of executions of the AT, etc.) can be displayed, or a specific effect in which the effect currently being output can be switched. , After the start switch 41 is operated, after the first stop operation of the reel 31, and the like. At this time, it is conceivable that the emission color is "white" when the game is on standby, and white, blue, red or the like during the game depending on the expectation of the AT winning.

In FIG. 1, medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 43 are configured to pass through a medal selector.
As shown in FIG. 1, the medal selector includes (but is not limited to) a passage sensor 43a, a blocker 45, and insertion sensors 44a and 44b, and is electrically connected to the main control board 60. .
When a medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot 43, the medal is first detected by the passage sensor 43a.

  Further, a blocker 45 is provided downstream of the passage sensor 43a. The blocker 45 is for permitting / disallowing the insertion of medals. When the insertion of medals is not permitted, the blocker 45 forms a medal passage for returning the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 43 from the payout opening. I do. On the other hand, when the insertion of medals is permitted, a medal passage for guiding the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 43 to the hopper 35a is formed.

  Here, during the game (from the start of the rotation of the reel 31 to the end of the payout corresponding to the winning combination when the reels 31 are stopped and the winning of the combination is completed) during the game, the insertion of the medal is not permitted. I do. That is, the blocker 45 permits medal insertion at least when a game is not played.

  Further downstream of the blocker 45, input sensors 44a and 44b (optical sensors) are provided. Therefore, the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 43 is configured to be detected by the passage sensor 43a and further detected by the insertion sensors 44a (upstream side) and 44b (downstream side). As shown in FIG. 1, in the following description, the upstream input sensor 44a may be referred to as input sensor 1, and the downstream input sensor 44b may be referred to as input sensor 2.

As shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 60 includes a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, a (left, middle, right) stop switch 42, and a settlement switch 46 as operation switches operated by the player. Connected.
The bet switch 40 (40a or 40b) is a switch operated by the player when betting the stored medals for the game. In this embodiment, a 1-bet switch 40a for inserting one medal and a 3-bet switch 40b for inserting three (maximum) medals are provided.
Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and a bet switch for two bets may be provided.

The start switch 41 is a switch operated by the player when starting the reels 31 (all left, middle, and right).
Furthermore, three stop switches 42 are provided corresponding to the three (left, middle, right) reels 31 and are switches operated by the player when stopping the corresponding reels 31.
Further, the settlement switch 46 is a switch operated by the player when paying out (paying out) medals stored (credited) inside the slot machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, a display board 70 is electrically connected to the main control board 60. Note that, in actuality, a relay board is provided between the main control board 60 and the display board 70, and the main control board 60 and the relay board, and the relay board and the display board 70 are connected. In FIG. 1, illustration of the relay board is omitted. In this way, the main control board 60 and the display board 70 may be directly connected by a harness or the like, or another board may be interposed between them.
Further, the control boards are not limited to being directly connected to each other (by a harness or the like), and may be connected via another separate board (such as a relay board). For example, one or more other boards (such as a relay board) may be interposed between the main control board 60 and the sub control board 80.

  The display board 70 is connected with a stored number display LED 71, an acquired number display LED 72, and a status display LED 73. These LEDs 71 to 73 are provided near operation switches operated by the player, and are provided at positions where the player can always visually recognize them. It is not necessary that all the LEDs 71 to 73 are provided on one display substrate 70. For example, a plurality of display substrates 70 such as display substrates 70A, 70B,. , Any one of the LEDs 71 to 73 may be provided.

FIG. 3 is a plan view showing the stored number display LED 71, the acquired number display LED 72, and the state display LED 73 in more detail.
In FIG. 3, a display board 70 (shown by a dotted line in FIG. 3) is arranged inside the slot machine 10 below the stored number display LED 71, the acquired number display LED 72, and the status display LED 73.

The stored number display LED 71 is an LED for displaying the number of medals stored in the slot machine 10, and includes a digit 1 for displaying an upper digit and a digit 2 for displaying a lower digit. That is, the stored number display LED 71 displays two digits.
Here, the “digit” means a display unit (display), and particularly in the present embodiment, is constituted by a seven-segment display (seven-segment display unit, so-called 7-segment).
As shown in FIG. 3, the number of digits mounted on the display substrate 70 is four, that is, digits 1 to 4. In the present embodiment, the number of digits is five, and the other digit 5 is the main digit. It corresponds to the set value display LED 64 (FIG. 1) provided on the control board 60.

The stored number display LED 71 displays the number of stored medals, and in the present embodiment, displays a number between “00” and “50” (integer).
For example, when no medals are bet or stored, the display of the stored number display LED 71 is “00”. Here, when one medal is serviced, the one medal is bet for the game. When two more coins are additionally inserted, three medals are bet for the game (when the bet limit is three). Therefore, when the number of medals that have been maintained is up to three, the medals are bet and are not stored. When the medals are further maintained, the medals are stored in the slot machine 10 and the number of stored medals is displayed by the stored number display LED 71.

  In the present embodiment, up to 50 medals can be stored. Therefore, when the number of stored cards reaches 50 (when “50” is displayed on the stored number display LED 71), medals are not stored any more. In this state, if medals are provisioned through the medal insertion slot 43, the medals prepared by the blocker 45 are returned from the payout port.

  Here, when a role with a medal payout (excluding replay) wins and a medal corresponding to the role is paid out, priority is given to the fact that the medal is actually paid out from the payout port, and the medal is paid out inside the slot machine 10. Medals are stored. For example, in the case where the number of stored coins before winning is "10", when the winning of nine coins is won, the display of the stored number display LED 71 is updated from "10" to "19".

  Furthermore, when the number of stored pieces exceeds "50" at the time of winning the winning, the portion exceeding "50" is actually paid out from the payout port. For example, when the number of stored coins is “47” before the winning of the role, and nine medals are paid out by the winning of the nine role, three are stored and the stored number becomes “50”, which exceeds “50”. Six cards are paid out from the payout port.

  Further, at the time of winning the replay, medals are not stored and paid out, and the medals of the number betted in the game are automatically betted for the replay. For example, when the game is performed with three bets (three) and a replay is won, three medals are automatically bet. Since the automatic bet based on the winning of the replay is the insertion of a medal for performing a replay, even if a settlement (return) operation is performed thereafter, the medal cannot be settled.

  In addition, according to the “Rules on Approval of Gaming Machines and Type Approval, etc.”, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay stops on the active line, it is not a “winning” but an operation of the condition device related to the replay. Has been interpreted. However, in the present application (the present specification and the like), replay is also treated as one of the winning combinations (replaying winning combination), and the stop of the combination of the symbols corresponding to the replay on the activated line is referred to as “replay winning”.

The acquired number display LED 72 is an LED that displays the number of payouts (the number of acquired players) at the time of winning a winning combination, and is composed of a digit 3 displaying an upper digit and a digit 4 displaying a lower digit. I have. Therefore, the acquired number display LED 72 displays two digits, like the stored number display LED 71.
When there are no medals to be paid out, the display of the acquired number display LED 72 is “00”. For example, when a nine-part role described later wins and nine medals are paid out, the display of the acquired number display LED 72 becomes From "00" to "09".
Note that the acquired number display LED 72 may be controlled so as to be turned off when there is no medal to be paid out. Alternatively, the upper digit (digit 3) may be turned off and only the lower digit (digit 4) may be displayed as “0”.

The acquired number display LED 72 normally displays the acquired number, but functions as an LED for displaying the content (type) of the error when an error occurs.
Furthermore, during the AT game, the acquired number display LED 72 displays a pushing sequence that is advantageous to the player (a pushing sequence for stopping the higher line on the activated line when the winning pattern of the winning combination has a higher line and a lower line). Also, the slot machine 10 functions as an LED that displays information (push order instruction information) including a push order for shifting (inducing) to an intended RT or main game state on the slot machine 10 side. Therefore, the acquired number display LED 72 in the present embodiment is an LED that also serves to display the acquired number, error content, and push order instruction information. The notification of the advantageous pressing order is also executed by the image display device 23 connected to the sub-control board 80.

Here, in this specification, the display of the pressing order using the acquired number display LED 72 by the main control board 60 is referred to as “display of pressing order instruction information”, and the display of the pressing order by the sub-control board 80 is referred to as “display of the pressing order”. Notification ”.
Further, as shown in FIGS. 34 and 35 described later, a number corresponding to an advantageous push order is referred to as a “push order instruction number”.
Furthermore, data stored at the address “F00E”, for example, data such as “102”, as shown in step S220 of FIG. 52 described below, is referred to as “push order instruction data”.

Further, the pressing order, which is executed in step S645 of FIG. 65 to be described later and is displayed on the acquired number display LED 72 shown in FIG. 3, for example, “= 2” when the pressing order instruction data is “102”, This is referred to as “push order instruction information”.
As described above, the values stored in the ROM 62 (FIG. 34; “0” to “9”) are referred to as “push order instruction numbers”, and the data (“101H” to “109H”) stored at the address “F00E” )) Is referred to as “push order instruction data”, and the information (“= 1” to “= 9”) displayed on the acquired number display LED 72 is referred to as “push order instruction information”.

In FIG. 3, the status display LED 73 includes seven LEDs (73a to 73g).
The replay display LED 73a is an LED that is lit when a replay win is achieved. When an automatic bet based on a replay win is made, the replay display LED 73a is illuminated to notify the player that the player is in an automatic bet state.

The insertable indication LED 73b is an LED that lights when a medal can be inserted. In other words, it lights up before the game is over and medals for shifting to the next game are inserted, indicating a so-called bet waiting state. In the present embodiment, even when the replay is activated, the light is turned on when a bet can be made according to the stored number of sheets.
In the present embodiment, the settlement display LED 73c is an LED that lights during the settlement process. When there is a stored medal and / or a bet medal (excluding an automatic bet at the time of a replay winning), when the settlement switch 46 is turned on, the light is turned on while the medal is actually paid out.

  The game start LED 73d is an LED that is lit when a medal is inserted and the start switch 41 becomes operable. Therefore, it does not light in a state in which a medal is not bet (or replay is not automatically inserted).

  The (one, two, three) insertion display LEDs 73e to 73g are LEDs for displaying the number of medals being bet, respectively, and when one medal is bet, "1 BET (one-sheet insertion LED 73e) ) "Lights up and when two medals are bet," 1 BET (single insertion LED 73e) "and" 2 BET (two insertion LED 73f) "are lit and three medals are bet. At this time, "1 BET (single-sheet insertion display LED 73e)", "2BET (two-sheet insertion display LED 73f)", and "3BET (three-sheet insertion display LED 73g)" are lit.

FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the relationship between digits 1 to 5 and segments A to P.
Each digit is composed of segments A to P (total of eight), and segments A to G (seven of them) constitute a so-called 7-segment. Further, the segment P constitutes one of the status display LEDs 73 (excluding the digit 2).

As shown in FIG. 4, for example, in the digit 1, the segments A to G constitute the upper 7-segment of the stored number display LED 71, and the segment P constitutes the game start LED 73d.
In FIG. 4, among the digits 3, the segments A to G constitute the upper 7-segment of the acquired number display LED 72, and the segment P constitutes the insertion possible display LED 73b.

Similarly, in FIG. 4, in the digit 4, the segments A to G constitute the lower 7 digits of the acquired number display LED 72, and the segment P constitutes the replay display LED 73a.
In addition, in FIG. 4, among the digits 5, the segments A to G constitute the 7-segment of the set value display LED 64, and the segment P constitutes the settlement display LED 73c.

  As described above, for example, when all the segments (segments A to P) of digit 1 are turned on, the storage number display LED 71 (upper digit) displays “8” and the segment P As a result, the game start LED 73d of the status display LEDs 73 is turned on.

FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an LED display request flag (_FL_SEG_DSP) and an LED display request counter (_CT_SEG_DSP).
The LED display request flag is a flag indicating which LED can be turned on, and is stored as a 1-byte data of 8 bits (D0 to D7) in a predetermined area of the RWM 61 (“F010” in FIG. 14 described later). You.
When the LED display request flag indicates, for example, digits 1 and 2, that is, when the upper and lower digits of the stored number display LED 71 can be displayed, the D0 and D1 bits become "1" and other digits cannot be displayed. Then, the other bits become “0”. Therefore, the data of the LED display request flag in this case is “00000011B”.

As shown in FIG. 5, in the present embodiment, the digit 5 (the set value display LED 64) is turned off and the digits 1 to 4 are turned on during normal times (during game play and game waiting). Therefore, the LED display request flag in the normal state is “000011111B”.
While the setting is being changed, the set value is displayed on the digit 5, so that the D4 bit becomes "1". The acquired number display LED 72) is set to "1" to indicate "---". Therefore, the LED display request flag during the setting change is “00011100B”.

  Furthermore, during the setting confirmation, the set value is displayed on the digit 5 in the same manner as during the setting change, so that the D4 bit becomes “1”. Further, digits 1 to 4 are the same as in the normal case. Therefore, the LED display request flag during setting confirmation is “00011111B”.

The above-mentioned LED display request flag is a flag having a different value depending on whether it is normal, during setting change, or during setting confirmation.
On the other hand, like the LED display request flag, the LED display request counter is 1-byte data composed of 8 bits (D0 to D7), and is a data whose value is updated every timer interrupt (2.235 ms) described later. It is. The LED display request counter is stored in a predetermined area (“F00F” in FIG. 14 described later) of the RWM 61, similarly to the LED display request flag.

As shown in FIG. 5, the LED display request counter takes "00010000B" as an initial value, and the digit which is turned on ("1") shifts right by one digit by one digit every time an interrupt process is performed (executes a shift instruction. ) Updated as follows. When the value of the LED display request counter is "00000001B", the value becomes "00000000B" at the time of the next interruption, but when the value becomes "0" after the update, the initial value is again set at the time of the interruption. 00010000B ". Note that the initial value may be set to “00010000B” at the time of the next interrupt when all the bits become “0”.
The assignment of the digit to each bit of the LED display request flag and the LED display request counter shown in FIG. 5 is not limited to that shown in FIG. 5, and can be variously designed. For example, it is possible to make D0 to D2 unused and assign D3 to D7 to each digit.

As will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, as a result of performing an AND operation on the LED display request flag and the LED display request counter, the digit “1” is to be lit during the interrupt processing.
As will be described later, when an error that cannot be recovered (an error that cannot be recovered unless the power is turned off and the power is turned on again) occurs in the slot machine 10, the error content (number) is displayed by an LED. There is no reference to the display request flag or the LED display request counter.
On the other hand, in the case of a recoverable error (an error that can be recovered without turning on / off the power supply), the result of “AND” calculation of the LED display request flag and the LED display request counter is “1” as in the normal operation. Are the lighting targets.

FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an LED segment table and the like stored in the ROM 62. The LED segment table is a table that stores display data when the digits 1 to 5 are turned on, and includes an LED segment table 1 ((A) in the figure) that stores alphabetic display data (used for error display and the like). , An LED segment table 2 ((B) in the figure) for storing data for displaying numeric display data and “=” when displaying the pressing order instruction information.
In the figure, (C) shows the relationship between 1-byte data and the corresponding segment.
In FIG. 6, "DEFB" indicates that 1-byte (8-bit) data is stored in the assembler language. Note that “DEFW” described later indicates that 2-byte data is stored in the assembler language.

As shown in FIG. 6, for example, the display data “C” is “00111001 (B)”. That is, the segments A, D, E, and F are “1 (on; lighted)” and the segments B, C, G, and P are “0 (off, lighted off)”. Therefore, in FIG. 4, when the segments A, D, E, and F are turned on, "C" by seven segments is displayed.
Further, for example, the “=” display data is “01001000 (B)”. That is, in FIG. 4, the segments D and G become "1 (ON; lighting)", the center and lower horizontal segments light, and "=" is displayed by 7-segment.

The data of the LED segment tables 1 and 2 shown in FIG. 6 are stored in the data area of the ROM 62 in the order of addresses.
FIG. 7 is a diagram showing data of the LED segment tables 1 and 2 in the data area of the ROM 61. In the present embodiment, the head address is set to “1811”, and data of the LED segment table 1 is stored in order from “1811”. Similarly, the start address of the data of the LED segment table 2 is set to “1816”, and the data of the LED segment table 2 is stored in order from the “1816”.

Thus, each data of the LED segment table 1 can be represented by an offset value from the head address “1811”. Similarly, each data of the LED segment table 2 can be represented by an offset value from the head address “1816”.
For example, when the data of the LED segment data table 2 is read, the start address “1816” is specified, and when the content to be displayed is “5”, the address obtained by adding the offset value “5” to the start address “1816” That is, if the data of “181B” is read, the display data of “5” can be read.

The description returns to FIG.
The motor 32 and the like of the symbol display device 30 are electrically connected to the main control board 60.
The symbol display device 30 includes a reel 31 (three in this embodiment) for displaying a symbol, a motor 32 for driving each of the reels 31, and a reel sensor 39 for detecting the position of the reel 31.

  The motor 32 is for rotating the reels 31, is connected to the rotation center of each reel 31, and is controlled by a reel control unit 63g described later. Here, the reel 31 includes a left reel 31, a middle reel 31, and a right reel 31, and a stop switch 42 operated when stopping the left reel 31 is a left stop switch 42. When the middle reel 31 is stopped. The stop switch 42 to be operated is the middle stop switch 42, and the stop switch 42 to be operated when stopping the right reel 31 is the right stop switch 42.

The reel 31 has a ring shape, and has an outer peripheral surface to which a reel tape on which a plurality of types of symbols (designs constituting a combination of symbols corresponding to a combination) are printed is attached. The specific arrangement of the symbols on the reel 31 will be described later.
Further, each reel 31 is provided with one index (may be two or more). The index is provided in a convex shape, for example, on the peripheral side surface of the reel 31, and is used when detecting whether the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position, whether the reel 31 has rotated once, and the like. Each index is detected by the reel sensor 39. The signal of the reel sensor 39 is electrically connected to the main control board 60. When the index detects (turns off) the in-reel sensor 39, the input signal is input to the main control board 60, and it is detected that the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position.

  Further, the symbol on the reference position at the moment when the reel sensor 39 detects the index of the reel 31 is stored in the ROM 62 in advance. Thereby, the symbol on the reference position at the moment when the index is detected can be detected.

  Further, a medal payout device 35 is electrically connected to the main control board 60. The medal payout device 35 includes a hopper 35a for storing medals, a hopper motor 36 that is driven when paying out the medals of the hopper 35a from a payout opening, and a medal paid out from the hopper motor 36. Discharge sensors 37a and 37b are provided.

The medals that have been serviced and received from the medal insertion slot 43 are formed so as to be accommodated in the hopper 35a through a predetermined passage (also referred to as a “chute portion”).
As with the input sensors 44a and 44b, the payout sensors 37a and 37b are provided with a payout sensor 37a on the upstream side and a payout sensor 37b on the downstream side.
As shown in FIG. 1, in the following description, the upstream payout sensor 37a may be referred to as a payout sensor 1 and the downstream payout sensor 37b may be referred to as a payout sensor 2.

  The payout sensors 37a and 37b are arranged at a predetermined distance from each other, and are configured to be detected by the payout sensor 37b after a predetermined time has elapsed since the medal was detected by the payout sensor 37a. Then, based on the timing at which the payout sensors 37a and 37b are turned on / off, it is determined whether or not the medal has been correctly paid out.

For example, when the signals of the payout sensors 37a and 37b are both off even though the hopper motor 36 is driven, it is determined that no medal has been paid out, and a hopper error (no medal) is detected. Is done.
On the other hand, when at least one of the signals from the payout sensors 37a or 37b remains ON, it is detected that a medal jam has occurred. Note that only one payout sensor 37 may be provided to detect the error.
The full sensor 38 is a sensor that detects the fullness of the sub-tank 35b that stores medals overflowing from the hopper 35a, and is configured by a circuit that energizes when the medal contacts the sub-tank 35b when the medal is full.

The door switch 16 is a switch that is turned on when a front cover (not shown) of the slot machine 10 is opened, and detects an open / closed state of the front cover.
The power switch 51 is a switch for turning on / off the power of the slot machine 10.
The setting key switch 52 is a switch that is turned on when the setting key is inserted from the setting key insertion slot and is rotated to the right by 90 degrees, and is turned on when the setting is confirmed or the setting is changed.

The setting change / reset switch 53 is a single switch that serves as both a setting change switch and a reset switch. Note that the setting change switch and the reset switch may be provided separately.
The setting change / reset switch 53 is operated when changing the set value. When the power switch 51 is turned on while the setting key switch 52 is turned on, a reset, that is, an initialization process is performed, and predetermined data stored in the RWM 61 is cleared.

  The setting door switch 54 is a switch that detects opening and closing of a door (not shown) that covers the setting key switch 52 and the setting change / reset switch 53. For example, when the setting door switch 54 is off, that is, when the setting key switch 52 is on while the setting door is not opened, an error occurs.

FIG. 8 is a diagram showing input ports 0 to 2 provided on the main control board 60. 9 to 11 are diagrams showing output ports 0 to 5 and 7 to 10 provided on the main control board 60. Although the output port 6 is actually provided in the slot machine 10, it is not shown because it is not directly related to the present embodiment.
The input ports 0 to 2 and the output ports 0 to 10 of this embodiment are 1-byte ports to which 8 bits D0 to D7 can be input or output.
The input port and the output port are provided in addition to the above, but the description is omitted in the present embodiment.

  8 to 10, a port displayed as unused indicates a signal input / output port that is not actually used or whose description is omitted in the present embodiment (a port having no signal input / output). Does not mean all unused).

  In FIG. 8, input port 0 receives signals of an operation switch, a settlement switch 46, a bet switch 40 (a 1-bet switch 40a and a 3-bet switch 40b), a start switch 41, and a stop switch 42. In the example of FIG. 8, the 1-bet switch signal (D1 bit) and the 3-bet switch signal (D2 bit) are separated. However, when the slot machine 10 is provided with only the 3-bet switch 40, The D1 bit of input port 0 is unused.

The input port 1 receives signals of the passage sensor 43a, the door switch 16, the setting door switch 54, the setting key switch 52, the setting change / reset switch 53, and the (left, middle, right) reel sensor 39. .
Further, the input port 2 includes a power interruption signal (a signal output when a power interruption occurs), signals of the input sensors 1 (44a) and 2 (44b), and output sensors 1 (37a) and 2 (37b). ) And the signal of the full sensor 38 are input. When the slot machine 10 does not have the setting door switch 54, the D2 bit of the input port 1 is not used.

  As described later, a main process (FIG. 41; M_MAIN to be described later) (also referred to as a main loop) that is performed once per game is provided as information processing for progressing the game. In the main processing, the inserted medals are detected, and a prize-winning processing is performed after all the reels 31 have stopped.

  During this main processing, the main processing is temporarily exited, and an interrupt processing (timer interrupt processing) is executed (FIG. 64; I_INTR described later). In the interrupt process, a process of detecting the input ports 0 to 2 (step S607 in FIG. 64) is executed, and after executing the process, a process of returning to the main process is periodically performed again. The interval of the interruption time is 2.235 ms in the present embodiment. That is, the data of the input ports 0 to 2 is acquired for each interruption processing at an interval of 2.235 ms.

  Then, based on the acquired data, for each of the input ports 0 to 2, level data (data indicating ON / OFF of each bit), rising data of the input port (OFF at the previous interrupt, ON at the current interrupt) The data that indicates which bit is the data that has changed) and the falling data of the input port (data that indicates which bit is the data that was turned on at the time of the previous interrupt and turned off at the time of the current interrupt) And memorize. Therefore, these data are updated every 2.235 ms.

Further, regardless of when the interrupt processing is performed, all of the D0 to D7 bits of the input ports 0 to 2 are detected. For example, during the rotation of the reel 31 (before the stop switch 42 is operated), the bet switch 40 cannot be operated by the player, so that the D1 and D2 bit data of the input port 0 is necessarily obtained. Although it is not necessary, in the present invention, data of all bits is obtained. Then, if all bits of data are obtained, it is possible to make an error determination. For example, there is a case where the rising data of the bet switch 40 is turned on while the reel 31 is rotating.
Further, for example, if one byte data (8 bits) of the input port 0 is obtained, it is possible to know the on / off status of all the operation switches.

  In the output port 0 of FIG. 9, the signals φ0 to φ3 of the motor 32 of the left reel 31 are output from the bits D0 to D3. The motor 32 of the present embodiment is configured to rotate the reel 31 by 1-2-phase excitation, and drives the reel 31 by a combination of four-phase excitation of φ0 to φ3. Are output from predetermined bits, respectively.

The signal of the blocker 45 is output from the D6 bit. Further, a drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is output from the D7 bit.
Here, the blocker 45 forms a medal passage connecting the medal insertion slot 43 and the hopper 35a when the blocker signal is “1” (ON), and when the blocker signal is “0” (OFF), A passage (return passage) connecting the medal insertion slot 43 and the payout slot is formed.
Then, for example, when the blocker 45 is driven, a blocker signal is output from the D6 bit of the output port 0 by interrupt processing.

From the D0 to D3 bits of the output port 1, the respective φ0 to φ3 signals of the motor 32 of the middle reel 31 are output. Similarly, the φ0 to φ3 signals of the motor 32 of the right reel 31 are output from the D4 to D7 bits.
From the D0 to D2 bits of the output port 2, signals for turning on the three-sheet insertion LED 73g, the two-sheet insertion LED 73f, and the one-sheet insertion LED 73e among the status display LEDs 73 are output. Further, a sub-control data strobe signal is output from the D7 bit. Here, the sub-control data strobe signal is a signal transmitted to the sub-control board 80 together with sub-control data signals 1 to 16 described later. When receiving the sub-control data strobe signal, the sub-control board 80 acquires the data of the sub-control data signals 1 to 16 from the buffer provided on the sub-control board 80 based on the rise of the sub-control data strobe signal. To control. The signal transmission timing and the like will be described later (FIG. 68).

  The output port 3 is used for outputting an LED digit signal. The output port 4 is used for outputting an LED segment signal. These LED digit signal and LED segment signal are signals for turning on / off the set value display LED 64, the stored number display LED 71, the acquired number display LED 72, and the status display LED 73.

Specifically, for example, when the data of the output port 3 is “00000001B”, only the digit 1 is turned on, so only the upper digit of the stored number display LED 71 is turned on. Further, when the data of the output port 4 is “00111111B”, the signals of the segments A to F are turned on, so that “0” is displayed in the digit 1.
As described above, the digit to be lit at output port 0 is determined, and the segment to be lit at output port 1 is determined.

Furthermore, an external (outer end) signal to the external central terminal board 100 is output from the output port 5, and in this embodiment, the external signals 1 to 5, a medal payout signal, and a medal insertion (bet) signal are output. Is done.
Here, the “external signal” is a signal to be output to the outside of the slot machine 10 (such as a hall computer or a data counter installed in a hall) via the external centralized terminal board 100. In the present embodiment, an external signal 1 indicating AT activation, an external signal 2 indicating AT continuation, an external signal 3 indicating from the start to the end of AT, an error occurring in the slot machine 10, a power failure, etc. And an external signal 5 indicating that the front door of the slot machine 10 is open.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the external signal 1 may be set to a specific RT, and the external signal 2 may be set to a signal for a specific special game such as 1BB. It is not necessarily limited to AT.

The output ports 7 and 8 are ports for outputting sub-control data signals (control commands transmitted to the sub-control board 80), output sub-control data signals 1 to 8 from the output port 7, and output from the output port 8 The sub-control data 9 to 16 are output.
The output ports 9 and 10 are set as ports for transmitting a predetermined signal (information) to the tester. Here, the “test signal” means that the slot machine 10 (gaming machine) is connected to the testing machine, and a predetermined signal is transmitted from the slot machine 10 to the testing machine. This is a signal used to confirm that the design is made in accordance with the “Rules Concerning Certification and Model Verification”. The connection between the slot machine 10 and the tester is not limited to the connection directly, but may be connected via an interface board for relaying.

The output port 9 is assigned condition apparatus 1 to 8 signals. Here, the “condition device” indicates a so-called winning number (winning type). In the present embodiment, as described later, the D6 and D7 bits indicate whether or not a bonus (special role) has been won. Bits D0 to D5 indicate the type of winning. By using bits D0 to D5, 64 types of winning patterns can be output. By outputting a signal from the output port 9, it is possible to notify the outside of which condition device is ON (which winning has been achieved) in the game.
The output port 10 is an output port for test signals 1 to 8. The specific contents of the test signal will be described later.
As described above, within one interrupt, the data (referred to as “level data”) based on the signals of the input ports 0 to 2 are stored, and the stored control is performed for the output ports 0 to 10. A signal is output based on the data.

  12 to 16 are diagrams showing storage addresses (addresses) of data stored in the RWM 61 and the contents thereof. The data shown in FIGS. 12 to 16 is data used in the description of the present embodiment, and the data stored in the RWM 61 is not limited to these data.

  In FIG. 12, “_FL_MEDAL_STS” at the address “F01B” is a data storage area of the medal management flag. This medal management flag is a flag for mainly controlling lighting / extinguishing of the status display LED 73. In the medal management flag, the D0 bit indicates a state in which the start switch 41 is received, and when the start switch 41 is being received, that is, when the start switch 41 is operable (for example, a state in which a medal is bet and a game is not started). When it becomes "1" and the operation of the start switch 41 cannot be accepted (for example, while the reel 31 is rotating), it is set to "0".

The blocker state of the D2 bit is data that is “1” when the blocker 45 is on and “0” when the blocker 45 is off. By determining the value of the D2 bit, it is possible to determine what state the blocker 45 is currently in (on or off).
The D3-bit replay display LED is data that is set to "1" when replay is displayed and medals are automatically inserted as a replay (step S141 in FIG. 48). When this data is "1", the replay display LED 73a of the above-mentioned status display LEDs 73 is turned on. The data is set to “0” when the replay game ends (step S73 in FIG. 41, step S542 in FIG. 61). When this data is "0", the replay display LED 73a turns off.

  The D4 bit settlement display LED is data that is set to “1” when the settlement switch 46 is operated and the stored medals are settled. When this data is "1", the settlement display LED 73c of the above-mentioned status display LEDs 73 is turned on. The data is set to “0” when the settlement of the stored medals is completed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the payment display LED 73c is formed so as to light up when the payment of the stored medals that can be stored up to a maximum of 50 is performed. When the payment is settled, it is preferable that the payment is set to "1" when the bet or the stored medal is settled (so that the payment display LED 73c is turned on).

  The D6 bit setting change disable flag is data that is “0” when the setting can be changed, and is “1” otherwise. In the present embodiment, the data is set to “1” when the start switch 41 is operated and the game is advanced, and is set to “0” when the medal acceptance of the next game is started (Step S133 in FIG. 48). " When the setting is changed, the value of the setting change permission flag is referred to. When the setting change disable flag is “1”, the setting change is not permitted. However, even if the setting change disable flag is “1”, if it is determined that the error cannot be returned (for example, an abnormal update of the random number determined for each interrupt process), the setting change is permitted, and the setting change is permitted. The non-recoverable error can be canceled based on the error.

  The D7 bit medal limit setting determination is data that is “1” when the number of bet medals has reached the medal limit number, and is “0” when the bet medal number has not reached the medal limit number. As described above, the limit number is set to three (during normal and during 1BB game) in the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, during normal times, when the number of bet medals is 0, 1, or 2, the number of medals has not reached the medal limit number, and thus the value is "0". 1 ".

“_FL_ACTION” of the address “F015” is a data storage area of the operation state flag. In the present embodiment, replay is assigned to the D0 bit, 1BB is assigned to the D3 bit, and RB is assigned to the D4 bit.
For example, when a replay is won, the replay is activated, and when the gaming state is set (step S88 in FIG. 42), the D0 bit is set to "1". The D0 bit is changed from "1" to "0" when the replay game ends (step S73 in FIG. 41 and step S543 in FIG. 61).
Although not provided in the present embodiment, when 2BB or CB is provided, for example, allocation to an empty bit of the operation state flag (for example, 2BB for D1 bit and CB for D2 bit) can be mentioned.

“_FL_WIN” of the address “F043” is a storage area for the symbol combination display flag. In this embodiment, the replay is assigned to the D0 bit and 1BB is assigned to the D3 bit. For example, when it is determined that the replay symbol has stopped, the D0 bit is set to “1”. Then, this bit is changed from “1” to “0” when the next game is started (when the start switch 41 is operated).
Although not provided in this embodiment, when 2BB, CB, and RB (single win) are provided, for example, 2 bits are provided for the D1 bit, and CB and D4 bits are provided for the D2 bit so as to correspond to the operation state flag. Assigning RBs.

  In FIG. 13, "_PT_MEDAL_LED" of the address "F01D" is a storage area of the insertion number display LED data, and three to one insertion indicator LEDs 73g to 73e are assigned to bits D0 to D2, respectively. For example, when only the D2 bit is “1”, control is performed so that only the one-sheet insertion LED 73e is turned on. When the D1 and D2 bits are “1”, control is performed so that the one-sheet insertion display LED 73e and the two-sheet insertion display LED 73f are turned on.

Further, “_NB_REP_MEDAL” of the address “F06A” is a storage area for the automatically inserted number data (data indicating the number of medals to be automatically bet at the time of the replay winning), and in this embodiment, “3” is stored.
“_NB_PLAY_MEDAL” of the address “F06B” is a storage area for medal bet number data, and in this embodiment, any one of “0” to “3” is stored.
“_NB_PAY_MEDAL” of the address “F06C” is a storage area for medal payout number data, and in the present embodiment, any one of values “0” to “9” is stored. In the present embodiment, since the maximum number of medals to be paid out in one game is nine, the maximum value of the number of medals to be paid out is “9”. However, for example, when the 15-sheet payout combination is provided, the medal payout number data is “0” to “15”.

“_BF_PAY_MEDAL” of the address “F06D” is a storage area of the medal payout number data buffer, and in the present embodiment, any of the values “0” to “9”, like “_NB_PAY_MEDAL” of the address “F06C”. Is stored.
In this embodiment, when the winning combination is determined, both the value of “_NB_PAY_MEDAL” of the address “F06C” and the value of “_BF_PAY_MEDAL” of the address “F06D” are updated. At the time of this update, the same value is stored in both addresses. Then, “_NB_PAY_MEDAL” of the address “F06C” is decremented every time one medal is paid out, and becomes “0” at the end of the medal payout. On the other hand, the value of “_BF_PAY_MEDAL” of the address “F06D” is maintained without being updated by the medal payout. The stored value is maintained until the value is updated at the end of the next game.

  “_NB_PAYOUT” at the address “F00E” is a storage area for the acquired number data. When the small role wins and the medal is paid out, the payout number is stored in the acquired number data. The display of the acquired number display LED 72 is controlled based on this data. For example, when the acquired number data is "1", this data "1" is read and "01" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 72 (digits 3 and 4).

Here, “_NB_PAY_MEDAL (medal payout number data)” of the above-mentioned address “F06C” is stored with “9” when, for example, a winning combination of nine is won, and when paying out medals (including addition to the stored number). The counter is decremented according to the number of payouts, such as "9" → "8" → "7" → ... → "0".
On the other hand, “_NB_PAYOUT (acquired number data)” of the address “F00E” is, for example, “1” → “2” → “3” →. Is a counter that is added according to the medal payout.
Therefore, the display by the acquired number display LED 72 is performed using “_NB_PAYOUT (acquired number data)”.

“_NB_CREDIT” of the address “F00D” is a storage area of the stored number display data, and stores data for displaying the stored number at the time in the stored number display LED 71 described above.
Here, in the present embodiment, the data itself is a hexadecimal number (H), but a value obtained by converting the stored number into a decimal number is stored. For example, when the stored number of sheets to be displayed is “29”, the value “29H” is stored. In other words, “00101001B” is stored in the address “F00D”. Thus, the lower 4 bits of D0 to D3 of the address “F00D” are used to display the lower digit (“9” in this example) of the stored number, and the upper 4 bits of D4 to D7 are used to indicate the stored number. The upper digit (in this example, “2”) is stored as data for displaying. In the present embodiment, since the upper limit of the number of stored sheets is “50”, the stored data value is in a range of “0” to “50”.

  In the present embodiment, the address of the RWM 61 for storing the stored number data itself is not provided, but the stored number display data is provided as the display data of the stored number display LED 71. However, the stored number display data is the stored number data itself.

In FIG. 14, “_CT_SEG_DSP” at the address “F00F” is a storage area for storing the value of the LED display request counter described above. “_FL_SEG_DSP” at the address “F010” is a storage area for storing the value of the above-described LED display request flag.
Further, “_BF_ERR_DSP” of the address “F011” is a storage area for storing the content of the error that has occurred when a recoverable error has occurred in the slot machine 10. If no recoverable error has occurred, “00H” is stored. When a recoverable error occurs, a value corresponding to the generated error is stored, and in this embodiment, nine types of errors are detected as shown in FIG. Note that the recoverable error is not limited to this.
During the occurrence of a recoverable error, the value corresponding to the error is stored, but when the cause of the error is removed (when the error is recovered), the value is updated to “00H”.

  “_PT_STS_LED” of the address “F012” is a storage area for storing ON / OFF of the game start display LED 73d (D0), the insertion enable display LED 73b (D2), and the replay display LED 73a (D3) among the above-mentioned status display LEDs 73. is there.

  In FIG. 15, “_CT_BB1_PAY” at addresses “F060” and “F061” is an acquired number counter (storage area for storing the maximum number of medals that can be acquired in a 1BB game) at the time of 1BB operation. At the start of the 1BB game, “451” (decimal number) is set as an initial value. Then, each time a medal is paid out, the stored value is subtracted. That is, the 1BB game of the present embodiment ends with the payout of more than 450 medals. Since the acquired number counter at the time of 1BB operation counts the range of “0” to “451” (decimal number), the address “F060” (upper 8 bits) and “F061” (lower 8 bits) for 2 bytes ), For example, when the range of “0” to “255” or less is adopted, only the 1-byte address “F060” is used.

“_CT_BONUS_PLAY” at the address “F073” is a storage area of the number-of-games counter during the RB operation, and in this embodiment, “0” to “2” are stored.
Further, “_CT_BONUS_WIN” of the address “F074” is a storage area of a winning number counter at the time of RB operation, and in this embodiment, “0” to “2” are stored.
Here, in the present embodiment, 1BB (casing machine continuous operation device) is provided as a big bonus, and during 1BB game, RB (first-class special machine) is activated (the RB game is executed). Is set. Further, the RB game is set so as to be continued until the number of games or at least two of the winnings is satisfied and to operate continuously until the end condition of the 1BB game (payout exceeding 450) is satisfied. ing.
Therefore, during the 1BB game, the number of games and the number of winnings of the RB game are continuously counted.

  “_CT_INTR” of the addresses “F02B” and “F02C” is a storage area of the interrupt counter (also referred to as an interrupt counter value storage unit). The value of the interrupt counter is an increment counter having a range of “0” to “65535”, and the value is updated (“+1”) for each interrupt. In the present embodiment, since "0" to "65535" are adopted as the value of the interrupt counter, the 2-byte address "F02B" (upper 8 bits) is stored in the same manner as the above-described acquired number counter at the time of 1BB operation. Although “F02C” (lower 8 bits) is used, for example, when the range of “0” to “255” is adopted, only the 1-byte address “F02B” is used.

  "_TM2_GAME" of the address "F03A" is a timer for monitoring one minimum game time. When "1836" is set as an initial value, the timer is decremented by "1" for each interrupt. The minimum game time of this embodiment is set to “4.1 seconds” (2.235 ms × 1836 ≒ 4100 ms).

“_NB_CND_NOR” of the address “F039” is a storage area of a winning and replay condition device number (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “condition device number”), and a lottery of the condition device is performed. The value corresponding to the winning and replay condition device is stored. The value stored here is used for selection of a stop position determination table used for stop control of the reel 31, AT lottery (addition during AT), selection of a production group number, and the like.
In this embodiment, the winning device (small role) and the replay condition device numbers “0” to “51”, which are condition devices that do not carry the winning information to the next game, and the role device that is a condition device that can carry the winning information to the next game. Object condition device number “1”. The storage area of the winning and replay condition device number at the address “F039” is a storage device of the condition device that does not carry the winning information to the next game.

  On the other hand, “_NB_CND_BNS” of the address “F040” is a storage area of the accessory condition device number that can carry the winning information. Is stored. This value is also used for selection of a stop position determination table used for stop control of the reel 31, AT lottery (addition during AT), selection of an effect group number, and the like, similarly to the above. When two 1BBs are provided, or when one 2BB is provided in addition to one 1BB, not only the presence or absence of the special role (bonus role) but also the type of the special role winning is indicated. , One of “0”, “1”, and “2” is stored.

“_NB_RT_STS” of the address “F001” is a storage area for storing the RT state number. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, there are six types of RT states, “0” (non-RT) to “5” (RT5), and data indicating which RT is the current RT is. Is stored.
“_NB_GAM_STS” of the address “F08F” is a storage area for storing the number of the main gaming state. In the present embodiment, there are eight main game states, “main game state 0” to “main game state 7”, and data indicating which main game state is the current main game state is stored. I do. For example, when the main game state is 0, “0” is stored.

“_CT_GAM_STS” of the address “F099” is a storage area for storing a precursor counter and an AT counter value. In the present embodiment, during non-AT (so-called "normal") (a state in which the user does not have the right to execute AT), a lottery is performed to determine whether to execute AT based on the winning condition device. Then, when it is determined to execute the AT, the precursor counter value is determined by lottery. The precursor counter value is determined to any one of the range from “0” to “32” in decimal, and the determined value is stored in the storage area of the address. Then, for each game, the counter value is decremented by “1”, and when the counter value becomes “0”, the game shifts to AT preparation (game state before AT is executed).
In the AT, the initial value of the number of games played by the AT (for example, “30” in decimal) is stored at the address. Then, for each game, the counter value is decremented by “1”, and when the counter value becomes “0”, the AT ends.
In addition, since there is no simultaneous progress between the precursor (during the non-AT period) and the AT period, at one address “F099”, a precursor counter that counts the number of precursor games and an AT counter that counts the number of games during the AT. , And the storage capacity of the RWM 61 can be reduced.

“_NB_ORD_INF” of the address “F0B8” is a storage area for storing a pressing order instruction number. In the present embodiment, for each of the winning (winning and replaying) condition devices, a pressing order advantageous to the player is assigned (including both a case having a pressing order advantageous to the player and a case not having the pressing order). When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the pressing order instruction information corresponding to the winning condition device is obtained and stored at this address. For example, as shown in FIG. 34, when the winning condition device number is “23”, the pressing order instruction information is “1”, so this “1” is stored.
Note that “when the predetermined condition is satisfied” is when “Yes” is obtained in step S214 of FIG. 52 described later (when the pressing order is instructed). Therefore, in the push order instruction state, the push order instruction number is acquired and stored in the RWM 61. However, when the push order instruction state is not set, the processing after step S215 is not executed. Is not executed.

  “_NB_ACT_GRP” of the address “F0B7” is a storage area for storing the effect group number. In the present embodiment, when the lottery of the condition device is performed, the effect group number corresponding to the winning condition device is selected. For example, as shown in FIG. 36, when the winning condition device number is “23”, “13” is selected as the effect group number, and this “13” is stored.

  In FIG. 16, “_NB_CNDINF_N” of the address “F04C” is a storage area for winning and replay condition device information, and when a lottery of a condition device is performed, a number (condition device number) corresponding to the winning condition device is stored. Is done. In other words, the real address is a storage area for storing information to be generated based on “_NB_CND_NOR” of the address “F039” and to be transmitted to the tester. In the prize and replay condition device information, information is generated such that the D6 bit is always “1”, and the D0 to D5 bits have a value (“0” in the present embodiment) corresponding to the winning condition device. To “51”) are stored. For example, when "00000101B" is stored in the address "F039" (in this embodiment, when the replay B4 is won), "010000101B" is stored in the address "F04C". When "00000000B" is stored in the address "F039" (when the condition device number is "0"), "01000000B" is stored in the address "F04C".

  “_NB_CNDINF_B” of the address “F04D” is a storage area of the accessory condition device number, and corresponds to the winning condition device according to the presence or absence of winning of 1BB (or 2BB if 2BB is provided). Is stored. In other words, this address is a storage area for storing information to be generated based on “_NB_CND_BNS” of the address “F040” and transmitted to the tester. In this accessory condition device information, information is generated so that the D7 bit is always “1”. Further, when the 1BB is not won, the D0 bit is set to “0”, and when the 1BB is won or during the inside of 1BB, the D0 bit is generated. The bit is set to "1". For example, when “00000001B” is stored in the address “F040” (in this embodiment, when 1BB is won), “10000001B” is stored in the address “F04D”. When “00000000B” is stored in the address “F040” (in this embodiment, when 1BB is not won), “10000000B” is stored in the address “F04D”.

“_TM1_COND_OUT” of the address “F030” is an area for storing a timer value for measuring an output time of the condition device signal (winning and replay condition device information, and accessory condition device information). In the present embodiment, After the minimum game time has elapsed, “25” is set, and “1” is decremented for each interruption. The subtraction of the timer value is performed in step S605 (timer measurement) of the interrupt process described later.
In the present embodiment, approximately 53.64 ms is counted by 24 interrupts, and this 53.64 ms is the output time of the condition device signal. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, after the minimum game time has elapsed, the timer value is set to “25”, and then the timer value is updated to “24” in the first interrupt processing. Then, while the timer value is "24" to "13", it outputs the accessory condition device information (_NB_CNDINF_B), and while the timer value is "12" to "1", the winning and replay condition device information (_NB_CNDINF_B) _NB_CNDINF_N). Further, while the timer value is “0”, a value of “0” is output as the condition device information.

“_BF_SUBCMD” of the addresses “F113” to “F153” is a storage area of a control command buffer (ring buffer), in which a control command to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 is stored. In this storage area, 64 bytes of “F113” to “F153” (H) are secured. The control commands are stored in the control command buffer in the order of addresses. When the control commands are stored at the address “F153”, the next address where the control commands are stored is “F113”.
“_NB_CMDREAD” of the address “F017” is a storage area of the control command read pointer value. This value is a value that stores which address of the control command buffer should be read, and is incremented by "1" when the data of the control command buffer at that address is read.

  “_NB_CMDSTORE” of the address “F018” is a storage area for the control command write pointer value. This value is a value that stores which address of the control command buffer should be used to write the control command. When the control command is written to the control command buffer at the address, the value is incremented by “1”.

Subsequently, a combination of symbols, a combination of symbols, and the like of the present embodiment will be described.
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a symbol arrangement of the reel 31 in the present embodiment. FIG. 17 also shows the symbol numbers. For example, on the left reel 31, the symbol with the symbol number 0 is "Replay B".

As shown in FIG. 17, in this embodiment, each reel 31 is equally divided into 20 frames, and a predetermined symbol is displayed on each frame.
As shown in FIG. 17, in the present embodiment, “Replay” includes different symbols “Replay A” and “Replay B”. The “watermelon” includes different patterns “watermelon A” and “watermelon B”. Furthermore, “BAR” includes different symbols “black BAR” and “white BAR”.

FIG. 18A shows a positional relationship between a display window (transparent window) 11 provided on a front mask portion (front door, not shown) of the slot machine 10, each reel 31, and an effective line (design). (A display line for displaying a combination of.).
In this embodiment, three reels 31 (left reel 31, middle reel 31, and right reel 31) are provided in the horizontal direction in this embodiment. Furthermore, each reel 31 is arranged so that three vertically continuous symbols can be seen from the display window 11. Accordingly, the symbols are arranged so that a total of nine symbols (frames) can be seen from the display window 11 of the slot machine 10. The number at the lower right of each symbol indicates a symbol number.

FIG. 18B illustrates the designation of the symbol position in this specification. In the present specification, the symbol positions at the time of stoppage viewed from the display window 11 are referred to as “upper”, “middle”, and “lower” in order from the top for each reel 31. "Stage", "middle left", and "lower left".
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 18A, effective lines are set for nine symbols visible from the display window 11.
Here, the "effective line" is a symbol combination line (display line) that forms a symbol combination when the reel 31 is stopped, and is a symbol combination line (display line). When the combination stops on that line, the winning line of the combination is obtained. In the present embodiment, one effective line (a straight line rising to the right passing through “lower left”-“middle middle”-“upper right”) is defined, and all other symbol combination lines are invalid lines. It has become. For example, a straight symbol combination line passing through the middle left, middle and right middle stages is an invalid line in the present embodiment.

  An invalid line is a line that is not set as an active line among the symbol combination lines, and even if a combination of symbols corresponding to any of the combinations is stopped on that line, a profit is given according to the combination. This is a line in which (medal payout, etc.) is not performed. That is, the invalid line is a line that is not a target for the formation of the symbol combination in the first place.

  In addition, conventionally, there is known a slot machine in which the number of valid lines differs according to the number of inserted medals. For example, when the number of inserted medals is one, the number of valid lines is set to one, when the number of inserted medals is two, the number of valid lines is set to three, and when the number of inserted medals is three, the number of valid lines is set to five. And so on. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, during the game, two or three medals are inserted to play the game, and in all the games, one of the medals shown in FIG. There is no change in the number of effective lines due to the number of inserted sheets. Therefore, in this specification, the term “effective line” refers to a straight line obliquely rising to the right as shown in FIG.

19 to 26 are diagrams showing combinations of types, combinations of payout numbers, etc., and symbols in the present embodiment (combinations included in a condition device which is randomly selected by the lottery means 61 described later). In FIG. 26, specific symbols 01 to 03 (spilled eyes) are also shown as combinations of symbols which are not a combination but may be displayed when a specific condition device is won (FIG. 26). Medium, role numbers "155" to "160" (described later).
The role of the present embodiment is roughly divided into a special role, a replay, and a small role.
Then, the combination of symbols corresponding to each combination, the number of payouts at the time of winning, and the like are determined. When all the reels 31 stop, the combination of symbols corresponding to any of the combinations stops on the activated line (the combination wins. The same applies hereinafter), and the number of medals corresponding to the combination is paid out.
However, the payout number at the time of winning the special combination is set to zero. In the replay, medals are automatically inserted (replay).

As shown in FIG. 19, the special combination has 1BB (first type big bonus) (combination number “1”). Other special roles include 2BB (second type big bonus; also referred to as middle bonus (MB)), RB (regular bonus), SB (single bonus), and the like. Is not provided.
The special role is a role to shift from the normal game to the special game.
When 1BB is won, there is no payout of medals in the game, but the game shifts from the next game to a 1BB game corresponding to a special game.
The 1BB game is an advantageous game for the player, in which the winning rate is set to exceed 1, so that a medal can be expected to be obtained more than the normal game.

In addition, the replay (re-gaming combination) is a combination that enables a re-gaming while maintaining the number of medals inserted in the game (automatic betting of medals).
The replay of the present embodiment includes replays 01 to 13 (role numbers "2" to "77") as shown in FIGS. Further, one or a plurality of symbol combinations are provided for one replay. For example, as shown in FIG. 22, there is one type of symbol combination of the replay 10 (role number "73"). On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, Replay 07 (role numbers "36" to "67") has a total of 32 combinations of symbols.

Replay 01 is called normal replay.
Replay 02 is one type of normal replay, and is a replay that is set so as to be overlapped with a replay for shifting RT (referred to as “RT shift replay”).
Replays 03 to 06 are RT shift replays. The RT shift replay is a replay that shifts from the RT in the game to another RT when the replay wins in the game. In the present embodiment, the replays 03 and 04 are replays for shifting to an RT that is more disadvantageous to the player than the RT up to that time (referred to as “falling replay” or “pan replay”). On the other hand, the replays 05 and 06 are replays (referred to as “promotion replays”) for shifting to an RT that is more advantageous to the player than the RT up to then.

Replay 07 is a replay that can be in a so-called middle cherry stop mode (a “cherry” symbol stop at the middle left position). "White BAR" (role numbers "36" to "43") and "blank" (role numbers "60" to "67") are provided as symbols on the left reel 31 of the replay 07. Stops at the active line (lower left), "Cherry" stops at the middle left. Also, when winning the combination numbers “52” to “59”, “Cherry” stops on the activated line (lower left). Furthermore, when winning the combination numbers “44” to “51”, “Cherry” does not appear in the display window 11 when the left reel 31 is stopped.
Replay 09 is a replay in which a combination of symbols used as a chance eye appears in the present embodiment. That is, at the time of winning the condition device including the replay 09, the AT (the AT execution number is added during the AT) is randomly selected.

The replays 10 to 13 have a role as control replays, and are replays provided to increase the number of combinations of replays that have been repeatedly won (the number of condition devices). Never stop on the line.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a specific condition is satisfied, the combination of symbols of the control replay may be stopped at the activated line. For example, when a specific condition device including a control replay is won at a specific RT (for example, inside middle game) and the stop switch 42 is operated in a specific pressing order and a specific operation timing, the control replay is performed. Is stopped at the activated line.

  The small wins include small wins 01 to 24 (role numbers "78" to "154") as shown in FIGS. In the column of the number of small payouts, for example, “9/9” in FIG. 23 indicates a winning when the accessory (1BB in the present embodiment) is not operated (ie, other than during 1BB game). Means that 9 coins are paid out, and the winning time when the accessory is activated (that is, during 1BB game) means that 9 coins are paid out.

The small wins 01 to 08 are wins included in the condition device of the push order bell, and when the condition device of the push order bell is won, in the correct answer order, the small win 01 or 02 (the high-order bell of paying out 9 sheets) is placed. The player wins the prize, and small players 04 to 08 (one-piece payout bell) win in the wrong push order.
The small wins 09 to 20 are used to display a specific symbol (to be described later, which is described in role numbers “155” to “160”), and are correct when the condition device including the small wins 09 to 20 is won. When the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order, these small wins win. However, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the wrong push order, the small wins and the specific symbol are displayed. And when.

The small roles 21 to 23 are so-called “watermelon roles” (rare roles), and when the small role 21 is awarded, “watermelon A” or “watermelon B” is stopped in the middle and middle row (by pressing, “watermelon” is displayed on the middle line). A "or" watermelon B ").
Also, when the small role 22 is won, “watermelon A” or “watermelon B” stops on the activated line.
Furthermore, at the time of winning the small role 23, "watermelon A" or "watermelon B" is stopped at the lower left stage ("watermelon A" or "watermelon B" is aligned on the lower line by pushing).
Note that the so-called “cherry combination” is not provided as a small combination, and as described above, a replay in which the “cherry” stops is provided.
The small combination 24 is a combination included in the condition device which is drawn only when the combination is operated, that is, only during the 1BB game.

  As described above, the specific symbols 01 to 03 are not the combination itself. However, when the combination of the symbols stops at the activated line in the specific RT (non-RT, RT2, RT3 in this embodiment), the RT is shifted ( In this embodiment, the combination of symbols is shifted to RT1). As described above, when a condition device including at least one of the small wins 09 to 20 is won, this is displayed when the winning small wins 09 to 20 cannot be won.

In each of the above-mentioned roles, if the combination of symbols corresponding to the role does not stop on the activated line in the game won as the role, the role carried over after the next game and the role not carried over are defined. .
The role carried over is a special role (1BB in this embodiment). When the special role is won, in a game until the special role is won, the winning information of the special role is controlled to be carried over to the next game and thereafter.

  On the other hand, while the winning of the special role is carried over, small roles and replays other than the special role are not carried over. In the lottery of the condition device, when a small combination or a replay is won, the winning combination is valid only in the game, and the winning is not carried over after the next game. In other words, in the game in which the winning combination is won, the reel 31 is controlled to stop so that the combination of the symbols corresponding to the winning combination can be won, but regardless of whether or not the winning combination is won, at the end of the game. , The right to win the elected role will be extinguished.

  A game that has not been won as a special role (during a game in which the special role has not been carried over) is referred to as “non-internal”. In addition, during a game in which a special role has been won in a game prior to the game but the selected special role has not been won (during a game in which the winning of the special role has been carried over), it is referred to as “inside”.

  At the start of the game, the player operates the bet switch 40 to insert a medal stored in advance, or inserts a medal from the medal slot 43, and operates (turns on) the start switch 41. When the start switch 41 is operated, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 60. Upon receiving this signal, the main control board 60 (specifically, a later-described reel control unit 63g) drives and controls all the motors 32 so as to rotate all the reels 31. When the reel 31 is rotated by the motor 32 in this manner, the symbols on the reel 31 are moved and displayed in the display window 11 at a predetermined speed in the vertical direction.

  Then, by pressing the stop switch 42, the player stops the rotation of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 (for example, the left reel 31 corresponding to the left stop switch 42). When the stop switch 42 is operated, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 60. Upon receiving this signal, the main control board 60 (specifically, a reel control means 63g described later) drives and controls the motor 32 corresponding to the stop switch 42, and controls the stop of the reel 31 related to the motor 32. I do.

  Then, the game result of the game is displayed by the combination of symbols when all the reels 31 are stopped. Further, when the combination of symbols corresponding to any of the winning combinations stops on the activated line (when the winning of the winning combination), the payout of the medal corresponding to the winning winning combination is performed.

Next, a specific configuration of the main control board 60 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 1, the main CPU 63 of the main control board 60 includes the following setting change means 63a. The following means in the present embodiment are exemplifications, and are not limited to the means shown in the present embodiment.

The setting change means 63a is a means for changing and determining a set value.
Here, the set value defines the degree of advantage of the player, more specifically, the degree of the expected value of the number of payouts with respect to the number of inserted medals (medals that can be obtained by the player). There are six stages from 1 to 6.
The higher the set value, the higher the winning probability of at least some of the winning combinations (especially, 1BB). For example, the higher the setting value, the higher the advantage for the player.
Further, the setting is made such that the higher the set value, the higher the probability of winning the AT.
Note that the present invention is not limited to increasing the probability of shifting to the AT, but may increase the probability of adding the number of games and the number of payouts during the AT or increase the probability of continuing the AT.

To set and change the set value, a power switch 51, a setting key switch 52, and a setting change / reset switch 53 are used.
In the present embodiment, after the power switch 51 is once turned off, the power is turned off, the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot, and the setting key switch 52 is turned on by rotating the setting key 90 degrees clockwise. If the power switch 51 is turned on again in this state, the setting is changed, that is, the setting change mode is set. In this case, normal startup processing is not performed. Therefore, to change the setting, the power switch 51 needs to be turned on / off.

In the setting change mode, the setting change unit 63a displays the current set value on the set value display LED 64.
Each time the setting change / reset switch 53 is operated (turned on) once, the setting change means 63a changes the display of the set value from... → “1” → “2” → “3” → “4”. ”→“ 5 ”→“ 6 ”→“ 1 ”→“ 2 ”→...

Further, when the start switch 41 is turned on, the setting change means 63a determines the set value based on the numerical value displayed on the set value display LED 64 at this time, and indicates "0" indicating that the set value has been determined. Is displayed on the set value display LED 64. The set value determined here is stored as set value data in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 61.
The setting change unit 63a turns the setting key 90 degrees counterclockwise to turn off the setting key switch 52, thereby enabling a game with the set value after the setting change.

In this embodiment, the setting key switch 52 is determined to be OFF based on the falling data of the setting key switch 52. However, the setting key switch 52 is turned on / off. It may be configured to be executed on the basis of.
Further, the game may not be played with the set value after the setting change unless the setting key is removed from the setting key insertion slot.
Further, if the setting key is turned 90 degrees counterclockwise to turn off the setting key switch 52, the setting key is removed from the setting key insertion slot, and in this state, the power switch 51 must be turned off once and then turned on again. The game may not be played with the set value after the setting is changed.

Further, in a state where no medals are bet and no lottery is performed (before the start switch 41 is operated), the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot and the setting key switch 52 is turned on. "Setting is being checked." That is, if only the set value is checked, it is not necessary to turn on / off the power switch 51. During the setting confirmation, the setting value at the present time is displayed on the setting display LED 64 in the same manner as during the setting change.
Furthermore, when the power switch 51 is turned on while the setting key switch 52 is turned on, a reset, that is, an initialization process is performed. This initialization processing will be described later.

The condition device lottery means 63b performs a lottery (determination, selection) of the condition device (that is, the winning combination). Here, the “condition device” is a role lottery target composed of one or a plurality of roles. For example, when one condition device is won (determined and selected), the role included in the condition device is won.
Therefore, the condition device lottery means 63b is also referred to as a winning lottery means, a winning combination determining (or selecting) means, or the like.
The “winning of the condition device” is also referred to as a winning combination drawing result, a winning number, a winning result, or the like.
The condition device lottery means 63b is based on, for example, a random number generation means (hardware random number or the like) for lottery, a random number extraction means for extracting a random number generated by the random number generation means, and a random number value extracted by the random number extraction means. Determining means for determining whether or not the condition device has been won and the condition device which has been won. Such a lottery method is the same in the following AT lottery and the like.

  The random number generating means generates a random number in a predetermined area (for example, “0” to “65535” in decimal). The random number is, for example, a random number that is counted by a counter that counts one in 200 n (nano) seconds and keeps counting from one cycle of “0” to “65535” as long as the slot machine 10 is powered on. Keep counting.

  The random number extracting means extracts the random number generated by the random number generating means at a predetermined time, in this embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on) by the player. The determination unit determines the condition device corresponding to the area to which the random value belongs by comparing the random number value extracted by the random number extraction unit with a condition device lottery table described later. For example, if the extracted random number value belongs to the area of the winning and replay condition device “1” (replay A), it is determined that the winning and replay condition device “1” has been won.

FIG. 27 to FIG. 31 are diagrams showing the types of condition devices drawn by the condition device lottery means 63b and the contents of the winning combinations included in each condition device.
In the following description, the condition device will be mainly described, and details of the stop control of the reel 31 based on the pressing order and the operation timing (eye pressing) at the time of the condition device winning will be described in the reel control unit 63g. .

The condition device of the present embodiment is a condition device that does not carry over the winning information to the next game. Become.
The winning and replay condition device corresponds to a so-called small role or replay winning, and includes winning and replay condition device numbers “1” to “51”.
The accessory condition apparatus corresponds to the winning of the special combination (1BB in this embodiment), and has an accessory condition apparatus number “1”.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 31, the accessory condition apparatus number "1" is a single winning of 1BB. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an overlap winning of 1BB and a small role or replay may be adopted. In this case, the winning of 1BB is carried over, but the small role or replay that has been won overlapping with 1BB does not carry over the winning.
In the following description, the winning and replay condition device is simply referred to as a “condition device” when there is no risk of being confused with the accessory condition device, or when both are collectively referred to.

First, the winning and replay condition device will be described.
The condition device number “0” corresponds to a non-winning of a combination (so-called loss).
The replay A of the condition device number “1” is a winning of the normal replay, and includes replays 01 and 02 (overlapping winning).
The replays B1 to B5 of the condition device numbers “2” to “6” correspond to the RT shift replay, and all of them are the replay 05 and the replay 01 and / or 02 overlapping winning. Replay 05 wins when the stop switch 42 is operated in a specific pressing order, and replay 01 or 02 wins when the stop switch is operated in any other pressing order.
In FIG. 27, in “remarks” of replays B1 to B5 and C1 to C5, the display of “(*)” indicates a replay for shifting (promoting) RT. For example, in the replay B1, when the replay 05 wins, the RT shifts, and when the replay 01 or 02 wins, the RT does not shift.
Further, in FIG. 27 and subsequent figures, the numbers displayed in the remarks indicate the pressing order. The pressing order is indicated by "1" for the left stop switch 42, "2" for the middle stop switch 42, and "3" for the right stop switch 42.

Specifically, the pressing order is as follows.
123: middle left right 132: middle left and right 213: middle left and right 231: middle right left 312: right middle left 321: right middle left 1-: first stop left (second and third stops are optional. That is, left middle right and Means either left or right.)
-1-: During the first stop (the second and third stops are arbitrary; that is, one of the middle left and right and the middle right and left).
--1: First stop right (The second and third stops are arbitrary; that is, it means either the right middle left or the middle right middle)

In FIG. 27, the replays C1 to C5 of the condition device numbers “7” to “11” correspond to the RT shift replay, and all of them are the repetitions of the replay 06 and the replays 03 and / or 04. When the stop switch 42 is operated in a specific pressing order, Replay 06 (RT transition replay) wins, and when the stop switch is operated in any other pressing order, Replay 03 or 04 wins.
In FIG. 28, replays D1 to D3 of condition device numbers “12” to “14” correspond to RT shift replays, all of which are replay 01 or 02 and replay 03 and / or 04 overlap winning.
At the time of winning the replays D1 to D3, the replay that maintains (does not shift) the current RT is replay 01 or 02 (“(*)” in FIG. 28), and the replay 03 or 04 is a replay that drops the RT.

The replay E (weak cherry) of the condition device number “15” is a single win of the replay 07, and as described above, “cherry” is displayed in the display window 11 (in the embodiment, left It is a role that can appear in (bottom). Specifically, any of the role numbers “44” to “51” in FIGS. 21 and 22 (“Cherry” is not stopped and displayed in the display window 11 when the left reel 31 stops), or the role number “52” ”To“ 59 ”(“ Cherry ”is stopped and displayed at the lower stage when the left reel 31 is stopped).
The replay F (strong cherry) of the condition device number “16” is an overlap winning of the replays 07, 08, and 10. It is a role that can appear inside (in the embodiment, the middle left). Specifically, the same stop control as when the condition device number “15” is won is performed at the time of the forward push, but at the time of the irregular push (the first stop is middle or right and the push order after the second stop does not matter). In any of the role numbers "36" to "43" in FIG. 21 and FIG. 22 ("Cherry" is stopped and displayed at the middle stage when the left reel 31 is stopped), the role numbers "44" to "51" are displayed. Either (“Cherry” is not stopped and displayed in the display window 11 when the left reel 31 stops), any of the hand numbers “60” to “67” (“Cherry” stops at the middle stage when the left reel 31 stops) (Displayed) is controlled to be stopped.

  Here, for the condition device number “15” (weak cherry) and the condition device number “16” (strong cherry), for example, the number of duplicates to be won for the special role (1BB) is changed, Stopping by increasing the possibility that the player determined to have the condition device number “16” is more advantageous to the player by changing the number of winnings in the AT (including the additional lottery during the AT). The balance between the outcome and the game result (decision result) can be made appropriate.

The replays G1 to G3 of the condition device numbers “17” to “19” (middle cherries in the pushing order) are the replay 07 and the duplicate wins of the replays 01 and 02 (in addition, at least one of the replays 09 to 11 is included). It is. At the time of winning the replays G1 to G3, it is possible to display the middle cherry ("Cherry" stop at the middle left) according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42. In FIG. 28, “(*)” indicates a replay 07 that can be a middle cherry.
The replays H1 to H3 of the condition device numbers “20” to “22” are the multiple winnings including the replays 01 and 02 and the replay 09 (there may include the replays 10 or 11 in addition thereto). At the time of winning the replays H1 to H3, the replay 09 set at the chance can be stopped in accordance with the pressing order of the stop switch 42. In FIG. 28, “(*)” indicates a replay 09 serving as a chance.

  In FIG. 29, all of the small wins A1 to A6, B1 to B6, and C1 to C6 of the condition device numbers “23” to “40” are multiple wins of a plurality of small wins 01 to 08. It is a double win corresponding to "bell". Therefore, at the time of winning of these small wins A1, etc., if the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct answering order, a high-bell will win, and if the stop switch 42 is operated in an incorrect answering order, the low-bell will win. In FIGS. 29 and 30, “(*)” indicates nine high-bells (one low-bell).

The small role D of the condition device number “41” is a winning combination of the small roles 01 to 03 (all nine), and the condition device (regardless of the pressing order) regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42, the winning of nine bells. Bell).
The condition device numbers "42" to "47" are the winning combinations of a plurality of small wins, and are condition devices that can display a specific symbol. In the present embodiment, the stop switch 42 is operated in a specific pressing order, and when the stop switch 42 is operated in the specific pressing order, a specific symbol is made to appear when a small winning combination that can be awarded is missed.

The small role F of the condition device number “48” is a so-called “weak watermelon” and is one of the rare roles. In the present embodiment, “watermelon A” or “watermelon B” can be stopped at a straight line by pushing.
The small role G of the condition device number “49” is a so-called “strong watermelon” and is one of the rare roles. In the present embodiment, when the small role F (weak watermelon) and the small role G (strong watermelon) are won, the AT lottery is performed (additional lottery during the AT). The lottery is performed under conditions where the AT winning probability and the like are more favorable for the player than at the time of winning. At the time of winning the small role G, "watermelon A" or "watermelon B" can be stopped in a straight line by pushing, similarly to the time of winning the small role F.

The small combination H of the condition device number “50” is a condition device for winning the small combination 07 or the small combination 08 positioned as the strong chance. At the time of winning the replays H1 to H3 (push order chance) and the small role H (strong chance) of the condition device numbers “20” to “22”, the AT lottery (additional lottery during the AT) is performed. However, the lottery is performed under the condition that the AT winning probability and the like are more favorable for the player in the small role H winning than in the replay H1 to H3 winning.
As shown in FIG. 31, the small combination I of the condition device number "51" is a small combination (special combination) which is won during the RB game. The small role I is an overlapping winning of all small roles (small roles 01 to 24).
In addition, 1BB of the bonus condition apparatus number “1” is a single winning of the special combination 1BB, and is a condition apparatus in which the winning information is carried over to the next game until a prize is won.

FIG. 32 shows the winning probabilities determined by the condition device lottery table when the condition device lottery means 63b performs the lottery of the condition devices, and shows the winning and replay condition devices for each RT and the winning probabilities (numbers). FIG. That is, FIG. 32 does not show the accessory condition device (the condition device including 1BB in the winning combination) and its winning probability.
The condition device lottery table defines the winning probability of the condition device for each RT. The numerical value shown in FIG. 32 is a value with respect to the numerical value “65536”. For example, the probability numerical value “8938” which is a non-winning condition device number “1” (replay A) in non-RT (winning and replay) is It indicates that the winning probability is “8938/65536”.

First, in non-RT, only replay A is provided as a condition device corresponding to winning of replay, and other replays are not drawn.
In the case of RT other than RT5 (1BB game), replay A is always selected by lot. Further, at RT1 to RT4, a unique replay is drawn. As shown in FIG. 32, replays B1 to B5 and replays E and F are randomly selected in RT1, replays C1 to C5 and replays E and F are randomly selected in RT2, and replays D1 to D3, E, F, and G1 to RT3. G3, H1 to H3 are drawn.

In RT5 (1BB game), no replay is drawn.
Looking at the combined winning probability of replay, non-RT is the lowest (excluding RT5), RT1 and RT2 are higher than non-RT (RT1 and RT2 have the same probability), and RT3 is the highest. Since the RT3 is an RT that controls to stay during the AT, the winning probability of the replay is set to the highest. For this reason, in this embodiment, it can be said that AT is ART (AT + RT (replay high probability)).

The small wins A1 to C6 corresponding to the pressing order bell and the other small wins DH are drawn by RT except RT5.
The small role I is drawn only at RT5. The winning probability of the small role I at RT5 is “1” (65536/65536).
Although not shown in FIG. 32, since non-RT and RT1 to RT3 are in non-internal, a condition device including 1BB is drawn by lot. In RT4 (internal) and RT5 (in 1BB game), Condition devices including 1BB are not drawn.

In the condition device lottery table, the condition devices including 1BB and their numbers are set, for example, as follows.
(1) 1BB (Single Win): Number "40"
(2) 1BB + Replay E (weak cherry): Number "20"
(3) 1BB + replay F (strong cherry): Numerical value "90"
(4) 1BB + small part F (weak watermelon): Number "25"
(5) 1BB + small role G (strong watermelon): Number "65"
(6) 1BB + small role H (high chance): number "60"
Specifically, there is a case where 1BB alone is won and a case where 1BB and a small role, a replay or a chance are duplicated and won. In addition, the probability that a strong cherry is stronger than a weak cherry, a stronger watermelon than a weak watermelon, and a stronger chance than a weak chance is set to have a higher probability of being repeatedly won with 1BB at the time of winning.
The winning and replay condition device number (_NB_CND_NOR) stores “0” in the case of (1), “15” in the case of (2), and “15” in the case of (3). Stores “16”, “48” is stored in the case of (4), “49” is stored in the case of (5), and “50” is stored in the case of (6). Will be stored.
Although details will be described later, the effect group number and the pressing order instruction number are determined based on the winning and replay condition device number (_NB_CND_NOR), and the game for which the special role has been won is also determined by the same processing.

The description returns to FIG.
The winning flag control means 63c controls on / off of a winning flag corresponding to each winning combination based on a lottery result by the condition device lottery means 63b. In the present embodiment, a winning flag is provided for every combination. Then, when one of the condition devices is won in the lottery by the condition device lottery means 63b, the winning flag of the hand included in the condition device is turned on (the winning flag is set).

  For example, when the player wins the replay B1 of the condition device number “2” in the non-internal middle game, three winning flags of replay 01, replay 02, and replay 05 included in the condition device are turned on, and the other roles are set. Is turned off.

Further, as described above, the winning of the small role and replay other than the special role is not carried over, so even if the small role or the replay is won in the game and the winning flag of these roles is turned on, the game is not carried out. At the end, the winning flag is turned off.
On the other hand, the winning of the special role is carried over, so if the special role is won in the game and the winning flag related to the selected special role is once turned on, it remains on until the special role wins. Maintained and turned off when the special role is won.

For example, when the condition device lottery means 63b wins 1BB of the accessory condition device number "1", the 1BB winning flag is turned on in the game, and if 1BB is not won in the game, the 1BB winning flag is turned on. Is maintained.
Further, in the next game, when the small device A1 of the condition device number “23” is won, in addition to the 1BB that has been carried over, a total of four winning flags of the small portion 01, the small portion 04, and the small portion 05 are displayed. When 1BB is not won at the end of the game, the winning flag of 1BB is kept on, and the winning flags of the small win 01, the small win 04, and the small win 05 are turned off.

The AT lottery means 63d performs a predetermined RT (non-RT, RT1 to RT3, RT5, no AT lottery in the RT4) in the predetermined RT (in the present embodiment, no AT lottery), the predetermined condition device In the case of winning, the lottery of the AT (including the lottery of the number of stock per initial) is performed.
In the present embodiment, an AT lottery (lottery of the initial stock number) is performed in non-RT, RT1 to RT3 when the AT is not won. During the AT, an additional lottery is performed for the AT stock.
In the present embodiment, the AT lottery state when the AT has not been won is provided with a low probability, a normal, and a high accuracy with different probabilities of winning the AT, and the AT lottery means 63d, depending on the selected condition device, The above-mentioned low-probability, normal, high-precision transition, and transition to the precursor are determined by lottery. Here, when the transition to the precursor is determined, it corresponds to the AT winning (first hit).

  Further, in RT5 (1BB game described later), a lottery is performed at a predetermined probability for each game. At RT5, a lottery may be performed with a predetermined probability for each game regardless of the winning condition device, or a random selection may be performed with a predetermined probability based on the winning condition device. In the present embodiment, based on the winning of the condition device number “51” (winning probability “1”), an AT lottery for winning with a probability of “1/50” is executed.

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing an AT lottery table used in the AT lottery means 63d.
In this embodiment, in the non-RT and RT1 to RT3, as a result of the lottery by the condition device lottery means 63b, the condition devices “1”, “15” to “22”, “41”, and “48” to “50” are won. Then, a shift lottery (also serving as an AT lottery) in the AT lottery state is performed. In FIG. 33, for example, when the condition device number “15” (weak cherry) is won during the high accuracy during the non-AT, the shift is performed with low probability with the probability of “1/50” and the probability of “1/50”. To move to a normal state, and to a precursor with a probability of “1/50” (that is, to win the AT).

Note that the normal replay of the winning and replay condition device number “1” is positioned as a condition device in which the AT lottery state falls. In addition, the weak cherry of the condition device “15” has a case where the AT lottery state falls or is promoted or a case where it shifts to a precursor (wins AT).
Furthermore, the condition devices “16” to “22”, “41”, “48” to “50” are so-called rare roles, and the AT lottery state is promoted or shifts to a precursor (wins AT) ) It corresponds to a possible condition device.
Further, during the 1BB game (RT5), an AT lottery is executed so as to win with a probability of “1/50”. Note that, when an AT lottery is won during the 1BB game, the AT lottery may not be performed during the subsequent 1BB game, or the AT lottery may be continued.

Further, the AT lottery means 63d also executes a lottery of the AT stock number at the time of the AT winning. The lottery of the AT stock number may take various forms. For example, “1 (single shot)” is “4/10”, “2” is “2/10”,... Is performed. The number of stocks is made different depending on the winning AT lottery state, the condition device that triggered the winning, and the like (detailed description is omitted).
When a so-called rare role is won during the AT, an additional (addition) lottery for the AT stock number is performed.

The pushing order instruction number selecting means 63e selects the pushing order instruction number based on the result of the lottery of the condition device by the condition device lottery means 63b.
FIG. 34 is a diagram illustrating a pressing order instruction number table. In the figure, (A) shows the data structure of the pressing order instruction number table, and (B) shows the relationship between the address and data stored in the ROM 62.
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 34A, each of the (winning and replay) condition devices “0” to “51” has a unique pressing order instruction number. For example, the (push and replay) push order instruction number corresponding to the condition device number “1” (replay A) is “0”, and the push order instruction number corresponding to the condition device number “28” (small win A6) is “ 6 ".

FIG. 35 is a diagram showing the relationship between the pushing order instruction number and the pushing order advantageous to the player. The pushing order instruction number “0” does not have a pushing order that is advantageous to the player (the pushing order has no advantage / disadvantage, that is, the pushing order does not matter).
Each of the push order instruction numbers "1" to "9" has an advantageous push order for the player. For example, the advantageous pushing order corresponding to the pushing order designation number “2” is 132 (middle left and right), and the advantageous pushing order corresponding to the pushing order designation number “9” is the first right stop (the middle right and left). Or right middle left).

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the “push order advantageous to the player” corresponds to the following push order, and corresponds to the push order marked with “*” in FIGS. 27 to 39.
(1) At the time of replay overlap winning (condition device number “2” to “14”), the pushing order for promoting the RT or the pushing order for maintaining the advantageous RT (the pushing order that does not fall to the disadvantageous RT)
(2) Pushing order bell (condition device number "23" to "40") When winning, a pressing order in which a higher-level bell (9 pieces) is won. (3) Pushing order middle tier cherry (conditioning device number "17" to "19") )) Push order for winning replay 07 (middle cherries) at the time of winning (4) Push order Chance order (condition device number “20” to “22”)

  The pressing order instruction number table is stored in the storage area of the ROM 62 as shown in FIG. That is, the head address of the pressing order instruction number table is set to “1 EDC”, and the pressing order instruction numbers at the time of winning (winning and replay) condition device numbers “0” to “51” are set in order of address from “1 EDC”. It is remembered.

Then, for example, when the condition device number “10” is won, the condition device number “10” is used as an offset value and the address “10” ahead of the top address “1EDC” of the pressing order instruction number table, ie, “1EE6” By reading the data at the address No. 1, the push order instruction number "4" corresponding to the condition device number "10" is obtained.
In the present embodiment, after the lottery of each game and the condition device is performed, if the game is in a pushing order instruction state (when “Yes” in step S214 of FIG. 52 described later), the winning condition is determined. A push order instruction number corresponding to the device is obtained.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For each game, a pressing order instruction number may be uniformly obtained and transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in the pressing order instruction state (during AT).

In FIG. 1, the effect group number selecting means 63f selects an effect group number corresponding to the winning condition device, which is to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80.
As a result of performing the lottery of the condition device, the winning condition device information itself may be transmitted to the sub-control board 80. However, in the present embodiment, the winning condition device information itself is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80. As a result, the sub-control board 80 cannot know the condition number won in the game.
On the other hand, on the main control board 60 side, an effect group number corresponding to the winning condition device is determined in advance. Then, after the lottery of the condition device, the effect group number corresponding to the winning condition device is selected, and the effect group number is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. Upon receiving the effect group number selected in the game, the sub-control board 80 can select and output the effect corresponding to the effect group number.

FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an effect group number table. In the figure, (A) shows the data configuration of the effect group number table, and (B) shows the relationship between the address and data stored in the ROM 62.
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 36A, each (winning and replay) condition device “0” to “51” has a unique effect group number. For example, the effect group number corresponding to the condition device numbers “23” (small win A1) to “28” (small win A6) is defined as “13”.

Therefore, when the condition device number “23” is won as a result of the condition device lottery, the main control board 60 selects “13” as the effect group number. Then, the information of the selected effect group number “13” is transmitted to the sub-control board 80.
Upon receiving the information that the effect group number is "13", the sub-control board 80 can know that the player has won one of the small wins A (push order bell) in the game. Thereby, it is possible to output the winning effect of the bell. However, even if the sub-control board 80 receives the information indicating that the rendering group number “13” has been won, the pushing order (correct answering order) advantageous to the player does not receive the pushing order instruction number. I can't know. In the present embodiment, the advantageous pushing order is transmitted to the sub control board 80 during AT, but not transmitted during non-AT. Therefore, during AT, it is possible to output the effect of winning the small role A (bell) and the pushing order advantageous to the advantage as an effect. It is not possible to output a pressing order that is advantageous to the advantage as an effect.

Even if the same pressing order instruction number is transmitted to the sub-control board 80, different effects can be output due to the different effect group numbers. For example, when the replay C1 (condition device number 7) is won, the push order instruction number is “1” (left middle right), and when the small role A1 (condition device number 23) is won, the push order instruction number is “1”. 1 "(middle left), the same push order instruction number is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in each case.
However, when the replay C1 (condition device number 7) is won, the effect group number "3" is transmitted, and when the small role A1 (condition device number 23) is won, the effect group number "13" is transmitted. For this reason, when the effect group number “3” is transmitted, it is possible to notify the correct answer pressing order using, for example, blue indicating replay, and when the effect group number “13” is transmitted, for example, a bell It is possible to report the correct answer pressing order by using the yellow color indicating the order.

Further, the data is stored in the storage area of the ROM 62 as shown in FIG. That is, the head address of the effect group number table is set to “1E53”, and the condition device numbers “0” to “51” and the accessory condition device number “1” are set in order of address from “1E53”. An effect group number (data) at the time of winning is stored.
Then, for example, when the condition device number “10” is won, the condition device number “10” is used as an offset value and the address “10” ahead of the head address “1E53” of the effect group number table, ie, “1E5D” By reading the data of the address, the effect group number “3” of the condition device number “10” is obtained.

  In FIG. 1, the reel control unit 63g starts the rotation of all (three) reels 31 when receiving the rotation start command of the reel 31, particularly when the start switch 41 is operated in the present embodiment. To control. Further, the reel control means 63g determines the stop position corresponding to the on / off of the winning flag with reference to the on / off of the winning flag in the game after the lottery of the conditional apparatus is performed by the conditional apparatus lottery means 63b. The table is selected, and when the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is determined based on the timing when the stop switch 42 is operated, and the motor 32 is operated. Drive control is performed so that the reel 31 is stopped at the determined position.

  For example, in a game in which at least one winning flag is on, the reel control unit 63g determines a combination of symbols corresponding to a winning combination (combination for which the winning flag is on) within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. The reel 31 is controlled so as to be able to stop on the activated line, and the reel 31 is controlled so as not to stop the combination of symbols corresponding to a combination other than the winning combination (combination with the winning flag turned off) on the activated line. .

Here, “within the range of the stop control of the reel 31” means the time from the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated to the time when the reel 31 actually stops or the rotation amount of the reel 31 (the number of moving frames (symbols)). Within the range.
In this embodiment, the reel 31 is rotated at a constant speed at a speed of about 80 rotations per minute.
When the stop switch 42 is operated, the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated to the time when the reel 31 is stopped is set within 190 ms. Thus, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of moving frames from the symbol at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated to the stop of the reel 31 is set to four frames.

  For example, in FIG. 17, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the first “watermelon A” on the left reel 31 is located at the middle left, four frames ahead, that is, up to the fifth “cherry”. The pattern can be stopped in the middle left. Therefore, at the above operation timing, the symbols No. 1 (bitter stop) to No. 5 (four frames slip) become symbols that can be stopped at the middle left.

  Then, at the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, if any of the symbols within the range of the stop control of the reel 31 is a symbol to be stopped at a predetermined effective line, the stop switch 42 is operated. Then, the symbol is controlled so as to stop at a predetermined effective line.

  That is, if the reel 31 is stopped immediately at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated, if the symbol related to the winning combination does not stop on a predetermined effective line, the reel 31 is controlled to stop until the reel 31 is stopped. By controlling the rotation and movement of the reel 31 within the range, the symbol related to the winning combination is controlled to be stopped on a predetermined effective line as much as possible (pull-in stop control).

Conversely, when the reel 31 is stopped immediately at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated, if the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is stopped on the activated line, the reel 31 is stopped when the reel 31 is stopped. By controlling the rotational movement of the reel 31 within the range of the stop control of the symbol 31, the combination of the symbols corresponding to the winning combination is controlled so as not to be stopped on the active line (kick-off stop control).
Further, in a game in which a plurality of roles have been won, the priority order of the winning combination is determined in advance according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42, the operation timing of the stop switch 42, and the like. , The drawing stop control of the symbol with the highest priority is performed.

Further, the reel control unit 63g detects the pressing order (operation order) of the stop switch 42. When the player operates the stop switch 42, the reel control unit 63g detects which of the left, middle, and right stop switches 42 has been operated.
When the stop switch 42 is operated, a signal indicating that the stop switch 42 is operated is input to the reel control unit 63g. By determining this signal, the reel control unit 63g detects which stop switch 42 has been operated. Then, stop control of the reel 31 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is executed.

  Further, the reel control unit 63g includes a stop position determination table for each condition device. The stop position determination table defines the stop position of the reel 31 with respect to the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated. When the stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the first symbol ("watermelon A" in the case of the left reel 31) passes through the middle stage, the number of symbols is controlled in each stop position determination table. The stop position is determined in advance, such as how many times the symbol is stopped, and the number of the symbol to be stopped in the middle stage.

Here, the pull-in rate (PB) will be described.
For example, the symbol related to 1BB is “black BAR” on all reels 31 (FIG. 19). Then, as shown in FIG. 17, one “black BAR” is provided on each reel 31 (both is No. 18). Therefore, unless the player operates the stop switch 42 at the timing when the “black BAR” stops on the activated line, the “black BAR” cannot be stopped on the activated line.

  As described above, if the stop switch 42 is not operated at an appropriate position of the reel 31 (at an operation timing at which the target symbol can be stopped at the active line within the range of the maximum number of moving frames), the target symbol is stopped at the active line. The fact that it is not possible to (pull in to an effective line) is referred to as “PB (pull-in rate) ≠ 1”.

  On the other hand, regardless of the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated (regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 42), the target symbol can always be stopped (pulled) to the active line. , "PB = 1".

“PB = 1” includes a case where the combination is such that all the reels 31 are such and a case where such a combination is only performed for a specific (partial) reel 31.
As described above, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of moving frames is “4”, so that when the target symbols are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols or less, “PB = 1”, and exceeds 5 symbols ( When arranged at intervals of 6 symbols or more), “PB ≠ 1” is obtained.

For example, in FIG. 17, “Cherry” of the left reel 31 is arranged at the fifth and the tenth. Therefore, “Cherry” on the left reel 31 is in the “PB ≠ 1” arrangement.
On the other hand, the “bell” of the left reel 31 is arranged at the second, seventh, twelfth, and seventeenth positions. That is, four are arranged at five symbol intervals. Thus, the “bell” of the left reel 31 is in the “PB = 1” arrangement.
As shown in FIG. 17, “Bell” is also arranged in “PB = 1” on the middle and right reels 31.

“Replay A” on the middle reel 31 is arranged in “PB = 1”.
Furthermore, “Replay A” on the right reel 31 is arranged in “PB = 1”. Similarly, “Replay B” on the right reel 31 has a “PB = 1” arrangement.
Further, on the left reel 31, “Replay A” has a “PB ≠ 1” arrangement. Similarly, “Replay B” on the left reel 31 is also arranged in “PB # 1”.
However, in the left reel 31, the sum of “Replay A” and “Replay B” is “PB = 1”. That is, one of “Replay A” and “Replay B” is arranged at five symbol intervals.

Hereinafter, a stop position determination table corresponding to each condition device will be described.
The non-winning table is used in a game when the winning and replay condition device number “0” is won (when the winning combination is not won), and the reels 31 are used so that the combination of symbols corresponding to any winning combination does not stop on the active line. The combination of symbols at the time of stop is determined.
The replay A table is used when a winning and replay condition device number “1” is won (overlapping winning of replays 01 and 02), and causes the replay 01 or 02 to be stopped on an active line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. In addition, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined. In this case, in FIG. 19, the combination of any of the symbol numbers “2” to “12” is stopped at the activated line.
In the replay A table, replay 01 or 02 is stopped at an effective line regardless of the pressing order. Further, both of the replays 01 and 02 are set to “PB = 1”.

In such a case,
(1) Stop the replay 01 in the full pressing order. (2) Stop the replay 02 in the full pressing order. (3) When the stop switch 42 is operated in the specific pressing order, stop the replay 01 and press the specific pressing. When the stop switch 42 is operated in a pressing order other than the order, the replay 02 may be stopped.
First, in the case where the replay 01 is stopped on the activated line, when the left reel 31 is stopped, “watermelon B” or “bell” excluding No. 17 is stopped on the activated line (lower left). Regardless of which operation timing the left stop switch 42 is operated, “watermelon B” or “bell” excluding No. 17 can be stopped at the active line (lower left). As a result, “Replay A” or “Replay B” stops at the middle left.

  Further, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, “Replay A” is stopped on the activated line (middle middle stage). Further, when the right reel 31 is stopped, the "bell" is stopped at the effective line (upper right corner). The middle and right reels 31 each have "PB = 1". When the "bell" is stopped on the active line (upper right) when the right reel 31 is stopped, the "replay A" is stopped at the middle right. Therefore, at the time of winning the replay 01, “Replay A / Replay B” − “Replay A” − “Replay A” stops on the middle line (ineffective line).

  In the case where the replay 02 is stopped on the activated line, when the left reel 31 is stopped, one of “black BAR”, “replay A”, and “watermelon A” is stopped on the activated line (lower left). However, the third and eighth “Replay A” are controlled so as not to stop on the active line. In the left reel 31, since "watermelon A" is arranged at the first, sixth, and eleventh positions, it is possible to prevent the third and eighth "replay A" from stopping at the activated line. Thus, when the left reel 31 stops, “Replay A” or “Replay B” stops at the upper left.

Furthermore, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, any one of “Red 7”, “Black BAR”, and “Cherry” can be stopped and stabbed on the active line (middle middle stage). However, control is performed so that the 0th, 5th, and 10th “cherry” are not stopped on the active line. By stopping the 18th "black BAR", 3rd "cherry", 8th "cherry" and 13th "red 7" on the active line, the 0th, 5th and 10th "cherry" Can be stopped at the active line. As a result, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, “Replay A” stops at the middle upper stage.
Further, when the right reel 31 is stopped, “Replay B” is stopped on the activated line (upper right) (PB = 1).
As described above, at the time of winning the replay 02, “Replay A / Replay B” − “Replay A” − “Replay B” are stopped on the upper line (ineffective line).

The replay B1 table is used in the game at the time of winning the condition device number “2”, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, when the pushing order is “left center right”, the replay 05 is stopped on the active line, In the pressing order other than "right", the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the replay 02 is stopped on the active line (see FIG. 27).
First, in the case of winning the replay 05, when the left reel 31 is stopped, one of "black BAR", "replay A", and "watermelon A" is stopped on the activated line (lower left). However, the third and eighth “Replay A” are controlled so as not to stop on the active line. By stopping the first, sixth, or eleventh “watermelon A” on the active line, it is possible to prevent the third and eighth “replay A” from stopping on the active line.
By this stop control, when the left reel 31 stops, “Replay A” or “Replay B” stops at the upper left.

The “replay A” on the middle reel 31 and the “watermelon A” on the right reel are both arranged in “PB = 1”. When "watermelon A" on the right reel 31 is stopped at the effective line (upper right), "replay B" is stopped at the lower right.
As described above, in the game in which the replay B1 table is used, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of the middle left and right, the replay 05 wins with "PB = 1". Further, when the replay 05 is won, the replay A / replay B, the replay A, and the replay B stop at the invalid line of the upper left, the middle, and the lower right.
Further, as described above, since the replay 02 has “PB = 1”, the replay 02 always wins in a pressing order other than the middle left and right. When the replay 02 is to be won in a pressing order other than “left center right”, the stop control at the time of the replay 02 winning is described above.

The replay B2 table is used in the game when the condition device number “3” is won (when the replays 01, 02, 05, and 10 are overlapped), and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, when the pressing order is “left and right”. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the replay 05 is stopped on the active line and the replay 02 is stopped on the active line in a pressing order other than "left center right".
The replay B3 table is used in the game when the condition device number “4” is won (when the replays 01, 02, 05, and 11 are repeatedly won). When "", the replay 05 is stopped at the activated line, the first left stop or the pushing order "Right-left middle" is stopped at the activated line, and at the first right stop, the replay 02 is stopped at the activated line. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined.

Furthermore, the replay B4 table is used in the game when the condition device number “5” is won (when the replays 01, 02, 05, and 12 are repeated), and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the pushing order “right and left” When "middle", the replay 05 is stopped at the active line, at the first left stop or the pressing order "middle left / right", the replay 01 is stopped at the active line, and at the first right stop, the replay 02 is stopped at the active line. , The stop position of the reel 31 is determined.
Further, the replay B5 table is used in the game when the condition device number “6” is won (when the replays 01, 02, 05, and 13 are repeatedly won), and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the right first stop is performed. Indicates the stop position of the reel 31 so that the replay 05 is stopped at the active line, the replay 01 is stopped at the active line at the first left stop, and the replay 02 is stopped at the active line at the middle first stop. It is.

In the replay B2 table to the replay B5 table, the stop control at the time of winning a replay 01, 02, or 05 is the same as that of the replay B1 table.
As described above, in the replay B1 to B5 tables, the stop positions of the reels 31 are determined so that the replay 05 is won in a specific pressing order and the replay 01 or 02 is pressed in a pressing order other than the specific pressing order. ing. As will be described later, when Replay 05 wins at RT1, the game shifts to RT2 (promotion). Therefore, when any one of the replays B1 to B5 is won during the RT1 game, if the stop switch is operated in a specific pressing order, the replay 05 can be awarded and a transition to RT2 can be made. When the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order, RT1 is maintained without shifting to RT2.
When the condition device numbers “3” to “6” are won, the replays 10 to 13 included in the winning combination do not win when the condition device is won. These replays 10 to 13 are used to increase the number of repeated winning patterns of replays 01, 02, and 05 (control replay).

The replay C1 table is used in the game when the condition device number “7” is won (when the replays 03, 04, and 06 are overlapped). The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the replay 06 is stopped on the active line, the replay 04 is stopped on the active line at the time of the "first left / right" or middle stop, and the replay 03 is awarded at the first right stop. It is a thing.
First, when the replay 06 is won, the “black BAR”, “watermelon A”, and “replay A” on the left reel 31 are “PB = 1” in total, so they are always on the active line (lower left). Any of these symbols can be stopped. When “black BAR” is stopped at the lower left, “replay B” is stopped at the upper left. When “watermelon A” is stopped at the lower left, “replay A” is stopped at the upper left.

When the middle reel 31 is stopped, “Replay A” is stopped on the active line (middle middle stage) (PB = 1). Further, when the right reel 31 is stopped, “Replay B” is stopped on the activated line (upper right corner) (PB = 1). When “Replay B” stops on the activated line when the right reel 31 stops, “Replay A” stops at the lower right.
Therefore, at the time of winning the replay 06, "Replay A"-"Replay A"-"Replay B" stops on the activated line, or the invalid line "Right upper left"-"Middle middle"-"Right""Replay A / Replay B"-"Replay A"-"Replay A" are stopped in the "lower stage".

In order to win the replay 04, any one of “black BAR”, “replay A”, and “watermelon A” is stopped at the activated line (lower left) when the left reel 31 is stopped. However, the third and eighth “Replay A” are controlled so as not to stop on the active line. By stopping the first, sixth, or eleventh “watermelon A” on the active line, it is possible to prevent the third and eighth “replay A” from stopping on the active line.
By such stop control, when the left reel 31 stops, “Replay A” or “Replay B” stops at the upper left.

When the middle reel 31 is stopped, any one of “red 7”, “black BAR”, and “cherry” is stopped on the activated line (middle middle stage). Since the middle reel 31 is arranged in “PB = 1” by adding these three symbols, any of these symbols can always be stopped on the active line (middle middle stage). As a result, the “replay A” stops at the upper middle stage.
Further, when the right reel 31 is stopped, “Replay A” is stopped on the activated line (upper right corner) (PB = 1).
As described above, the replay 04 wins, and “Replay A / Replay B” − “Replay A” − “Replay A” stops on the upper line (ineffective line).

In order to win the replay 03, when the left reel 31 stops, either "bell" or "watermelon B" is stopped on the activated line (lower left). However, the 17th "bell" is controlled so as not to stop at the active line. By stopping the 14th or 19th “watermelon B” on the active line, it is possible to prevent the 17th “bell” from stopping on the active line.
By such a stop control, when the left reel 31 stops, “Replay A” or “Replay B” stops at the middle left.

When the middle reel 31 is stopped, “Replay A” is stopped on the active line (middle middle stage) (PB = 1).
Further, when the right reel 31 is stopped, any one of "red 7", "black BAR", "white BAR" or "blank" is stopped on the effective line (upper right column). Since these four symbols are arranged in “PB = 1” in total, one of these symbols can always be stopped at the active line. When any of these symbols stops on the active line, “Replay B” stops at the middle right.
As described above, while the replay 03 wins, the replay A / replay B, the replay A, and the replay B stop on the middle line (ineffective line).

The replay C2 table is used in the game when the condition device number “8” is won (when the replays 03, 04, 06, and 10 are repeatedly won), and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the pressing order is “left and right middle”. The reel 31 stops the replay 06 on the activated line, stops the replay 04 on the activated line at the time of "left center right" or the first first stop, and stops the replay 03 on the activated line at the first stop of the right. The stop position is determined.
The replay C3 table is used in the game when the condition device number “9” is won (when the replays 03, 04, 06, and 11 are repeatedly won). ", The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the replay 06 is stopped on the active line, and the replay 03 is stopped on the active line except for the pressing order" middle left / right ".

Furthermore, the replay C4 table is used in the game when the condition device number “10” is won (when the replays 03, 04, 06, and 12 are repeatedly won), and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the push order “right and left” The stop position of the reel 31 is determined such that the replay 06 is stopped at the active line when the "middle" is performed, and the replay 03 is stopped at the active line except for the pressing order "right and left".
Further, the replay C5 table is used in the game when the condition device number “11” is won (when the replays 03, 04, 06, and 13 are repeatedly won), and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the right first stop is performed. Indicates the stop position of the reel 31 so that the replay 06 is stopped at the active line, the replay 03 is stopped at the active line at the first left stop, and the replay 04 is stopped at the active line at the middle first stop. It is.

In the replay C2 table to the replay C5 table, the stop control at the time of winning the replay 03, 04, or 06 is the same as the replay C1 table.
As described above, in the replay C1 to C5 tables, the stop positions of the reels 31 are determined so that the replay 06 wins in a specific pressing order and the replay 03 or 04 wins in a pressing order other than the specific pressing order. ing. As will be described later, when the replay 06 wins at RT2, the game shifts to RT3 (promotion). Therefore, when any of the replays C1 to C5 is won during the RT2 game, if the stop switch is operated in a specific pressing order, the replay 06 can be awarded and the process can shift to RT3, and the other specifics can be performed. When the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order, the process shifts to RT1 (falls) without shifting to RT3.
When the condition device numbers “8” to “11” are won, the replays 10 to 13 included in the winning combination do not win when the condition device is won. These replays 10 to 13 are used as control replays to increase the number of repeated winning patterns of replays 03, 04, and 06.

The replay D1 table is used in the game when the condition device number “12” is won (when the replays 01, 02, 03, and 04 are repeatedly won). The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that 01 is stopped on the active line, the replay 04 is stopped on the active line during the first stop in the middle, and the replay 03 is stopped on the active line during the first stop on the right. .
The replay D2 table is used in the game when the condition device number “13” is won (when the replays 01, 02, 03, 04, and 10 are repeatedly won). The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the replay 02 is stopped on the activated line when stopped, and the replay 03 is stopped on the activated line during the first left or right stop.

  Furthermore, the replay D3 table is used in the game when the condition device number “14” is won (when the replays 01, 02, 03, 04, and 11 are repeatedly won). The stop position of the reel 31 is set such that the replay 02 is stopped at the active line at one stop, the replay 03 is stopped at the active line at the first left stop, and the replay 04 is stopped at the active line at the middle first stop. It is determined.

In the replay D1 table to the replay D3 table, the stop positions of the reels 31 are set so that the replay 01 or 02 is won in a specific pressing order, and the replay 03 or 04 is won in a pressing order other than the specific pressing order. It has established. As will be described later, when the replay 01 or 02 wins at RT3, the RT3 is maintained, but when the replay 03 or 04 wins, the RT3 shifts (falls).
In the replay D1 table to the replay D3 table, the stop control at the time of winning the replays 01, 02, 03, and 04 is the same as described above.

  The replay E table is used in the game when the condition device number “15” is won (when the replay 07 is independently won), and the reel 31 is stopped so as to stop the replay 07 on the activated line within the range of the reel 31 stop control. This is a stop position determination table that determines a position and apparently stops a so-called “weak cherry” (actually a replay). In the replay E table, the order of pressing is not important.

Here, “weak cherry” refers to a stop roll at which “cherry” is stopped at the upper left or lower left when the left reel 31 is stopped. On the other hand, as will be described later, “strong cherry” refers to a stop roll in which “cherry” is stopped in the middle left stage when the left reel 31 is stopped.
Note that “cherry missed eyes” refers to a game in which “cherry” can be stopped in the display window 11 when the left reel 31 stops, and “cherry” stops in the display window 11 when the left reel 31 stops. Refers to the stop roll when there was no match.
In the game in which the condition device number “15” is won and the replay E table is used, the stop control of the reel 31 is performed so that the stop appearance of the weak cherry appears.
The symbol combination of the replay 07 has 32 types of combination numbers "36" to "67" (FIGS. 21 and 22).

In the present embodiment, in the replay E table, when the left reel 31 stops, the symbol to be stopped (pulled in) on the activated line (lower left) with the first priority is set to “Cherry”. In addition, “Replay B” is determined as the second priority.
If the "cherry" is stopped on the active line (lower left) when the left reel 31 is stopped, it looks like a so-called weak cherry (corner cherry) (actually, it is a replay).
Further, when the “replay B” is stopped on the activated line (lower left) when the left reel 31 is stopped, the appearance becomes “cherry missed eyes” (actually, the replay wins with “PB = 1”). .

In the left reel 31, "Cherry" and "Replay B" are arranged in "PB = 1" in total, so that any of these symbols can always be stopped at the active line.
Furthermore, in the middle reel 31, "Red 7" and "Cherry" are arranged in "PB = 1" (the middle reel 31 is arranged in "PB = 1" for "Cherry" alone. ), Any of these symbols can always be stopped at the active line.
Further, in the right reel 31, “Red 7”, “Black BAR”, “White BAR” and “Blank” are arranged in “PB = 1” in the sum of these four symbols, so that any one of these symbols is always used. Can be stopped on the active line.

As described above, by stopping “Cherry / Replay B” − “Red 7 / Cherry” − “Red 7 / Black BAR / White BAR / Blank” on the activated line, Replay 07 can be awarded.
For this reason, in the game using the replay E table, when the left reel 31 is stopped, the “white BAR” or “blank” is not stopped on the activated line (lower left). Thus, when the left reel 31 is stopped, "Cherry" (apparently, so-called "middle cherry") is not stopped in the middle left stage.

  The replay F table is used in the game when the condition device number “16” is won (replay 07, 08, or 10), and any one of the replays 07, 08, or 10 is valid within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so as to stop on the line, and apparently stops the so-called “strong cherry” (actually, it is a replay). However, as will be described later, a weak cherry may be rolled instead of a strong cherry. Further, in the replay F table, the order of pressing is not important.

In the game in which the replay F table is used, at the time of the first left stop (at the time of forward pushing), "cherry" or "replay B" is stopped at the lower left as in the case of the replay E table, so that the apparent " The "weak cherry" is stopped (replay 07 wins with "PB = 1"). The first left stop (when pushing forward) when the replay F table is used is the same as the stop control in the replay E table, and a description thereof will be omitted.
On the other hand, at the time of the first stop of the middle or right (when the irregular reel is pressed), when the left reel 31 is stopped, control is performed so that "Cherry" is stopped at the middle left stage, and apparent "Strong Cherry" is stopped. .

For example, at the time of stopping the middle reel 31 at the time of irregular pressing, "Cherry" is stopped on the activated line ("PB = 1"). When the right reel 31 is stopped at the time of irregular pressing, "red 7", "black BAR", "white BAR", and "blank" are stopped. In this stop type, any of the role numbers “40” to “43”, “48” to “51”, “56” to “59”, and “64” to “67” can be stopped.
Next, when the left reel 31 stops at the time of irregular pressing, priority is given to stopping "white BAR" or "blank" on the active line (lower left) (first priority). When "white BAR" or "blank" is stopped on the active line (lower left), "stop cherry" stops and a replay 07 wins.

Here, “white BAR” and “blank” add up to “PB ≠ 1”. Therefore, if the "white BAR" or "blank" cannot be stopped on the activated line when the left reel 31 is stopped at the time of irregular pressing, "replay B" is stopped as the second priority. On the left reel 31, "PB = 1" is arranged by adding "white BAR", "blank" and "replay B" (No. 4, No. 9, No. 14, No. 19). Therefore, when “white BAR” or “blank” cannot be stopped at the lower left, “replay B” can always be stopped at the lower left.
As described above, the irregular push when the replay F table is used results in “strong cherry” or “missing cherry”.

The replay G1 table is used in a game when the condition device number “17” is won (when replays 01, 02, 07, and 10 are repeatedly won), and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the left or middle first stop. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the replay 07 is stopped on the activated line and the replay 02 is stopped on the activated line at the first right stop.
The replays G1 to G3 as condition devices are referred to as a middle cherry in the pushing order. When the answer is correct, the apparent middle cherry (strong cherry) can be stopped. In this case, stop control is performed for non-stop (the cherry is missed).
In FIG. 28, in the replays G1 to G3 of the condition device numbers “17” to “19”, the replay 07 is awarded with the mark “*” in the correct answer order, and the replay 01 in the other order is the incorrect answer order. Or 02 is won. For example, when the replay G1 is won, the left or middle first stop is set to the correct answer pressing order, and the right first stop is set to the incorrect answer pressing order.

In the game in which the replay G1 table is used, when the correct answer is the pushing order (left or middle first stop), the replay 07 is stopped at the activated line, and when the left reel 31 is stopped, similarly to the replay F table. , "White BAR" or "blank" at the active line. As a result, the apparent middle cherries can be stopped. If "white BAR" or "blank" cannot be stopped at the active line when the left reel 31 is stopped, "cherry" or "replay B" is stopped at the active line as in the case of the replay F table.
On the other hand, when the push order is incorrect (first right stop), control is performed so as to win the replay 02. The stop control at the time of winning the replay 02 is the same as that in the replay A table.

The replay G2 table is used in the game when the condition device number “18” is won (when the replays 01, 02, 07, and 11 are repeatedly won), and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the middle or right first stop. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the replay 07 is stopped at the valid line when the push order is correct and the replay 01 is stopped at the valid line at the first stop left (when the push order is incorrect). is there.
The stop control at the time of winning the replay 07 is the same as that of the replay G1 table. The stop control at the time of winning the replay 01 is the same as that in the replay A table.
Similarly, the replay G3 table is used in a game when the condition device number “19” is won (when replays 01, 02, 07, 10, and 11 are repeatedly won), and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, The stop position of the reel 31 is such that the replay 07 is stopped at the active line when the right first stop (when the push order is correct), and the replay 02 is stopped at the active line when the middle first stop (when the push order is incorrect). Is defined.

The stop control at the time of winning the replays 02 and 07 is the same as described above.
As described above, in the replay G1 to G3 tables, the middle cherry can be stopped by winning the replay 07 in the specific pressing order (when the pressing order is correct), and in the pressing order other than the specific pressing order, the replay 01 is performed. Or, the middle cherry is not stopped by winning 02.
In the replays G1 to G3, the replays 10 and 11 included in the winning combination are replays used for control, and do not win when the replay G1 table to the replay G3 table are used.

  The replay H1 table is used in the game when the condition device number “20” is won (when the replays 01, 02, and 09 are overlapped), and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the left first stop (push order correct answer) ) Stops the replay 09 on the activated line, the middle first stop (when the pushing order is incorrect) stops the replay 02 on the activated line, and the right first stop (when the pushing order is incorrect) replays 01. Are stopped at an effective line.

The symbol combination of the replay 09 is "bell"-"replay A"-"replay B" as shown in the role number "72" in FIG. is there. Therefore, at the time of the correct answer in the pushing order, the replay 09 can be always won.
The stop control at the time of winning the replays 01 and 02 is the same as that of the replay A table.
In the following replay H2 table and replay H3 table, the stop control at the time of winning the replays 01, 02, and 09 is the same as that of the replay H2 table.

The replay H2 table is used in the game when the condition device number “21” is won (when the replays 01, 02, 09, and 10 are repeatedly won). The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the replay 09 is stopped at the valid line when the push order is correct, and the replay 01 is stopped at the valid line when the left or right is stopped first (when the push order is incorrect). Things.
Furthermore, the replay H3 table is used in the game when the condition device number “22” is won (when the replays 01, 02, 09, and 11 are repeated), and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the first right stop. At the time (when the push order is correct), the replay 09 is stopped at the valid line. At the first left stop (when the push order is incorrect), the replay 01 is stopped at the valid line. In (), the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the replay 02 is stopped on the activated line.

  As described above, in the replay H1 table to the replay H3 table, the replay 09 is won when the pushing order is correct, and the replay 01 or 02 is won when the pushing order is incorrect. Replay 09 is positioned as a chance eye in the present embodiment. For the replays H1 to H3, a lottery is performed during RT3 (generally AT), and when the replays H1 to H3 are won, an AT (stock number) addition lottery is performed. Therefore, when the replay 09 appears in the AT, there is a possibility that the AT will be added.

As described above, the small wins A1 to C6 (condition device numbers "23" to "40") win the so-called pushing order bells, and when these condition devices win, they respectively determine the specific stop positions described below. The reel 31 is controlled to stop using the table.
The small win A1 table is used in a game when the condition device “23” is won (when small wins 01, 04, and 05 are overlapped), and is “left center right” (displayed as “123” in FIG. 29). When the stop switch is operated in the correct answer pressing order, the small part 01, which is the nine-piece hand, is awarded with priority to the number. When the stop switch 42 is operated in an incorrect answer pressing order other than “left center right”, The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the small winning combination 04 or 05, which is one winning combination, is awarded with the number priority.

Here, as a method of controlling the stop of the reel 31 when a plurality of small wins are winning simultaneously (overlap winning), the following methods are exemplified.
As a first priority, when all of the symbols (of the relevant reel 31) constituting the winning symbol combination can be stopped on the activated line, the reel 31 is stopped at that position.

Next, when it is not possible to “stop all the symbols constituting the winning symbol combination in the activated line” (when the first priority cannot be adopted), the “number priority” is set as the second priority. ”Or“ number priority ”, the reel 31 is controlled to stop.
Here, the "number priority" means that the symbols on the reel 31 constituting the combination of the symbols with the largest payout number among the combinations of symbols that have been repeatedly won are preferentially stopped (pulled in) on the activated line. Say. Therefore, at the time of winning the small wins A1 to C6, the small wins 01 to 03 correspond to the combination of the symbols having the largest payout number.
On the other hand, “number priority” means that the symbols on the reel 31 are stopped on the activated line so that the number of combinations of symbols that can be stopped on the activated line is maximized.

When the condition device “23” is won, for example, when the left first stop is performed, all of the left reels 31 related to the winning combination cannot be simultaneously stopped on the activated line. This is because there are a plurality of types of symbols on the left reel 31 of the small wins 01, 04 and 05, but only one activated line, so that only one type of symbol can be stopped on the activated line.
Therefore, in a game in which the small win 1 table is used, the reel 31 is stopped and controlled by either the number priority or the number priority. In the present embodiment, the reels are stopped and controlled by the number priority when the pressing order is correct, and the reels 31 are stopped and controlled by the number priority when the pressing order is incorrect. In the present embodiment, when the reels are stopped and controlled with priority on the number, one winning combination is won without winning the nine winning combinations.
Also in the following small win A2 table to small win C6 table, similarly to the above, control is performed such that nine of the winning combinations are won by the priority of the number of the winning combinations at the time of the correct answer of the pushing order, and by the priority of the number at the time of the incorrect answer of the pushing order. Control is performed so as to win one winning combination.

In the game in which the small win A1 table is used, at the time of the first left stop, the pushing order is correct at that time. Therefore, the symbol of the left reel 31 relating to the small win 01, which is the nine wins, is "bell", and the "bell" is stopped at the lower left.
Next, at the time of the middle second stop, the correct answer in the pressing order is determined at this time. Therefore, one of the symbols of the middle reel 31 of the small role 01, “white BAR”, “watermelon A”, “watermelon B”, and “blank” is stopped on the active line (middle middle stage). In the middle reel 31, the “white BAR”, “watermelon A”, “watermelon B”, and “blank” are arranged at five symbol intervals, and are thus arranged in “PB = 1” in total. Therefore, any one of these four symbols can always be stopped at the active line.
When “white BAR”, “watermelon A”, “watermelon B”, or “blank” is stopped in the middle and middle row, “bell” stops in the middle and lower row.

After the first left stop and the middle second stop, and at the right third stop, any one of "red 7", "black BAR", "white BAR", and "blank" is stopped on the active line (upper right column). In the right reel 31, "Red 7", "Black BAR", "White BAR", and "Blank" are arranged at five symbol intervals, and thus are arranged in "PB = 1" in total. Therefore, any one of these four symbols can always be stopped at the active line.
When "red 7", "black BAR", "white BAR" or "blank" is stopped at the upper right, "bell" stops at the lower right.
As described above, at the time of the winning of the small role 01, "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell" are stopped on the lower line (ineffective line).

At the time of the second stop after the first stop at the left, the push order incorrect answer is determined at the time of the second stop.
Here, the combination of the symbols of the small wins 04 or 05 in which the symbol of the left reel 31 is "bell" is the small win 05 of the hand numbers "104" to "107" in FIG. Therefore, when the right reel 31 is stopped, the "bell" is stopped on the activated line (upper right) in order to win the small role 05.

Further, at the time of the middle third stop, as shown in the role numbers “104” to “107” in FIG. 24, any one of “white BAR”, “watermelon A”, “watermelon B”, and “blank” is set as an active line. (Middle and middle). In the middle reel 31, the “white BAR”, “watermelon A”, “watermelon B”, and “blank” are arranged at five symbol intervals, and are thus arranged in “PB = 1” in total. Therefore, any one of these four symbols can always be stopped at the active line. Further, when "white BAR", "watermelon A", "watermelon B" or "blank" stops at the middle and middle, "bell" stops at the middle and lower.
Therefore, at the time of the correct answer in the middle of pressing in the left and right directions, the small role 05 can be won with “PB = 1”.
When the small role 05 is won as described above, a so-called “bell” break is displayed. Specifically, the "bell" stops at "lower left"-"middle lower"-"upper right".

Next, in the game in which the small win A1 table is used, at the time of the first stop in the middle, since the pressing order is incorrect at this time, the small win is controlled by giving priority to the number.
Here, in the small roles 01, 04, and 05, the types and numbers of the symbols of the middle reel 31 are as follows.
“White BAR”: 5 “watermelon A”: 5 “watermelon B”: 5 “blank”: 5 “bell”: 6
Therefore, when performing the number priority at the time of the first stop in the middle, the “bell” is stopped in the active line (middle middle). When "Bell" is stopped on the activated line at the time of the first stop in the middle, the winning combination is the small combination 04. Therefore, even after the left and right stops, control is performed so that the small role 04 is won.

More specifically, as shown in the role numbers “98” to “103” in FIG. 24, the symbol of the right reel 31 of the small role 04 is only “bell”, so that when the right reel 31 is stopped, the activated line (upper right Stop the "bell" at the stage).
Further, when the left reel 31 is stopped, the symbols that can be stopped on the activated line (lower left) are “red 7”, “white BAR”, “bell”, “replay A”, “cherry”, or “blank”. is there.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a weak cherry or a strong cherry is not won, control is performed so that “cherry” is not stopped in the display window 11. Therefore, when the left reel 31 is stopped, any one of “Red 7”, “Bell”, and “Replay A” (except for No. 8) can be stopped. Here, since the “bell” of the left reel 31 has the “PB = 1” arrangement, it is possible to determine that only the “bell” is stopped.
Further, when the right reel 31 is stopped, the "bell" can be stopped by "PB = 1".

As described above, at the time of the middle first stop (in any of the middle left and right and the middle right and left), the small role 04 wins with “PB = 1”.
Here, if "bell" is stopped at the effective line (lower left) when the left reel 31 is stopped, "bell"-"bell"-"bell" stops at the effective line. Alternatively, if "red 7" is stopped on the active line (lower left) when the left reel 31 is stopped, a so-called "bell" break is displayed in "middle left"-"middle middle"-"upper right". .

Next, in the game in which the small win A1 table is used, when the right first stop is performed, the pressing order is incorrect at this time, so that the small win is controlled with the number priority.
Here, in the small roles 01, 04 and 05, the types and the numbers of the symbols on the right reel 31 are as follows.
"Red 7": 4 "Black BAR": 4 "White BAR": 4 "Blank": 4 "Bell": 10
Therefore, when performing the number priority at the time of the first stop on the right, the “bell” is stopped on the active line (upper right).

  Next, at the time of the second stop on the left side, the number of combinations of symbols is the largest at that point in time because the "bell" is stopped on the activated line, so that the "bell" is stopped on the activated line (lower left). . Then, at the time of the middle third stop, control is performed such that any of “white BAR”, “watermelon A”, “watermelon B”, and “blank” is stopped on the activated line (middle middle row), and the small role 05 is awarded. . Thereby, it is possible to win the small role 05 with "PB = 1". Further, a so-called "bell" break is displayed in the same manner as in the middle of the pressing order.

  On the other hand, in the middle second stop after the right first stop, the largest number of symbol combinations at that time is to stop the "bell" in the active line, so the active line (middle middle) Stop the "bell". Then, at the time of the third stop at the left, control is performed such that "bell" or "red 7" is stopped in the activated line (lower left) as described above, and the small role 04 is awarded.

The small win A2 table is used in a game when the condition device number “24” is won (when small wins 01, 04, and 06 are duplicated), and is “left and right middle” (displayed as “132” in FIG. 29). When the stop switch is operated in the correct answer pressing order, the small part 01, which is the nine-part hand, is awarded with priority to the number of sheets. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined such that the small winning combination 04 or 06, which is one winning combination, is awarded by priority.
In the game using the small win A2 table, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct answer pressing order, the small number win can be made by giving priority to the number of sheets as in the small win A1 table.

In addition, if it is the middle second stop after the left first stop, the push order incorrect answer is determined at this time. Then, the single winning combination whose symbol on the left reel 31 is “Bell” is the small win 06, so that the control is performed such that the small win 06 is won at the time of the second middle stop and the third right stop.
Here, "bell" of the middle reel 31 is "PB = 1". Further, “Red 7”, “Black BAR”, “White BAR”, and “Blank” on the right reel 31 have a total “PB = 1” arrangement as described above. Therefore, the small part 06 can always be won.
When "red 7", "black BAR", "white BAR", or "blank" is stopped at the effective line (upper right) when the right reel 31 is stopped, "bell" stops at the middle right.
As a result, at the time of winning the small part 06, the "bell" stops at "lower left"-"middle right"-"lower right"("bell" break).

On the other hand, in the game in which the small win A2 table is used, when the first stop is in the middle, since the pressing order is incorrect at this time, the small win is controlled by giving priority to the number.
Here, in the small roles 01, 04 and 06, the types and the numbers of the symbols of the middle reel 31 are as follows.
“White BAR”: 4 “watermelon A”: 4 “watermelon B”: 4 “blank”: 4 “bell”: 10

  Therefore, when performing the number priority at the time of the first stop in the middle, the “bell” is stopped at the active line. Next, at the time of the second stop on the left, the largest number of symbol combinations that can be stopped on the active line at that time is to stop the "bell" on the active line. Stop the "bell" on the active line. Then, at the time of the third stop on the right, control is performed so that “red 7”, “black BAR”, “white BAR” or “blank” is stopped and the small role 06 is awarded. The stop control of the small role 06 is the same as described above.

  On the other hand, after the middle first stop, at the time of the second stop on the right, the largest number of symbol combinations that can be stopped on the active line at that time is to stop "bell" on the active line. At the time of the second stop, the "bell" is stopped on the activated line. When the left reel 31 is stopped, "Red 7", "White BAR", "Bell", "Replay A", "Cherry", or "Blank" is stopped, so that the small role 04 is awarded. Control. The stop control of the small role 04 is the same as described above.

Also, in the game using the small win A2 table, when the right first stop is performed, the pressing order is incorrect at this time, so that the small win is controlled with the number priority.
Here, in the small roles 01, 04, and 06, the types and the numbers of the symbols on the right reel 31 are as follows.
"Red 7": 5 "Black BAR": 5 "White BAR": 5 "Blank": 5 "Bell": 6
Therefore, when performing the number priority at the time of the first stop on the right, the “bell” is stopped on the active line (upper right).
At this point, only the small role 04 can be stopped on the activated line. Therefore, at the time of the left and middle stops, the left and middle reels are set so that the symbol combination of the small role 04 stops on the activated line. 31 is stopped and controlled. The stop control at the time of winning the small part 04 is the same as described above.

The small win A3 table is used in the game when the condition device number “25” is won (when the small wins 02, 04, and 05 are repeatedly won), and is “middle left and right” (displayed as “213” in FIG. 29). When the stop switch is operated in the correct answer pressing order, the small part 02 which is the nine-piece hand is awarded by priority of the number of pieces, and when the stop switch 42 is operated in the other incorrect pressing order, 1 is given by the number priority. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the small winning combination 04 or 05, which is a winning combination, is won.
In the game using the small win A3 table, at the time of the first stop in the middle, since the pushing order is correct at this time, the symbol "bell" relating to the middle reel 31 of the small win 02 is displayed on the active line (middle middle row). Stop.

Next, at the time of the second stop on the left, the correct answer in the pressing order is determined at this time. Therefore, in order to win the small win 02, when the left reel 31 is stopped, “red 7” or “watermelon A” is stopped on the activated line (lower left). On the left reel 31, “Red 7” and “Watermelon A” are arranged in “PB = 1” in total. When "red 7" or "watermelon A" is stopped at the lower left, "bell" stops at the middle left.
Further, at the time of the third stop on the right, “Replay B” is stopped on the activated line (upper right row). When "Replay B" is stopped at the upper right, "Bell" is stopped at the middle right.
As a result, the small win 02 wins, and the "bell"-"bell"-"bell" stops on the middle line (ineffective line).

  On the other hand, at the time of the second right stop after the middle first stop, the pressing order is incorrect at this time, so that the number priority is switched. It is the small role 05 that the symbol of the middle reel 31 is “bell” and the symbol of the right reel 31 is also “bell”, so that the small role 05 is controlled to win. The second right stop and the third left stop for winning the small role 05 are the same as the above-described small role 05 winning.

In the game using the small win A3 table, at the time of the first left stop, the pressing order is incorrect at this point, so the stop control is performed with the number priority.
The most common symbol on the left reel 31 in the small wins 02, 04, and 05 is "bell". Therefore, at the first left stop, "bell" is stopped at the active line. As a result, it is possible to win a prize in the small combination 04 (composition number "100") and the small combination 05. Then, at the time of the middle second stop, "Bell" having the largest number of symbols is made an active line. Also, at the time of the third stop on the right, “Bell” is stopped on the activated line, and the small role 04 is awarded.

  Further, at the time of the second stop of the right after the first stop of the left, "Bell" having the largest number of symbols is made an active line. Next, at the time of the third stop, the "bell" is stopped to win the small role 04, and one of "white BAR", "watermelon A", "watermelon B" or "blank" is stopped. Although it is possible to win both the small win 05 and the small win 05, in the present embodiment, control is performed so as to win the small win 05. The stop control of the reel 31 in this case is the same as described above.

Similarly, in a game in which the small win A3 table is used, at the time of the first right stop, the pressing order is incorrect at this time, so stop control with priority on the number is performed.
The most common symbol on the left reel 31 in the small wins 02, 04, and 05 is "bell". Therefore, at the time of the first right stop, the "bell" is stopped at the activated line. As a result, the winning combination is the small combination 04 (combination number “100”) and the small combination 05 as described above. Then, at the time of the middle second stop, "Bell" having the largest number of symbols is made an active line. Also, at the time of the third stop on the right, “Bell” is stopped on the activated line, and the small role 04 is awarded.

  The small win A4 table is used in a game when the condition device number “26” is won (when small wins 02, 04, and 06 are overlapped), and is “middle right left” (displayed as “231” in FIG. 29). When the stop switch is operated in the correct answer pressing order, the small part 02 which is the nine-piece hand is awarded with priority of the number of pieces, and when the stop switch 42 is operated in the other incorrect pressing order, 1 is selected by the number priority. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the small winning combination 04 or 06 which is a winning combination is won.

In the game in which the small role A4 table is used, at the time of the first stop in the middle, since the pushing order is correct at this time, the symbol "bell" of the middle reel 31 related to the small role 02 is set as the active line (middle middle stage). To stop. Further, at the time of the second stop on the right, the correct answer in the pressing order is determined at this time, so that when the right reel 31 is stopped, “Replay B” is stopped on the activated line.
Further, at the time of the third stop on the left, “red 7” or “watermelon A” is stopped on the activated line (lower left) (PB = 1).
As described above, at the time of the correct answer in the pushing order, it is possible to win the small win 02 with "PB = 1".

  On the other hand, in a game in which the small win A4 table is used, after the middle first stop and the left second stop, the pressing order incorrect answer is determined at that time, so that the number priority is switched to the number priority. For this reason, at the time of the second stop on the left, the “bell” is stopped on the active line (lower left). Then, at the time of the third stop on the right, any of “bell” related to the small role 04 or “red 7”, “black BAR”, “white BAR”, or “blank” related to the small role 06 can be stopped. In the present embodiment, the "bell" is stopped in order to win the small role 04.

Further, in the game using the small role A4 table, at the first left stop, the pressing order is incorrect at this time, so that "bell" is stopped on the activated line by priority on the number. At the time of the middle second stop, the "bell" is stopped at the activated line. Further, at the time of the third stop on the right, any of the small wins 04 and 06 can be won, but in the present embodiment, the small win 04 is won.
On the other hand, after the first left stop and the second right stop, any one of “Bell” related to the small role 04 or “Red 7”, “Black BAR”, “White BAR”, or “Blank” related to the small role 06 is used. However, in this embodiment, the “bell” is stopped in order to make the small role 04 win. Therefore, at the time of the third stop in the middle, the “bell” is stopped on the active line.

Furthermore, in the game using the small win A4 table, at the time of the first stop in the middle, since the pressing order incorrect answer is determined at this time, the stop of the middle reel 31 is controlled by giving priority to the number. Of the small wins 02, 04, and 06, the symbol with the largest number of symbol combinations on the middle reel 31 is "Bell", so "Bell" is stopped on the active line.
Next, after the middle first stop, if it is the left second stop, the "bell" is stopped with priority on the number. As a result, the winning combination of the small hand 06 can be achieved, so that the symbol related to the small hand 06 is stopped at the right third stop.
On the other hand, if it is the right second stop after the middle first stop, the "bell" is stopped with priority on the number. As a result, the small win 04 can be awarded. At the third stop on the right, the symbol related to the small win 04 is stopped in the same manner as described above.

  The small win A5 table is used in the game when the condition device number “27” is won (when the small wins 03, 04, and 06 are repeatedly won), and is “right and left middle” (displayed as “312” in FIG. 29). When the stop switch is operated in the correct answer pressing order, the small part 03 which is the nine-piece hand is awarded by priority of the number of pieces, and when the stop switch 42 is operated in other incorrect pressing order, the number of priority is 1 by the number priority. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the small winning combination 04 or 06 which is a winning combination is won.

  In the game using the small win A5 table, at the right first stop, the pushing order is correct at this time, so the symbol "Bell" of the right reel 31 related to the small win 03 is an effective line (upper right row). To stop. Furthermore, when the left second stop is performed, the correct answer in the pressing order is determined at this time, so that when the left reel 31 is stopped, “Replay B” or “Cherry” (“PB = 1” in total) is stopped in the activated line. Further, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "Cherry" is stopped.

  On the other hand, in the game in which the small win A5 table is used, after the first right stop ("bell") and the middle second stop, the pressing order incorrect answer is determined at that time, so that the number priority is switched to the number priority. For this reason, at the time of the middle second stop, the “bell” is stopped. At this point, the small win that can be awarded is small win 04. Therefore, at the time of the third stop on the left side, the predetermined symbol of the small role 04 is stopped on the activated line as described above.

Furthermore, in a game using the small win A5 table, at the first stop on the left side, an incorrect answer in the pressing order is determined at this time, so the stop control of the left reel 31 is performed with priority given to the number. Of the small wins 03, 04, and 06, the symbol with the largest number of symbol combinations on the left reel 31 is "bell", so "bell" is stopped on the active line.
Next, after the first left stop ("bell"), if it is the middle second stop, the "bell" is stopped with the number priority. Further, at the time of the third stop on the right, any of the small wins 04 and 06 can be won, but in the present embodiment, the small win 04 is won.
On the other hand, after the first stop on the left (“bell”), if the stop is on the right, both small wins 04 and 06 can be won. In the present embodiment, control is performed so that small win 06 is won. I do. Therefore, when the right reel 31 is stopped, one of the symbols “red 7”, “black BAR”, “white BAR”, or “blank” is stopped, and when the middle third stop, “bell” is stopped on the active line. Let it.

Further, in the game using the small win A5 table, at the time of the first stop in the middle, since the pressing order incorrect answer is determined at this time, the stop control of the left reel 31 is performed with the number priority. Of the small wins 03, 04, and 06, the symbol with the largest number of symbol combinations on the middle reel 31 is "Bell", so "Bell" is stopped on the active line.
Next, after the middle first stop ("bell"), if it is the left second stop, the "bell" is stopped with the number priority. Further, at the time of the third stop on the right, any of the small wins 04 and 06 can be won, but in the present embodiment, the small win 04 is won.
On the other hand, after the middle first stop (“bell”), if the right second stop is performed, any of the small wins 04 and 06 can be won, but in the present embodiment, control is performed so that the small win 06 is won. I do. Therefore, when the right reel 31 is stopped, one of the symbols “red 7”, “black BAR”, “white BAR”, or “blank” is stopped, and when the middle third stop, “bell” is stopped on the active line. Let it.

The small win A6 table is used in a game when the condition device number “28” is won (when small wins 03, 04, and 05 are overlapped) and is displayed as “right center left” (“321” in FIG. 29). If the stop switch is operated in the correct answer pressing order of (9), the small part 03, which is the nine-piece hand, is awarded with the priority of the number of pieces. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the small winning combination 04 or 05 as one winning combination is won.
In the game in which the small win A6 table is used, at the time of the first right stop, the pressing order is correct at this time, so that the "bell" is stopped when the right reel 31 is stopped.
Furthermore, at the time of the middle second stop after the right first stop, the correct answer in the pushing order is determined at this time, so that “Cherry” is stopped on the activated line so that the small role 03 is won. Furthermore, at the time of the third stop on the left, “replay B” or “red 7” is stopped on the activated line. Thereby, the small role 03 wins a prize.

  On the other hand, after the first stop on the right ("bell"), at the time of the second stop on the left, since the pressing order incorrect answer is determined at this time, switching to the number priority is performed. As a result, when the left reel 31 is stopped, the “bell” is stopped on the activated line. Further, at the time of the middle third stop, any one of “white BAR”, “watermelon A”, “watermelon B” or “blank” is stopped on the activated line in order to win the small role 05.

In the game in which the small win A6 table is used, at the time of the first stop on the left, an incorrect answer in the pressing order is determined at this time, and the stop control of the left reel 31 is performed by giving priority to the number. Since the symbol with the largest number of symbol combinations that can be stopped on the activated line is "bell", "bell" is stopped on the activated line. Further, at the time of the middle second stop, both the small win 04 and the small win 05 can be stopped on the activated line, but in the present embodiment, the small win 05 is controlled to win.
After the first stop on the left and the second stop on the right, "Bell" is stopped on the active line with priority on the number. Further, at the time of the third stop in the middle, both the small wins 04 and 05 can be stopped on the active line, but in the present embodiment, the small win 05 is controlled so as to win.

  In the game in which the small win A6 table is used, at the time of the first stop in the middle, since the pressing order incorrect answer is determined at this time, the stop of the middle reel 31 is controlled by giving priority to the number. Since the symbol with the largest number of symbol combinations that can be stopped on the activated line is "bell", "bell" is stopped on the activated line. When "Bell" is stopped on the active line at the time of the first stop in the middle, the small win that can be awarded is the small win 04. Therefore, when the left and right reels 31 are stopped, the small win 04 is applied in the same manner as described above. A predetermined symbol is stopped at the activated line.

The small win B1 table to the small win B6 table described below are the same as the small win A1 table to the small win A6 table, respectively. However, the small combination 07 included in the condition devices “29” to “34” is a small combination for controlling the condition device, and must be won in a game using the small combination B1 table to the small combination B6 table. There is no. In particular, the small win 07 can be won when the condition device “50” is won as a strong chance.
The small win B1 table is used when the condition device “29” is won, and when the correct answer is “left center right (123)”, the small win 01 is awarded with the number priority, and in other push orders, the number wins. A small role 04 or 05 is won.
The small win B2 table is used when the condition device “30” is won, and when the correct answer is “right and left middle (132)”, the small win 01 is awarded by the priority of the number. Role 04 or 06 is won.

The small win B3 table is used when the condition device “31” is won, and when the correct answer is “middle left / right (213)”, the small win 02 is awarded by the priority of the number, and in the other pressing orders, the small win is win by the priority of the number. Role 04 or 05 is won.
The small win B4 table is used when the condition device “32” is won. When the correct answer is “middle right / left (231)”, the small win 02 is awarded with the number priority, and in the other push orders, the small win 02 is awarded with the number priority. Role 04 or 06 is awarded.
The small win B5 table is used when the condition device “33” is won, and when the correct answer is “right and left middle (312)”, the small win 03 is awarded by priority of the number. Role 04 or 06 is awarded.
The small win B6 table is used at the time of winning the condition device “34”, and when the correct answer is “right center left (321)”, the small win 03 is awarded by the number priority, and in the other push orders, the number wins by the number priority. A small role 04 or 05 is won.

Furthermore, the small combination C1 table to small combination C6 table described below are the same as the small combination A1 table to small combination A6 table, respectively. However, the small role 08 included in the condition devices "35" to "40" is a small role for controlling the condition device, and must be won in a game using the small role C1 table to the small role C6 table. There is no. The small role 08 can be won when the condition device “50” is won as a strong chance.
The small win C1 table is used when the condition device “35” is won, and when the correct answer is “left center right (123)”, the small win 01 is awarded with the number priority. A small role 04 or 05 is won.
The small win C2 table is used when the condition device “36” is won, and when the correct answer is “right and left (132)”, the small win 01 is awarded with the number priority, and in the other pushing orders, the small win is awarded with the number priority. Role 04 or 06 is awarded.

The small win C3 table is used at the time of winning the condition device “37”, and when the correct answer is “middle left / right (213)”, the small win 02 is awarded by the priority of the number, and in the other pressing orders, the small win is win by the priority of the number. Role 04 or 05 is won.
The small win C4 table is used when the condition device “38” is won, and when the correct answer is “middle right left (231)”, the small win 02 is awarded with the number priority, and in the other push orders, the small win 02 is awarded with the number priority. Role 04 or 06 is won.
The small win C5 table is used when the condition device “39” is elected, and when the correct answer is “right and left middle (312)”, the small win 03 is awarded with the number priority, and in other push orders, the small win is awarded with the number priority. Role 04 or 06 is won.
The small win C6 table is used when the condition device “40” is won, and when the correct answer is “right center left (321)”, the small win 03 is awarded with the number priority, and in the other push orders, the number wins with the number priority. A small role 04 or 05 is won.

  In the above-described small win B1 table to small win C6 table, the stop control of the small wins 01 to 03 in the number priority and the stop control of the small wins 04 to 06 in the number priority are performed in the small win A1 table to the small win A6 table. Is the same as

The small win D table is used in the game when the condition device “41” is won (when the small wins 01, 02, and 03 are overlapped), and the small win 01, 02, or 03 The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that one of the prizes is won.
The small win D table allows any one of the small wins 01 to 03 to be won regardless of the pushing order. Here, for example, in the game using the small win D table, the small win 01 is won at the first left stop, the small win 02 is won at the middle first stop, and the small win 03 is won at the first right stop. It is also possible. In the present embodiment, when the condition device “41” is won, it is positioned at the bell where the lottery of the AT is executed, and since the “bells” are aligned on the middle line (ineffective line), the small role 02 is won regardless of the pushing order. Control.

In the small win E1 table to the small win E3 table, three small wins are made with "PB = 1" when the push order is correct, and three small wins are made with "PB @ 1" when the push order is incorrect. Alternatively, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so as to stop and display the specific symbol.
The small win E1 table is used in the game when the condition device “42” is won (when the small wins 09, 10, 11, 12, 13, 17 are overlapped), and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the condition device “42” is used. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that any of the small wins included in the reel 31 can be awarded and a specific symbol is displayed when the small win is missed.

  Here, all of the condition devices “42” to “44” are a triple winning combination of three small wins. Therefore, in the condition devices “42” to “44”, the number of acquired small winning combinations is the same. Therefore, in the small win E1 table to the small win E3 table, the reel 31 can be controlled to stop without performing the number-priority / number-priority stop control. In the present embodiment, it is determined that the “bell” is stopped on the activated line at the first stop.

In the game using the small win E1 table, at the first left stop, the “bell” is stopped on the active line (lower left). As a result, at the time of the first left stop, the small winning combinations that can be won are the small winning combinations 09 to 12.
After the first left stop, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, one of “white BAR”, “watermelon A”, “watermelon B”, and “blank” is stopped. In the middle reel 31, these four symbols are arranged in “PB = 1” in total, so that any of these symbols can always be stopped on the active line.
When the right reel 31 is stopped after the first left stop, “Replay B” is stopped on the active line (PB = 1).
Therefore, in the game using the small win E1 table, at the left first stop, any of the small wins 09 to 12 wins with “PB = 1”, and the specific symbol is not stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, in the game in which the small win E1 table is used, the "bell" is stopped at the active line (middle middle stage) at the time of the first middle stop. As a result, at the time of the first stop in the middle, the small win that can be awarded is the small win 13.
Then, when the left reel 31 stops after the middle first stop, “watermelon A” or “watermelon B” related to the small role 13 is stopped on the activated line. Since “watermelon A” and “watermelon B” on the left reel 31 are arranged in “PB = 1” in total, any of these symbols can always be stopped on the active line.

  When the right reel 31 stops after the middle first stop, “red 7” related to the small role 13 is stopped on the activated line. Since there is only one “red 7” on the right reel 31, it is “PB ≠ 1”. Further, in the case of one arrangement out of the number of symbols "20", it is possible to stop at an active line within a range of up to four frames (a total of five symbols) in addition to the symbol. Therefore, the probability that “red 7” can be stopped on the active line when the right stop switch 42 is operated at random is “１ ／”.

On the other hand, when the right reel 31 stops after the middle first stop, if “red 7” cannot be stopped on the active line, “replay A” is stopped on the active line. Thus, when the right reel 31 misses “Red 7”, the combination of symbols on the activated line is “watermelon A / watermelon B” − “bell” − “replay A”, and the specific symbol 02 stops.
Therefore, at the time of the first stop in the middle, the small combination 13 (probability “１ ／”) or the specific symbol 02 (probability “３”) stops.

In the game using the small win E1 table, the "bell" is stopped on the active line (upper right corner) at the first right stop. As a result, at the time of the first right stop, the small win that can be awarded is the small win 17.
Then, when the left reel 31 stops after the first right stop, “black BAR”, “watermelon A”, or “watermelon B” related to the small role 17 is stopped on the activated line. The “black BAR”, “watermelon A”, and “watermelon B” on the left reel 31 have the “PB = 1” arrangement in total (the “PB = 1” arrangement only for “watermelon A” and “watermelon B”). ), Any of these symbols can always be stopped at the active line.

When the middle reel 31 is stopped after the first right stop, the “white BAR” related to the small role 17 is stopped on the active line. Since there is only one “white BAR” on the middle reel 31, it is “PB ≠ 1”. Therefore, as in the above, the probability that “white BAR” can be stopped on the active line when the middle stop switch 42 is randomly operated is “１ ／”.
On the other hand, when the middle reel 31 is stopped after the first right stop, if “white BAR” cannot be stopped on the active line, “cherry” is stopped on the active line (PB = 1). Thereby, when the "white BAR" is missed on the middle reel 31, the combination of symbols on the activated line is "black BAR / watermelon A / watermelon B"-"cherry"-"bell", and the specific symbol 03 stops. .
Therefore, at the time of the first right stop, the small win 17 (probability “１ ／”) or the specific symbol 03 (probability “３”) stops.

The small win E2 table is used in the game when the condition device “43” is won (when the small wins 09, 10, 11, 12, 14, and 18 are overlapped), and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the condition device “43” is used. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that any of the small wins included in the reel 31 can be awarded and a specific symbol is displayed when the small win is missed.
In the reel stop control at the first left stop, the small wins 09 to 12 are awarded with “PB = 1”, similarly to the small win E1 table.
At the time of the first stop in the middle, the "bell" is stopped on the active line.
When the left reel 31 stops after the middle first stop, “watermelon A” or “watermelon B” is stopped on the activated line. On the left reel 31, “watermelon A” and “watermelon B” are arranged in “PB = 1” in total, so that any of these symbols can always be stopped on the active line.
Therefore, at the left first stop, the small wins 09 to 12 can be awarded with "PB = 1".

Furthermore, when the right reel 31 stops after the middle first stop, “black BAR” is stopped on the active line. In the left reel 31, the “black BAR” related to the small role 14 is stopped at the activated line. Since there is only one “black BAR” on the right reel 31, it is “PB ≠ 1”. Therefore, like the above, the probability that “black BAR” can be stopped on the active line when the middle stop switch 42 is randomly operated is “１ ／”.
On the other hand, when the right reel 31 stops after the middle first stop, if “black BAR” cannot be stopped on the active line, “Replay A” is stopped on the active line (PB = 1). Thus, when the right reel 31 misses the “black BAR”, the combination of the symbols on the activated line is “watermelon A / watermelon B” − “bell” − “replay A”, and the specific symbol 02 stops.
Therefore, at the time of the first stop in the middle, the small role 14 (probability “１ ／”) or the specific symbol 02 (probability “３”) stops.

In the game using the small win E2 table, the "bell" is stopped on the activated line at the time of the first right stop.
When the left reel 31 stops after the first right stop, “black BAR”, “watermelon A” or “watermelon B” is stopped on the activated line. On the left reel 31, “watermelon A” and “watermelon B” are arranged in “PB = 1” in total, so that any of these symbols can always be stopped on the active line.

Furthermore, when the middle reel 31 stops after the first right stop, “watermelon A” is stopped on the activated line. Since there is only one “watermelon A” on the middle reel 31, it is “PB」 1 ”. Therefore, similarly to the above, the probability that the “watermelon A” can be stopped on the activated line when the middle stop switch 42 is operated at random (the winning rate of the small role 18) is “１ ／”. .
On the other hand, when “watermelon A” cannot be stopped on the active line when the middle reel 31 is stopped after the first right stop, “cherry” is stopped on the active line (PB = 1). Thereby, when the "watermelon A" is missed from the middle reel 31, the combination of symbols on the activated line is "black BAR / watermelon A / watermelon B"-"cherry"-"bell", and the specific symbol 03 stops. .
Therefore, at the time of the right first stop, the small win 18 (probability “、”) or the specific symbol 03 (probability “「 ”) stops.

The small win E3 table is used in the game when the condition device “44” is won (when the small wins 09, 13, 14, 15, 16, and 19 are repeatedly won). The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that any of the small wins included in the reel 31 can be awarded and a specific symbol is displayed when the small win is missed.
First, at the time of the first stop, the "bell" is stopped at the active line.
When the left reel 31 stops after the middle first stop, “watermelon A” or “watermelon B” is stopped on the activated line (PB = 1).

Furthermore, when the right reel 31 stops after the middle first stop, “red 7”, “black BAR”, “blank”, or “white BAR” is stopped on the active line. On the right reel 31, these four symbols are arranged at five symbol intervals, and the sum is "PB = 1". Therefore, any one of the symbols can always be stopped on the active line.
Therefore, in the game using the small win E3 table, at the time of the first stop in the middle, one of the small wins 13 to 16 wins with "PB = 1".

In the game using the small win E3 table, the "bell" is stopped on the active line at the first left stop.
When the middle reel 31 is stopped after the first left stop, “white BAR” is stopped on the active line (probability “１ ／”). If “white BAR” cannot be stopped on the active line, "Bell" is stopped at the active line ("3/4").
Furthermore, when the right reel 31 stops after the first left stop, “Replay B” is stopped on the active line (PB = 1).
Therefore, at the time of the first left stop, the small combination 09 (probability “１ ／”) or the specific symbol 01 (probability “３”) stops.

Furthermore, in the game using the small win E3 table, at the time of the first right stop, the "bell" is stopped on the active line.
Then, when the left reel 31 stops after the first right stop, “black BAR”, “watermelon A”, or “watermelon B” is stopped on the activated line (PB = 1).
When the middle reel 31 is stopped after the first right stop, “watermelon B” is stopped at the active line, “watermelon B” is stopped at the active line (probability “１ ／”), and “white BAR” is stopped at the active line. If not, "cherry" is stopped at the active line (probability "3/4").
Therefore, at the time of the first right stop, the small combination 19 (probability “１ ／”) or the specific symbol 03 (probability “３”) stops.

The small win E4 table is used in the game when the condition device “45” is won (when the small wins 10, 13, 14, 15, 16, and 20 are repeated), and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the condition device “45” is used. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that any of the small wins included in the reel 31 can be awarded and a specific symbol is displayed when the small win is missed.
First, at the time of the first stop, the "bell" is stopped at the active line.
When the left reel 31 stops after the middle first stop, “watermelon A” or “watermelon B” is stopped on the activated line (PB = 1).
Furthermore, when the right reel 31 stops after the middle first stop, “red 7”, “black BAR”, “blank”, or “white BAR” is stopped on the active line (“PB = 1” in total). .
Therefore, in the game using the small win E4 table, at the time of the first stop in the middle, one of the small wins 13 to 16 wins with "PB = 1".

Further, in the game using the small win E4 table, the "bell" is stopped on the active line at the first left stop.
When the middle reel 31 is stopped after the first left stop, “watermelon A” is stopped on the activated line (probability “４”). If “watermelon A” cannot be stopped on the activated line, "Bell" is stopped at the active line (probability "3/4").
Furthermore, when the right reel 31 stops after the first left stop, “Replay B” is stopped on the active line (PB = 1).
Therefore, at the first left stop, the small win 10 (probability “確 率”) or the specific symbol 01 (probability “３”) stops.

Further, in the game using the small win E4 table, the "bell" is stopped at the activated line at the time of the first right stop.
Then, when the left reel 31 stops after the first right stop, “black BAR”, “watermelon A”, or “watermelon B” is stopped on the activated line (PB = 1).
When the middle reel 31 is stopped after the first right stop, "blank" is stopped at the active line, and "blank" is stopped at the active line (probability "1/4"). If it is not possible, "cherry" is stopped at the active line (probability "3/4").
Therefore, at the time of the first right stop, the small win 20 (probability “１ ／”) or the specific symbol 03 (probability “３”) stops.

The small win E5 table is used in a game when the condition device “46” is won (when small wins 11, 15, 17, 18, 19, and 20 are repeated), and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the condition device “46” is used. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that any of the small wins included in the reel 31 can be awarded and a specific symbol is displayed when the small win is missed.
First, at the right first stop, the "bell" is stopped at the active line.
When the left reel 31 stops after the first right stop, “black BAR”, “watermelon A”, or “watermelon B” is stopped on the active line (PB = 1).

Furthermore, when the middle reel 31 stops after the first right stop, “white BAR”, “watermelon A”, “watermelon B”, or “blank” is stopped on the active line (“PB = 1” in total). .
Therefore, in the game using the small win E5 table, at the first right stop, any of the small wins 17 to 20 wins with "PB = 1".

In the game using the small win E5 table, the "bell" is stopped on the active line at the first left stop.
When the middle reel 31 is stopped after the first left stop, “watermelon B” is stopped on the activated line (probability “１ ／”). If “watermelon B” cannot be stopped on the activated line, “watermelon B” is stopped. "Bell" is stopped at the active line (probability "3/4").
Furthermore, when the right reel 31 stops after the first left stop, “Replay B” is stopped on the active line (PB = 1).
Therefore, at the first left stop, the small hand 11 (probability “1/4”) or the specific symbol 01 (probability “3/4”) stops.

Furthermore, in the game using the small win E5 table, the "bell" is stopped at the active line at the time of the first stop in the middle.
Then, when the left reel 31 stops after the middle first stop, “watermelon A” or “watermelon B” is stopped on the activated line (PB = 1).
When the right reel 31 is stopped after the middle first stop, “blank” may be stopped at the active line, and “blank” may be stopped at the active line (probability “１ ／”). If it is not possible, "Replay A" is stopped at the activated line (probability "3/4").
Therefore, at the time of the first stop in the middle, the small combination 15 (probability “１ ／”) or the specific symbol 02 (probability “３”) stops.

The small win E6 table is used in a game when the condition device “47” is won (when small wins 12, 16, 17, 18, 19, and 20 are repeatedly won). The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that any of the small wins included in the reel 31 can be awarded and a specific symbol is displayed when the small win is missed.
First, at the right first stop, the "bell" is stopped at the active line.
When the left reel 31 stops after the first right stop, “black BAR”, “watermelon A”, or “watermelon B” is stopped on the active line (PB = 1).
Furthermore, when the middle reel 31 stops after the first right stop, “white BAR”, “watermelon A”, “watermelon B”, or “blank” is stopped on the active line (“PB = 1” in total). .
Therefore, in the game using the small win E6 table, at the time of the first right stop, any of the small wins 17 to 20 wins with "PB = 1".

Further, in the game using the small win E6 table, the "bell" is stopped on the active line at the first left stop.
When the middle reel 31 is stopped after the first left stop, “blank” is stopped on the active line (probability “１ ／”). If “blank” cannot be stopped on the active line, “bell” Is stopped on the active line (probability “3/4”).
Furthermore, when the right reel 31 stops after the first left stop, “Replay B” is stopped on the active line (PB = 1).
Therefore, at the first left stop, the small win 12 (probability “１ ／”) or the specific symbol 01 (probability “３”) stops.

Furthermore, in the game using the small win E6 table, the "bell" is stopped on the active line at the time of the first stop in the middle.
Then, when the left reel 31 stops after the middle first stop, “watermelon A” or “watermelon B” is stopped on the activated line (PB = 1).
When the right reel 31 is stopped after the middle first stop, “white BAR” is stopped on the active line, “white BAR” is stopped on the active line (probability “「 ”), and“ white BAR ”is stopped on the active line. If it is not possible, "Replay A" is stopped at the active line (probability "3/4").
Therefore, at the time of the first stop in the middle, the small win 16 (probability “１ ／”) or the specific symbol 02 (probability “３”) stops.

The small win F table is used when the condition device “48” is won (when the small wins 07, 08, 21, and 22 are repeatedly won), and the small win 21 is stopped on the active line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. Thus, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined. The small role F is to cause a stop roll of “weak watermelon” to appear.
Specifically, when the left reel 31 is stopped, “black BAR (No. 18)”, “Replay A (limited to No. 13 except No. 3 and 8, limited to No. 13),” “Replay B” (Except for No. 15, limited to No. 0) or “Cherry (No. 5 or No. 10)” is stopped (PB = 1). As a result, “watermelon A” or “watermelon B” stops at the middle left.
When the middle reel 31 is stopped, “watermelon A” or “watermelon B” is stopped on the activated line (middle middle stage) (PB # 1). If “watermelon A” or “watermelon B” cannot be stopped at the middle and middle stage, “replay A” is stopped at the activated line.

Furthermore, when the right reel 31 is stopped, “Replay A” is stopped on the activated line (upper right corner). When “Replay A” is stopped at the upper right, “Watermelon A” is stopped at the middle right.
Therefore, in the game using the small win F table, when “watermelon A” or “watermelon B” can be stopped in the middle and middle row, the small win 21 wins and the middle row (ineffective line) “Watermelon A / watermelon B” − “watermelon A / watermelon B” − “watermelon A” stops (weak watermelon stops).
On the other hand, when "Replay A" stops in the middle and middle stage, the small role 07 or 08 stops on the active line, and the stop appearance is the same as the strong chance described later.

The small win G table is used when the condition device “49” is won (when the small wins 07, 08, 21, 22, and 23 are repeatedly won). The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the reel 31 is stopped. The small role F is to cause a stop roll of “strong watermelon” to appear.
Specifically, when the left reel 31 stops, “watermelon A” or “watermelon B” is stopped on the active line (lower left) (PB = 1).
When the middle reel 31 is stopped, “watermelon A” or “watermelon B” is stopped on the activated line (middle middle stage) (PB # 1). If “watermelon A” or “watermelon B” cannot be stopped at the middle and middle stage, “replay A” is stopped at the activated line.

Furthermore, when the right reel 31 stops, “watermelon A” is stopped on the activated line (upper right corner). (PB = 1).
Therefore, in the game using the small win G table, when “watermelon A” or “watermelon B” can be stopped in the middle and middle stage, the small win 22 wins and “watermelon A / “Watermelon B” − “watermelon A / watermelon B” − “watermelon A” stops (high watermelon stops).
On the other hand, when "Replay A" stops in the middle and middle stage, the small role 07 or 08 stops on the active line, and the stop appearance is the same as the strong chance described later.

The small win H table is used when the condition device “50” is won (when the small wins 07 and 08 are repeatedly won), and the small win 07 or 08 is stopped on the active line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. In addition, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined. As described above, in the present embodiment, the small win 07 or 08 is positioned as a strong chance (a stop appearance at which the AT lottery is performed).
When the small role H table is used, “watermelon A” or “watermelon B” is stopped (PB = 1) on the active line (lower left) when the left reel 31 is stopped, and the active line is stopped when the middle reel 31 is stopped. “Replay A” is stopped at (middle middle) (PB = 1). Further, when the right reel 31 stops, "Replay A" is stopped on the active line (upper right corner) (PB = 1).
As a result, the small role 07 or 08 wins with "PB = 1".

The small role I table is used during the RB game during the 1BB game. In the RB game during the 1BB game, the small role I is won with the winning probability “1”. The small role I is a winning combination of small roles 01 to 24 (all small roles). When the small combination I is used, the reel 31 is stopped and controlled with priority on the number of sheets, regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed. As a result, one of the small wins 01 to 03 always wins.
As described above, when winning the small role 01, "Bell" is aligned with the lower line, when winning the small role 02, "bell" is aligned with the middle line, and when winning the small role 03, "bell" is aligned with the upper line. . Therefore, in order to avoid the monotony of the stop appearance, for example, based on the pressing order of the stop switch 42, the small role 01 is won at the first left stop, the small role 02 is won at the first middle stop, and the right first At the time of stoppage, a small part 03 may be won.

The 1BB table is used when a game is won when the character condition apparatus “1” is won (1BB alone) or when 1BB is won before the game and the game is not won. Within the range, the combination of symbols corresponding to 1BB is stopped on the activated line, and the combination of symbols at the time of stopping the reel 31 is determined so that the combination of symbols corresponding to combinations other than 1BB is not stopped on the activated line. Things.
Since the symbol of 1BB is “black BAR” on all the reels 31 (PB # 1), the “black BAR” cannot be stopped on the activated line without being pressed.

Although detailed description is omitted, the following stop control is performed when a small role or a replay is won while the special role 1BB is overtaken.
For example, first, priority is given to stopping both the winning special role and the small role or replay symbol on the activated line, and if both symbols cannot be stopped on the activated line, the player is elected. Stop control which gives priority to stopping the symbol of the small role or the replay on the activated line is given. The stop control for stopping both the special combination and the small combination or the replay symbol on the activated line is until the second stop. , Multiple roles do not win.
Secondly, giving priority to stopping both the winning special role and the small role or the replay symbol on the activated line, when both symbols cannot be stopped on the activated line, the player is elected. Stop control that gives priority to stopping the symbol of the special combination (1BB) on the activated line (opposite to the above) is exemplified.

Thirdly, while giving priority to stopping the winning small role or replay symbol on the activated line, when stopping the winning small role or replay symbol on the activated line, When the symbol of the winning special combination (1BB) can be simultaneously stopped on the activated line, stop control for stopping the symbol at that position is exemplified.
In addition, when the special role and the small role or replay of “PB = 1” are duplicated and won (when they are simultaneously won), both the symbol of the special role and the symbol of the small role or the replay are won. It is not necessary to perform control to stop at the activated line, and it is also possible to control so that only the small combination of “PB = 1” or the symbol of the replay is stopped at the activated line.

The description returns to FIG.
The winning determination means 63h determines whether or not the combination of the symbols on the reel 31 stopped on the activated line when the reel 31 is stopped matches the combination of the symbols corresponding to any of the winning combinations (whether any winning combination has been won). Or not). The winning determination unit 63h determines the symbol on the pay line by detecting, for example, the angle when the motor 32 is stopped, the number of steps, and the like.

  The payout unit 63i determines that the combination of the symbols stopped on the activated line when the reel 31 is stopped matches the combination of the symbols corresponding to any of the winning combinations by the winning determination unit 63h. In accordance with the winning combination, a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player, or processing such as credit addition is performed. In addition, at the time of winning a replay, control is performed so that the number of medals inserted in the game is automatically inserted without paying out medals.

The RT control means 63j determines whether or not the RT transition condition is satisfied at the time of stopping each game and all the reels 31. If it is determined that the RT transition condition is satisfied, the RT control means 63j controls to perform the RT transition. Things.
FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an RT transition diagram in the present embodiment. As described above, the RT of the present embodiment includes six types of non-RT and RT1 to RT5. Then, as shown in FIG. 32, the type of the condition device to be drawn and the winning probability differ for each RT.

As shown in FIG. 37, the RT of the present embodiment includes the non-RT (RT0) and the RT1 to RT5 as described above. In the following description, the non-RT will be described as being included in one of the RTs.
In the present embodiment, the RT transition timing is set at the time of the symbol combination stop display or the winning of the RT transition combination, that is, at the time of all stops (at the time of stopping all the reels 31). Therefore, in FIG. 37, for example, when the replay 05 wins when all the reels 31 are stopped during RT1, the RT shifts from RT1 to RT2 at the time of all the stops. The transition to RT4 may be performed based on the winning of 1BB, or may be performed based on the fact that 1BB has not won in the game that has won 1BB.

The non-internal middle game corresponds to non-RT and RT1 to RT3.
The inside middle game corresponds to RT4.
Further, during the 1BB game, it corresponds to RT5.
During the execution of an AT, which will be described later, the slot machine 10 is controlled so as to stay at RT3. However, when the player presses the stop switch 42 in a wrong order, it stays at RT1 or RT2. In some cases.

In addition, even during non-AT, there is a case where a transition is made to RT2 or RT3.
First, the non-RT, RT1, RT2, and RT3 are all non-internal middle games, and in these non-internal middle games, a lottery of the accessory condition apparatus number “1” (1BB) is performed. Then, when 1BB is won in these RTs, the RT control means 63j determines that the RT transition condition is satisfied, and shifts to RT4 corresponding to the internal middle game.
It is also possible to make a transition to RT at the moment of winning 1BB and define the game winning 1BB as an inside medium game. However, in the present embodiment, as described above, the transition condition of the RT is set to all stoppages. Therefore, the game is a non-internal middle game from the time (moment) of winning 1BB to the time of all stoppages of the game. At the time of all stops in the winning game (when 1BB has not won), the game shifts to the internal middle game. In addition, when 1BB wins in the game that has won 1BB, the process shifts to RT5 when the game is completely stopped, and in this case, the game does not go through RT4 (internal game).

RT4 is continued until the winning 1BB wins. When determining that 1BB has been won at RT4, the RT control means 63j determines that the RT transition condition is satisfied, and proceeds to RT5.
RT5 is a 1BB game, and when shifting to RT5, the game is continued until the end condition of RT5 (the end condition of 1BB game) is satisfied. In the present embodiment, the end condition of the 1BB game is set to pay out more than 450 medals. At RT5, the condition device number "51" wins every game and pays out nine cards per game, so that the number of payouts exceeds 450 in the 51st game of RT5.
The RT control means 63j determines whether or not more than 450 medals have been paid out in each game, RT5. When it is determined that more than 450 medals have been paid out, the RT transition condition is satisfied (1BB game). Is satisfied), and control is performed to shift from the next game to non-RT.

  In non-RT, the RT control means 63j continues non-RT until a specific symbol is displayed. In the non-RT, the condition devices of the small wins E1 to E6 are drawn by lottery. When one of these condition devices is won and the winning small win is missed in the game, a specific symbol is displayed. When the specific symbol is displayed, the RT control unit 63j determines that the RT transition condition is satisfied, and transitions from the next game to RT1.

  RT1 continues until replay 05 is stopped and displayed. In RT1, each condition device of replays B1 to B5 is drawn by lottery, one of these condition devices is won, and when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order in which the replay 05 wins, the replay 05 is stopped and displayed. When the replay 05 is stopped and displayed at RT1, the RT control unit 63j determines that the RT transition condition is satisfied, and transitions from the next game to RT2.

RT2 continues until replay 06 is stopped and displayed, replay 03 or 04 is stopped and displayed, or a specific symbol is displayed. In RT2, the condition devices of replays C1 to C5 are randomly selected, one of these condition devices is won, and when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order in which the replay 06 wins, the replay 06 is stopped and displayed. When the replay 06 is stopped and displayed at RT2, the RT control means 63j determines that the RT transition condition is satisfied, and transitions from the next game to RT3.
On the other hand, at RT2, if one of the condition devices of replays C1 to C5 is won and the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order in which the replay 03 or 04 wins, the replay 03 or 04 is stopped and displayed. When replay 03 or 04 is stopped and displayed in RT2, the RT control unit 63j determines that the RT transition condition is satisfied, and transitions from the next game to RT1.

  Furthermore, at RT2, the condition devices of the small wins E1 to E6 are drawn by lottery, and if one of these condition devices is won and the winning small win is missed, a specific symbol is displayed. When the specific symbol is displayed at RT2, the RT control means 63j determines that the RT transition condition is satisfied, and transitions from the next game to RT1.

  RT3 continues until replay 03 or 04 is stopped or displayed, or a specific symbol is displayed. At RT3, each condition device of replays D1 to D3 is drawn by lottery, one of these condition devices is won, and when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order in which the replay 03 or 04 wins, the replay 03 or 04 is stopped. indicate. When replay 03 or 04 is stopped and displayed in RT3, the RT control unit 63j determines that the RT transition condition is satisfied, and transitions from the next game to RT1.

  On the other hand, at RT3, when one of the condition devices of replays D1 to D3 is won and the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order in which the replay 01 or 02 wins, the replay 01 or 02 is stopped and displayed. When replay 01 or 02 is stopped and displayed in RT3, the RT control unit 63j maintains RT3.

  Further, at RT3, the condition devices of the small wins E1 to E6 are drawn by lottery. When one of these condition devices is won and the winning small win is missed, a specific symbol is displayed. When a specific symbol is displayed at RT3, the RT control means 63j determines that the RT transition condition is satisfied, and transitions from the next game to RT1.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned RT shift, during non-internal and non-AT, the stay probability of RT1 is the highest. However, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct answer pressing order (1/6) at the time of winning the condition device in which the replay is repeatedly won, the process may shift to RT2 or even RT3. However, when the stop device 42 is operated in the wrong push sequence (5/6) at the time of winning the condition device for which the replay is repeatedly won at RT2 or RT3, the process returns to RT1. Further, even if a specific symbol is displayed at the time of winning the small roles E1 to E6, the process returns to RT1. Thus, during non-AT, it is set to return to RT1 as much as possible.
The relationship between RT and the main gaming state (non-AT / AT) will be described later.

The main game state control means 63k determines whether or not the transition condition of each game and the main game state is satisfied, and controls the transition of the main game state when it is determined that the transition condition of the main game state is satisfied. is there. Note that, although the main game state and the RT have a relationship, they shift independently.
FIG. 38 is a view for explaining the transition of the main game state.
Here, the “main gaming state” is, in the present embodiment,
Main game state 0: Normal time Main game state 1: AT precursor Main game state 2: AT preparation Main game state 3: AT
Main game state 4: Inside 1BB game Main game state 5: During 1BB game Main game state 6: AT preparation or AT, and inside 1BB Main game state 7: AT preparation or AT, and 1BB game Prepare.

Among the above eight types of main game states, the main game states 0 to 3 are in the non-internal state.
The inside is the main gaming states 4 and 6.
Furthermore, during the 1BB game, the main game states 5 and 7 are set.
In the main game states 6 and 7, "AT preparation or AT in progress" is displayed, but AT preparation or AT and during 1BB inside or 1BB game do not proceed at the same time. This corresponds to the case where 1BB is won during the preparation or the AT. In this case, the AT preparation or the AT is temporarily suspended, and the inside of the 1BB or the 1BB game is performed.
The main game state 0 (normal time) is a game that has not been won in AT (the number of AT stocks = “0”) and has not been won in 1BB.
When an AT is won in the main game state 0, the main game state control unit 63k determines the number of AT precursor games by lottery. The number of precursor games is determined using a random number within the range of “0” to “32”. The number of precursor games may not be determined by the main game state control means 63k, but may be determined when the aforementioned AT lottery means 63d wins the AT lottery.

  When an AT is won in the main game state 0 (normal time), a transition is made from the next game to the main game state 1 (AT sign). Then, the player stays in the main gaming state 1 for the number of games (the number of precursor games) determined at the time of winning the AT. For this reason, the main game state control means 63k counts each game and the number of games when shifting to the AT precursor. Then, when the “number of precursor games =“ 0 ””, the game shifts from the next game to the main game state 2 (AT preparation).

On the other hand, in the main game state 0, if the player wins 1BB without winning the AT in the main game state 0, the main game state control means 63k controls to shift from the next game to the main game state 4 (inside 1BB). In the present embodiment, in the main gaming state 4, the AT lottery is not performed.
Here, as described above, the inside of 1BB is RT4. Therefore, “main gaming state 4 = RT4”. Note that within 1BB, the correct answer pressing order is not notified when the pressing order bell is won.

In addition, when 1BB and strong cherry are repeatedly won, an AT lottery is performed based on the winning of strong cherry, and the AT may be won. In this case, the inside of 1BB is set (main gaming state 4) based on the winning of 1BB. After this winning, even if the strong cherry is won in 1BB, the AT lottery is not performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player from intentionally stretching the inside of 1BB and trying to receive an AT lottery.
Even if the strong cherry is won in the 1BB, the stop control of the reel 31 in the inside of the 1BB is made different so that the stop comes out when the weak cherry is won. Control is performed so that “Cherry” is not stopped in the middle stage and “Cherry” is stopped in the lower stage. As a result, the player can be shown as having won the weak cherry without winning the strong cherry. At normal times, the AT lottery is performed at the time of the strong cherry winning, so the strong cherry winning is beneficial to the player. However, when the AT lottery is not performed within 1BB, when the strong cherry is won (winning) within 1BB. This is to give the player an impression of loss.
Further, when a strong cherry is won in the inside of 1BB, not only the stop control of the reel 31 but also an effect (effect of a back lamp effect, a sound effect, etc.) different from that when the strong cherry is won in the non-1BB is output. For example, it is preferable to show the player that the effect is also a weak cherry election (strong cherry non-election) by changing to the effect when the weak cherry is won.

The main game state 4 is continued until 1BB is won. The main game state control means 63k performs control such that when 1BB is won in the main game state 4, the main game state control means 63k transitions to the main game state 5 (1BB game). Note that, similarly to the above-described RT shift, the main game state control means 63k determines that the main game state transition condition is satisfied when the player wins 1BB in the main game state 0 and wins 1BB in the game. From the next game, control is performed so as to shift to the main game state 5 (without passing through the main game state 4).
. The main game state 5 corresponds to a 1BB game, and corresponds to the above-described RT5. Therefore, "main gaming state 5 = RT5".

  Since the main game state 5 is a 1BB game, as described above, the main game state 5 is continued until there is a payout exceeding 450 cards. When there is more than 450 payouts in the main game state 5, the main game state control means 63k determines that the transition condition of the main game state (the end condition of the main game state 5) is satisfied, and the main game state control means 63k starts the next game. Control is performed so as to shift to gaming state 0 or 2.

In the present embodiment, in the main gaming state 5, an AT lottery is executed, and when an AT lottery in the main gaming state 5 is won, when the main gaming state 5 is finished, a transition is made to a main gaming state 2 (AT preparation). Control.
On the other hand, when the AT lottery in the main gaming state 5 has not been won, when the main gaming state 5 ends, the state shifts to the main gaming state 0.

The main gaming state 2 continues until the AT start condition is satisfied or 1BB is won. In the present embodiment, when the AT start condition is satisfied in the main game state 2, the main game state control unit 63k shifts from the next game to the main game state 3 (AT). On the other hand, in the main game state 2, the main game state control means 63k wins 1BB before satisfying the AT start condition, and when 1BB does not win in the game, shifts from the next game to the main game state 6. To control. Then, the main gaming state 6 is continued until 1BB is won. When 1BB is won in the main game state 6, the main game state control means 63k controls to shift from the next game to the main game state 7.
In addition, when 1BB is won in the main game state 2 and 1BB is won in the game, the main game state control means 63k switches from the next game to the main game state 7 (without passing through the main game state 6). Control to transition.

The main game state 7 continues until RT5, that is, the 1BB game ends. When determining that the end condition of the main game state 7 (1BB game) is satisfied in the main game state 7, the main game state control means 63k controls to shift from the next game to the main game state 2 (AT preparation). I do. Thus, the main game states 6 and 7 are states in which the 1BB game is exhausted while having the right to execute the AT after the 1BB game is completed.
In the above main game states 0 to 7, in the present embodiment, only the main game state 3 is strictly referred to as AT. When the player wins 1BB during the AT and shifts to the main game state 6, the AT is temporarily stopped while the AT is being performed, and the inside of the 1BB is performed. Furthermore, when the 1BB wins, the 1BB game is being played.

It is the main gaming state 3 that the correct push order is notified when the push order bell is won. In the main game state 2, whether or not to notify the correct answer pressing order when the pressing order bell is won is arbitrary. Here, when notifying the correct answer pressing order when the pressing order bell is won in the main gaming state 2, it is necessary to prevent a strategy of intentionally shifting to the main gaming state 3 and remaining in the main gaming state 2. On the other hand, if the correct answering push order is not notified when the pushing order bell is won in the main gaming state 2, it is considered that there is no concern about not intentionally shifting to the main gaming state 3.
In addition, in the main gaming state 2, since it is necessary to shift to the main gaming state 3, the RT promotion push order (the push order for shifting to RT3) is notified at the time of replay overlapping winning.
Note that when the main game state 5 or 7 (1BB game) is completed and the main game state 2 (AT preparation) is entered, RT is not RT. Then, in non-RT, the process does not shift to RT1 unless a specific symbol is displayed. For this reason, even when the AT is being prepared, during the non-RT period, when the condition device numbers “42” to “47” are won, the pressing order for winning three bells is not notified (a specific symbol can be displayed as much as possible). To increase the likelihood).

In addition, in the main game state 4 corresponding to the inside of 1BB, the correct pressing order is not notified when the pressing order bell is won. This is to prevent a strategy of intentionally staying inside the 1BB without winning the won 1BB.
On the other hand, when the player wins 1BB in the main game state 2 or 3 and shifts to the main game state 6 (inside 1BB), the notification of the correct pushing order at the time of the pushing order bell winning may be continued. For example, if the notification of the correct answer pressing order is suddenly interrupted during the AT, the player is immediately notified that 1BB has been won. On the other hand, if the notification of the correct answer pressing order at the time of winning the pushing order bell is continued within 1BB, the winning 1BB can be kept inside 1BB without winning. As a countermeasure, in 1BB, even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct answer pressing order when the pressing order bell is won, the payout rate is set to be less than “1”. Alternatively, the notification of the correct answer pressing order at the time of the pressing order bell winning may be interrupted at the time of shifting to the inside of 1BB or after a predetermined number of games (for example, 5 games) after 1BB is won.
Furthermore, in the main game states 5 and 7 corresponding to the 1BB game, since the lottery such as the pressing order bell is not performed in the first place, the correct pressing order is not notified.

As described above, when the AT start condition is satisfied in the main gaming state 2, the game shifts from the next game to the main gaming state 3 (AT).
Here, RT in the main gaming state 2 is any of non-RT, RT1, RT2, or RT3. Since the main game state 7 is a 1BB game, the game is non-RT when the 1BB game is completed and the next game is shifted to the main game state 2.
Regardless of which RT the main game state 2 is, control is performed so that the main game state 3 (AT) is executed at RT3 as much as possible.
For example, when the main game state 2 is non-RT, the game waits until a specific symbol is displayed, or notifies a game in which the specific symbol can be displayed, and informs a pressing order in which the specific symbol can be displayed. This causes the transition from non-RT to RT1.

At RT1, the system waits until the replays B1 to B5 are won, and when the replays B1 to B5 are won, the push order for winning the replay 05 (moving to RT2) is notified. Further, at RT2, the system waits until the replays C1 to C5 are won, and when the replays C1 to C5 are won, the pressing order for winning the replay 06 (moving to RT3) is notified. Then, when the process proceeds to RT3, the AT, that is, the main gaming state 3 is started.
The control is performed in this way so that the AT is executed with a high replay probability (RT). In this embodiment, RT3 is a high replay probability for non-RT, RT1, and RT2.

However, when the player has made a mistake in the pressing order of the stop switch 42 or when informed of the pressing order of the stop switch 42 for shifting to RT3, the player does not follow the notification, or when the pressing order is incorrect. In some cases, for example, a transition to RT3 may not be made, such as when が has occurred.
If the transition to RT3 is set to the main gaming state 3, that is, the AT start condition, if the specification is to notify the correct pushing order when the pushing order bell is won in the main gaming state 2 (AT preparation), the pushing order bell in RT2 At the time of winning, the stop switch 42 is operated in the notified correct answer pressing order. However, at the time of the replay overlapping winning, if the notified correct answer pressing order is not intentionally followed, the stop switch 42 moves between RT1 and RT2. Do not migrate. As a result, it is possible to intentionally prevent the transition to RT3 forever.
As a countermeasure in such a case, the following control may be performed.

  First, at the time of winning the replay C in RT2, even when the player does not follow the notified correct answer pressing order, the main game state 3 is entered and the AT is started. In this case, if the stop switch 42 is not operated in the correct answer pressing order at the time of the replay C winning in RT2, the vehicle falls to RT1. Therefore, the player starts the AT from RT1, and the AT until the transition to RT3 has the normal replay winning probability. In this case, when the player has won the replay B at RT1, the correct answer pressing order for shifting to RT2 is notified, and when the player has won the replay C at RT2, the correct answer pressing order for shifting to RT3 is notified. .

Heretofore, conventionally, when a pressing order different from the notified correct answer pressing order is performed, a control is performed so that the correct pressing order is not notified when the pressing order bell is won for a certain period as a penalty. However, even if the player operates the stop switch 42 in any order of pressing, such a control cannot be performed if the penalty is not applied.
Therefore, in the game in which the correct answer pressing order for shifting to RT3 is notified in RT2, even if the stop switch 42 is not operated in the correct answer pressing order, regardless of which RT the user stays in, the main game state is uniformly determined. To the main game state 3 and start AT. Note that even when the AT is started from RT1, when the pushing order bell is won, the correct answering pushing order is notified.

However, in the game in which the correct answer pressing order for shifting to RT3 is notified in RT2, the AT is started from RT1 even when the stop switch 42 cannot be operated in the correct answer pressing order due to an operation error of the player. The Rukoto.
Therefore, depending on the situation, the following method may be adopted.

.
First, in the game in which the correct answer pressing order is notified in RT2 (both at the time of pressing order bell winning and at the time of replay B winning), if the stop switch 42 is not operated in the correct answer pressing order, the main game is always performed. A transition to state 3 is given. In this case, in RT2, for example, the correct answer pressing order is notified at the time of winning the pressing order bell, but when the player does not operate the stop switch 42 in the correct answer pressing order, the state shifts to the main gaming state 3. Become.
According to the first method, it is not possible to rescue a player's operation error, but it is not necessary to distinguish whether the condition device won in the game is a push order bell or a transition replay. Since it is only necessary to determine whether or not the pressing order is different from the correct pressing order, the processing load on the main control board 60 can be reduced (the capacity can be reduced).

Secondly, in the main gaming state 2, when the stop switch 42 is operated in a different pressing order from the notified pressing order at the time of the transition replay winning, a transition from the next game to the main gaming state 3 can be given. On the other hand, in the main gaming state 2, the correct pressing order is notified when the pressing order bell is won, and even when the stop switch 42 is operated in a different pressing order from the notified pressing order, the main gaming state 2 Leave it alone.
In this way, even if the stop switch 42 is intentionally operated in the wrong push order during the transfer replay winning, the stay in the main gaming state 2 will not be continued. For example, in the main game state 2 and RT2, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the incorrect pushing order at the time of the transfer replay (replay C) winning as described above, the main game state becomes the main game state 3, and RT is set to RT. RT1. Then, after the transition to the main gaming state 3, at RT and RT2, the correct push order for transitioning to RT3 is notified sequentially.

  When the player notifies the correct pressing order at the time of winning the pressing order bell, it is considered that the player rarely operates the stop switch 42 in a different pressing order from the notified pressing order (the player obtains a medal). Because the number decreases). Therefore, if the pushing order is incorrectly answered when the pushing order bell is won, it is considered that the player has made a mistake in the pushing order, so that a remedy in that case is intended. However, unlike the first method, since it is necessary to determine whether the condition device won in the game is the transition replay or the pushing order bell, the control load is increased accordingly.

  Third, although different from the present embodiment, RT is dropped in a case where there are three push orders for elevating RT, a push order for dropping RT, and a push order for maintaining RT at the time of the transfer replay winning, for example. When the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order, a transition to the main gaming state 3 is given. With this setting, the probability of being able to rescue a player who has made a mistake in the pushing order can be increased. However, in such a case, it is necessary to determine that the RT has fallen in addition to the fact that the player has won the transfer replay and that the pushing order has been incorrect, and thus the processing load increases.

  In the main gaming state 2, the main gaming state control unit 63k notifies the correct answering order when the pressing order bell is won. In a game in which the specific symbol can be stopped and displayed in the main game state 2 and at the time of non-RT, the pressing order in which the specific symbol can be stopped and displayed is notified. Further, in the main game state 2 and at the time of RT1, at the time of the replay B winning, a push order for shifting to the RT2 (a push order for winning the replay 05) is notified. Furthermore, in the main game state 2 and at the time of RT2, when the replay C is won, the pressing order for shifting to the RT3 (the pressing order for winning the replay 06) is notified. In the main gaming state 2, it is possible not to notify the correct answer pressing order at the time of the pressing order bell winning, but to notify only the correct answer pressing order (the pressing order for shifting the RT) at the time of the shift replay winning. This makes it possible to create a gaming state in which medals do not increase during AT preparation.

Further, in the main gaming state 3, the main gaming state control means 63k notifies the correct answering order when the pushing order bell is won, and replay 01 or 02 when the replay D is won (when the main gaming state 3 is RT3). Is announced (the order in which RT3 is maintained). Therefore, when the AT in the main gaming state 3 is executed while staying at RT3, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct answer pressing order when the replay pressing order is notified, the RT does not fall.
Furthermore, when the main game state 3 is RT3, when the replay D is won, the stop switch 42 is operated in a pressing order different from the notified pressing order, and when the stop switch 42 falls to RT1, the subsequent RT1 and RT2 are used. At the time of the transfer replay winning, the push order for promoting the RT is notified.

  When the AT (one set) ends in the main game state 3, the main game state control means 63k shifts from the next game to the main game state 0 or 1. In the present embodiment, the AT stock number of the remaining number of sets of the AT to be repeated is determined. When “AT stock number> 0” at the end of the main gaming state 3 (AT), the main gaming state 3 is changed to the main gaming state. It shifts to the gaming state 1 (AT precursor). When “AT stock number = 0” at the end of the main gaming state 3, the main gaming state 3 is shifted to the main gaming state 0 (normal time). Various methods can be used to set the AT stock number to “−1”. For example, when the game mode shifts to the main game state 3 or when the main game state 3 is finished.

  Further, at the end of the main gaming state 3 (AT), if “AT stock number> 0”, the number of precursor games is determined when shifting from the main gaming state 3 to the main gaming state 1. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When determining (or adding) the number of AT stocks, the number of precursor games of each AT may be determined in advance and stored.

When the AT ends in the main gaming state 3 and shifts to the main gaming state 0 (normal time), the RT at the end of the AT is RT3. Then, at RT3, replay D is selected and if replay 03 or 04 is won at the time of winning replay D, the next game shifts to RT1.
On the other hand, when the AT ends in the main gaming state 3 and shifts to the main gaming state 1 (AT precursor), the RT at the end of the AT is RT3. Then, at RT3, replay D is selected and if replay 03 or 04 is won at the time of winning replay D, the next game shifts to RT1. In RT1, until the number of precursor games becomes "0", the correct answer pressing order for winning the replay 05 is not notified at the time of winning the replay B.

  When the number of AT precursor games is exhausted in the main gaming state 1, the game shifts from the next game to the main gaming state 2 (AT is being prepared). Then, in the main gaming state 2 (and RT1), when the player wins the replay B, the correct answer pressing order for winning the replay 05 is notified. When the replay 05 wins, the process moves to RT2. Further, in RT2, when the replay C is won, the correct push order for winning the replay 06 is notified. When the replay 06 wins, the game shifts to RT3, shifts to the main game state 3, and starts the AT again.

When 1BB is won during the main gaming state 1, that is, during the AT precursor, a transition is made to the main gaming state 6 within 1BB. The main game state 6 at this time is RT4. Further, when 1BB is won in the main gaming state 6, the game shifts to the main gaming state 7. The main game state 7 is RT5 (1BB game). Then, when the main game state 7, that is, the 1BB game, is completed, the state shifts to the main game state 2, that is, during AT preparation.
Therefore, during the AT precursor, when the number of the precursor games is not exhausted and the 1BB is won, the number of the precursor games is cleared at that point (set to “0”). That is, when the 1BB game is completed through the inside of the 1BB, the game does not return to the AT precursor (main game state 1) but shifts to AT preparation (main game state 2).

  Also, when 1BB is won in the main game state 2 (during AT preparation) or the main game state 3 (during AT), a transition is made to the main game state 6 inside 1BB as described above. The main game state 6 at this time is RT4. Further, when 1BB is won in the main gaming state 6, the game shifts to the main gaming state 7. The main game state 7 is RT5 (1BB game). Then, when the main game state 7, that is, the 1BB game is finished, the state shifts to the main game state 2, that is, during AT preparation.

Here, when 1BB is won in the main game state 3 (during the AT), the game in the main game state 3 is temporarily stopped, and thus the counting of the number of AT games is stopped. When the main game state 2 (AT preparation) is returned to the main game state 3 (AT) after the end of the 1BB game, the counting of the interrupted AT game times is restarted. Instead of doing this, when 1BB is won during the main game state 3 (AT) and the game is shifted to the 1BB game, the initial game frequency of the AT is set at the time of return to the main game state 3 (AT). It may be set again (the number of AT games may be reset).
At the time of winning 1BB or during 1BB game, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to increase the number of AT games. When the lottery is won, an additional value is added to the count value of the number of AT games.

When 1BB is won from the main game state 1 (AT precursor), the main game state 2 (AT preparation), and the main game state 3 (AT), the 1BB game is executed through the inside of 1BB, and the 1BB game is completed. As shown in FIG. 37, RT is always non-RT. Therefore, when the 1BB game is completed in the main game state 7, the main game state 2 (AT preparation) and the non-RT state are set. For this reason, the main game state 2 (AT preparation) until the specific symbol is displayed in the non-RT and the process moves to RT1, the replay 05 wins in RT1 and moves to RT2, and the replay 06 wins in RT2 and moves to RT3. ). In RT1 and RT2, the push order (RT push order) in which RT is promoted when the condition device capable of promoting RT is elected is notified.
In addition, when the condition device numbers “42” to “47” are won during non-RT, a pressing order for displaying a specific symbol (a pressing order for dropping three bells) may be notified, or The pressing order does not need to be notified. On the other hand, when the condition device numbers “23” to “40” are won in non-RT, the correct answer pressing order may or may not be notified.

In FIG. 1, a sub control board 80 controls the selection and output of effects (information) during a game and during a game standby.
The main control board 60 and the sub-control board 80 are electrically connected, and transmit information (control commands, etc.) necessary for effects and the like in one direction from the main control board 60 to the sub-control board 80 by parallel communication. I do.
The main control board 60 and the sub-control board 80 are not limited to being electrically connected, but may be connected using optical communication means. Further, both the electrical connection and the optical communication connection are not limited to the parallel communication, but may be the serial communication, and the serial communication and the parallel communication may be used together.

Similarly to the main control board 60, the sub control board 80 includes an RWM 81, a ROM (sub ROM) 82, a sub CPU 83, and the like.
Here, an MPU including an RWM 81, a ROM 82, and a sub CPU 83 is mounted on the sub control board 80. Further, the RWM is mounted outside the MPU (on the sub-control board 80) separately from the RWM with the built-in MPU. For this reason, the RWM 81 is used to include an RWM with a built-in MPU and an external RWM.
The RWM (sub-memory) 81 is a storage medium capable of temporarily storing data or the like taken in when the sub-CPU 83 controls the production.
The ROM (sub-ROM) 82 is a storage medium that stores, as effect data, a program for performing a lottery relating to the effect, various data, and the like.

The following peripheral devices for effects as shown in FIG. 1 are electrically connected to the sub-control board 80 via input ports or output ports (not shown in FIG. 1). However, the peripheral devices for the effect are not limited to these.
The effect lamps 21 are made of, for example, LEDs or the like, and are turned on in a predetermined pattern when predetermined conditions are satisfied. The effect lamp 21 is provided with a back lamp and a reel 31 arranged on the inner peripheral side of each reel 31 to illuminate the symbols (three symbols vertically continuous from the display window 13) displayed on the reel 31 from behind. , A fluorescent lamp that illuminates a symbol on the reel 31 from above, a frame lamp that is disposed on the front face of the front cover of the slot machine 10 and blinks when a winning combination is won, and the like.

The speaker 22 outputs a predetermined sound when a predetermined condition is satisfied in order to perform various effects during the game.
Furthermore, the image display device 23 is composed of a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a dot display, and the like. And the like, and game information (the number of games played during the 1BB game and the AT, the number of acquired games, and the like).
The cross key 24 and the push button 25 are used when displaying information intended by the player or when a hall manager (a store manager or the like) changes various settings.

The sub CPU 83 includes an effect output control unit 83a.
The effect output control means 83a includes, as described later, control commands transmitted from the main control board 60, specifically, the operating state, the number of acquired 1BBs, the main gaming state, the number of precursor games / the number of AT games, and the RT state. At what timing (when the start switch 41 is operated, when each stop switch 42 is operated, etc.), and what kind of effect is performed, based on the control commands of the push order instruction number, the effect group number, and the accessory condition device number. (For example, how to turn on, blink, or turn off the lamp 21, what kind of sound is output from the speaker 22, and what kind of image is displayed on the image display device 23). Specific production contents are determined by lottery.

Then, the effect output control means 83a controls the outputs of the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, and the image display device 23 according to the determination. Also, during the 1BB game or the AT, the pressing order of the stop switch 42, the acquired number, the number of remaining games, and the like are displayed as images.
Note that, during non-AT, the information of the push order instruction number “0” is transmitted, so that the sub-control board 80 does not report the correct push order during non-AT. However, it is possible to notify the pressing order of "left center right" as a mere effect at the time of the replay A winning of the condition device irrelevant to the pressing order, for example, the winning and replay condition device number "1".

  Furthermore, the control command of the effect group number does not include information on which condition device number has actually been won, but can be said to include rough winning information. For example, when the control command corresponding to the effect group number “13” is received, it is impossible for the sub-control board 80 to know which pressing order bell has been won. However, you can know which of the push-bells has won. Therefore, it is possible to output an effect such as displaying a symbol of "bell" or lighting a frame lamp in "yellow" which is a color corresponding to "bell".

  Further, upon receiving the push order instruction number transmitted from the main control board 60 during AT (including during AT preparation), the sub-control board 80 notifies the correct push order corresponding to the received push order instruction number. . For example, when the player wins the condition device number “24” in the game during the AT and receives a control command corresponding to the pressing order instruction number “2”, the correct pressing order is “left and right middle” or “132” or the like. As described above, the contents that the player can easily know the correct push order are notified.

Subsequently, information processing by the main control board 60 (main CPU 63) will be described based on a flowchart.
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing processing (M_PRG_START) when the program by the main control board 60 is started.
In FIG. 39, when the program is started in step S11, in next step S12, the main control board 60 initializes a register. As a specific process, for example, a process of storing the upper address (F0H in the present embodiment) of the RWM 61 in the Q register, and the like can be given. By this processing, for example, when specifying the address of the RWM 61, by specifying only the lower address (for example, “B7” when the address “F0B7” is specified), it is combined with the data (F0H) specified by the Q register. This makes it possible to specify the address “F0B7” of the RWM 61, which leads to a reduction in program capacity.

  Next, proceeding to step S13, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the power-off processing completed flag is a normal value. In the present embodiment, when the power is turned off, a power-off processing completed flag (stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 61, not shown in the present embodiment) is stored in step S652 (FIG. 66) described later. The power-off processing completed flag is a flag for determining whether or not the previous power-off was normally performed when the power was turned on. If it is determined in step S13 that the power-off processing completed flag is a normal value (“01” H in the present embodiment), the process proceeds to step S14 and is not a normal value (“01” in the present embodiment). If it is determined to be other than (H), the process proceeds to step S16 without calculating the checksum data in steps S14 and S15.

In step S14, the checksum of the RWM 61 is calculated. More specifically, the checksum calculation of the same range (for example, a work area, an unused area, and a stack area used in the program) as the checksum of the RWM 61 (step S653 in FIG. (Addition of the data value of the address that becomes).
In the present embodiment, the checksum data of the RWM 61 is set such that the checksum of the predetermined range of the RWM 61 is performed and the data becomes “0” by the checksum.

In step S15, it is determined whether the range of the RWM 61 for calculating the checksum has been completed. Specifically, the next address is specified from the address of the RWM 61 for which the checksum has been calculated at the present time, and it is determined whether or not the next address is the address for calculating the checksum. If it is determined that the checksum calculation has not been completed, the process proceeds to step S14. On the other hand, when it is determined that the range of the RWM 61 for calculating the checksum has been completed, the process proceeds to step S16.
In the following processing, when initializing data stored in a plurality of ranges (addresses) of the RWM 61, in the present embodiment, similar processing is executed in the specified range of the RWM 61.

  In step S16, the main control board 60 stores the power-off recovery data in a predetermined register (for example, a B register). Here, when it is determined that the power-off processing completed flag is a normal value and the checksum data of the RWM 61 is a normal value, the normal value is stored as the power-off recovery data. On the other hand, when the power-off processing completed flag is an abnormal value (when “No” in step S13), and / or the checksum data of the RWM 61 is an abnormal value (checking the entire range calculated in step S14) When it is determined that the sum data value is not “0”, an abnormal value is stored as power-off recovery data.

  In the next step S17, the level data of input port 1 (FIG. 8) is stored in a predetermined register (for example, A register). Next, the process proceeds to step S18, where it is determined whether or not the designated switch is on based on the level data of the input port 1. Here, in the present embodiment, the “designated switch” is one of the input port 1, the signal (D 1) of the door switch 16, the signal (D 2) of the setting door switch 54, and the signal (D 3) of the setting key switch 52. One.

Then, the signal of the door switch 16 is on (the front cover (housing) is open), the signal of the setting door switch 54 is on (the setting door is open), and the setting key is pressed. The setting change is permitted only when the signal of the switch 52 is ON (when the setting key is inserted). When all three designating switches are on, it is possible to shift to the setting change process in step S22. However, when at least one designation switch is not on, shifting to the setting change process in step S22 is not permitted. .
That is, regardless of whether the signal of the door switch 16 is off (the front cover is closed) or the signal of the setting door switch 54 is off (the setting door is closed), the setting key switch 52 is not used. Cannot be turned on, and the possibility of fraud is high, so that the transition to the setting change process is not permitted.

Therefore, when it is determined in step S18 that all the designation switches are on, the process proceeds to step S19, and when it is determined that all the switches are not on, the process proceeds to step S21.
In step S19, the main control board 60 determines whether the power-off recovery data is an abnormal value. The power-off recovery data is the data stored in the register in step S16.

When it is determined that the power-off recovery data is an abnormal value, the process proceeds to the setting change process of step S22 while maintaining that the power-off recovery data is an abnormal value (data stored in step S16), and proceeds to step S22. If it is determined that it is not, the process proceeds to step S20. In step S20, it is determined whether the setting change disable flag is on. Here, the setting change disable flag is a D6 bit value of the above-mentioned medal management flag, and is disabled during a lottery process (step S50) to a game end check process (step S73) of the condition device described later. It is a flag. When the setting change disable flag is on, the process proceeds to step S21. When the flag is not on, the power-off recovery data is a normal value (data stored in step S16) and the process proceeds to step S22. move on. As described above, the present embodiment includes the setting change process when the power-off recovery data is an abnormal value and the setting change process when the power-off recovery data is a normal value.
In the present embodiment, the setting change disable flag is provided. However, if the setting can be changed at all times, the setting change disable flag may not be provided. In that case, the processing corresponding to step S20 becomes unnecessary.

  In step S21, the main control board 60 determines whether the power-off recovery data is a normal value. This process is equivalent to the process in step S19, and refers to the data stored in the register in step S16. Then, when it is determined that the power-off return data is a normal value, the process proceeds to step S23 to perform a power-return process (M_POWER_ON; FIG. 40). On the other hand, if it is determined that the power-off recovery data is not a normal value, the process proceeds to step S24 to perform a recovery impossible error process. The error when it is determined in step S21 that the power-off recovery data is not a normal value is referred to as an “E1” error in the present embodiment, and the fact that the error is “E1” is displayed on a predetermined digit. The unrecoverable error is an error that cannot be canceled unless the setting change processing is executed.

As described above, in the program start process (M_PRG_START), the process proceeds to the setting change process when the setting can be changed in both cases where the power-off recovery data is a normal value and an abnormal value.
If the designated switch is not turned on (“No” in step S18) or the setting cannot be changed, and if the power-off recovery data is an abnormal value (“No” in step S21), the return impossible error processing is performed. If the power-off recovery data is a normal value ("Yes" in step S21), the process proceeds to power-return processing (M_POWER_ON).

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the power return process (M_POWER_ON).
First, in step S831, the stack pointer is restored. Here, the stack pointer is one of the registers, and when a power failure occurs, data at the time of the power failure (for example, a register value, an instruction process (return address) of a main process before an interrupt process, etc.) ) Indicates the address of the RWM 61 to be stored next in the area of the RWM 61 (also referred to as a stack area) in which the RWM 61 is stored. That is, the return of the stack pointer refers to a process in which the stack pointer stored when the power is turned off is once stored in the RWM 61, and the data stored in the RWM 61 is stored again in the stack pointer.
In the next step S832, the setting value data stored at a predetermined address (not shown in the present embodiment) of the RWM 61 is read, and whether the setting value range is within the normal range (“1” to “6”) is read. Is within the range). When it is determined that the set value is within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S833, and when it is determined that the set value is not within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S839 to shift to the non-recoverable error process. In this embodiment, the error in this case is referred to as an “E6” error, and the fact that the error is “E6” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 72.

In step S833, the initialization range of the unused area of the RWM 61 is set in the register. Then, in the next step S834, the RWM 61 in the range set in step S833 is initialized. Here, even in an unused area, a value may be stored in the RWM 61 due to noise or the like. If a value is stored in the unused area, the unused area may be broken, so that the unused area is initialized when the power is turned on (usually once a day). I have.
In the next step S835, it is determined whether or not the initialization of the RWM 61 has been completed. If it is determined that the initialization has been completed, the process proceeds to step S836. In step S836, input ports 0 to 2 are read. This process is a process for updating each data (level data, rising data, falling data) of the input port before the power is turned off to the latest data.
Next, the process proceeds to step S837 to activate an interrupt. This process is, for example, a process of setting a timer interrupt cycle, and the interrupt process is executed at a predetermined cycle (in the present embodiment, 2.235 ms) after the process.
Next, the process proceeds to step S838, in which the above-described power-off processing completed flag is cleared, that is, set to “0”. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

In the power restoration process described above, after reading the input ports 0 to 2 (step S836), the interrupt process is activated (step S837). The reason is as follows.
In the present embodiment, a configuration key is inserted during standby for a game so that a configuration value can be confirmed. Here, when the falling signal of the setting key switch 52 becomes “1”, it is determined that the checking of the setting value has been completed.
However, for example, it is assumed that the power is turned off during the setting confirmation, and the setting key switch 52 is turned off (by removing the setting key) to turn on the power while the power is turned off.

In this case, the falling signal of the setting key switch 52 becomes “1” based on the fact that the setting key switch 52 is off by the interrupt processing after the power is restored, so that the falling of the setting key switch is detected. You.
As a result, the state at the time of power-off recovery is different from the state before power-off. More specifically, the falling signal of the setting key switch 52 is “0” in a state before the power is turned off, whereas the falling signal of the setting key switch 52 is “1” when the power is restored from the power cut.
Therefore, in order to avoid a situation different before and after the power is turned off, the value of the RWM 61 of the input ports 0 to 2 is updated to the latest state when the power is turned off. Therefore, after executing the input port 0 to 2 read processing, the interrupt processing is activated.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the main processing (M_MAIN) processing in the present embodiment. Then, during this main process, an interrupt process (I_INTR; FIG. 64) is performed every 2.235 ms.
In FIG. 41, in step S41, a stack pointer is set. The setting of the stack pointer here executes the same processing as the processing of step S831 described above.
In the next step S42, a game start set process (MS_GAME_SET) is performed. When the process proceeds to step S42, the process proceeds to a process of FIG. 42 described later.

In the next step S43, a bet medal is read. This process is a process of reading the number of medals bet at the present time.
In the next step S44, the presence or absence of a bet medal is determined based on the number of bets read in step S43.
If it is determined in step S44 that there is a bet medal, the process proceeds to step S46. If it is determined that there is no bet medal, the process proceeds to step S45 to perform a medal insertion waiting process, and then proceeds to step S46.

  In step S46, a management process of the inserted medals is performed. Although the details of this process are omitted, the outline is that the insertion sensors 44 and 44b detect the rising of the signal of the bet switch 40 and the rising of the signal of the settlement switch 46, and the insertion sensors 44a and 44b detect the medal insertion. If it is detected, the process proceeds to a medal maintenance check process. If it is determined that the medal maintenance is normal, the process proceeds to a bet process or a storage addition process. When the rise of the signal of the bet switch 40 is detected, the process proceeds to the storage bet process, and when the rise of the signal of the settlement switch 46 is detected, the process proceeds to the settlement process.

  In the next step S47, a process of updating soft random numbers is performed. This process is a process of updating (for example, adding "1") a processing random number for processing (arithmetic processing) into a random number (hard random number or built-in random number) used by the condition device lottery means 63b. The soft random number is a 16-bit random number having a range of 0 to 65535. As an update method, a process of adding an interrupt count value (a count value (variable) incremented at the time of an interrupt) to a value before the update may be executed.

  In the next step S48, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated. When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S49, and when it is determined that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S43. Even if the start switch 41 is operated, if the bet number has not reached the prescribed number of the game, "No" is determined in the step S48. When the number has reached the specified number, the start switch acceptance permission flag (the “D0” bit of the medal management flag) is turned on.

In step S49, the process at the time of receiving the start switch is executed. In this process, the internal random number is read, the blocker 45 is turned off, the rotation of the reel 31 is started, and whether the set value is normal is determined.
In step S50, the condition device lottery means 63b executes the condition device lottery at the timing when the start switch 41 is operated, that is, when the operation signal of the start switch 41 is received. The random number value at the time of the condition device lottery is obtained in step S49. Then, in step S50, a process is performed using the condition device lottery table to determine whether the acquired random value is a random value corresponding to any of the condition device numbers.

In the next step S51, the AT lottery means 63c executes an AT lottery using the above-described AT lottery table (FIG. 33) based on the winning condition device. In this lottery, in addition to the case of winning the AT, the AT is not won, but the AT lottery state may shift.
Next, proceeding to step S52, the main game state control means 63k updates the main game state in the game. For example, when an AT is won in the lottery in step S51, control is performed so that the main gaming state 0 is updated to the main gaming state 1 (AT precursor).

In the next step S53, the main control board 60 (particularly, the pressing order instruction number selecting means 63e) executes a pressing order instruction number setting process (M_ORD_INF). This process is a process of selecting a pressing order instruction number or the like according to the current main game state and the winning condition device. When the process proceeds to step S53, the process proceeds to a process of FIG. 52 described later. Although details will be described later, in the game in which the pressing order instruction information is displayed by this processing, the pressing order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 72.
Next, proceeding to step S54, the main control board 60 (in particular, the effect group number selecting means 63f) executes an effect group number setting process (M_ACT_GRP). This process is a process of selecting an effect group number corresponding to the winning condition device. When the process proceeds to step S54, the process proceeds to a process in FIG.

In the next step S55, interrupt processing is prohibited. Here, the interruption process is prohibited in order to control the interruption process not to be performed during the execution of the symbol stop signal setting process (S_IF2_SET) in the next step S56.
Then, the process proceeds to step S56 to execute a symbol stop signal setting process. This process is a process for transmitting (outputting) information (test signal) of the pressing order and operation timing of the stop switch 42 from the slot machine 10 to the testing machine based on the condition device won in the game. is there. When the process proceeds to step S56, the process proceeds to the process in FIG.

When the slot machine 10 and the testing machine are connected, in this main process, at the start of the game, a symbol stop signal is transmitted (output) to the testing machine in each game at step S56. On the other hand, when the slot machine 10 is put on the market (installed in a hall or the like), the actual symbol stop signal is transmitted to the test machine because the slot machine 10 is not connected to the test machine. Although the game is not performed, for example, even after being set in the hall, the process of step S56 is executed for each game.
After step S56, the process proceeds to step S57, and the interrupt process prohibited in step S55 is permitted.

The command transmission table 2 setting process in the next step S58 is a process of storing the head address where the data of the command transmission table 2 is stored in the HL register. Here, as shown in FIG. 44 described later, the head address where the data of the command transmission table 2 is stored is “1D32”. Therefore,
HL register value = 1D32
Becomes
In a next step S59, a control command continuous set process (M_CMD_LIST) is executed. This processing is for transmitting a command to the sub-control board 80 based on the command transmission table 2 set in step S58. When the process proceeds to step S59, the process proceeds to a process of FIG. 45 described later.

Next, in step S60, a reel rotation start preparation process (M_REEL_READY) is executed. When the process proceeds to step S60, the process proceeds to a process in FIG. 58 described below.
Next, proceeding to step S61, the reel control means 63g starts rotating the reel 31. In the next step S62, it is checked whether the reel 31 has been stopped. Here, it is detected whether or not the operation signal of the stop switch 42 is received, and when the operation signal is received, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined based on the lottery result of the condition device and the position of the reel 31, The reel 31 is controlled to stop at the determined position.

  In the next step S63, the reel control means 63g checks whether or not all the reels 31 have stopped, and proceeds to step S64. In step S64, it is determined whether or not all reels 31 have stopped. If it is determined that all reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S65. If it is determined that all reels 31 have not stopped, the process returns to step S62. .

In step S65, when the pressing order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 72 in the game, the acquired number data is cleared in order to delete the information. This process is to set the acquired number data of the address “F00E” to “0”.
In the next step S66, the display of the symbol is determined. Here, the winning determination unit 63h determines whether or not the combination of the symbols corresponding to the winning combination has been stopped on the activated line. Then, the symbol combination flag (_FL_WIN) is updated according to the stopped symbol combination. For example, when it is determined that the symbol combination of the replay has stopped at the active line, the D0 bit of the symbol combination flag is set to “1”.
Next, the process proceeds to step S67, and it is determined whether or not a symbol display error has occurred. When it is determined that a symbol display error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S76, and when it is determined that a display error has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S68.

  Here, since the stop of the reel 31 is performed based on the stop position determination table, the reel 31 does not normally stop at a position other than the position determined by the stop position determination table. However, as a result of the symbol display determination, when a symbol that should not be originally displayed (a kicking symbol) is displayed on the activated line, it is determined that the symbol is abnormal, the process proceeds to step S76, and a return impossible error process is performed. Execute. This symbol combination abnormality error is referred to as an “E5” error, “E5” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 72, and the main processing is stopped.

When an unrecoverable error occurs, the power must be turned on / off and the set value must be reset to cancel the error. When an unrecoverable error occurs, the power is turned off, the setting key is inserted and rotated 90 degrees clockwise to turn on the power. Thereby, the predetermined range (set value information, RT information, winning combination information) of the RWM 61 is cleared. Then, the set value is set, and if there is no other error, a return process is performed.
On the other hand, when a recoverable error such as a full error occurs, the error content is displayed and the processing is stopped. It is determined whether or not the error has been cleared, and when it is determined that the error has been cleared, the process is restarted.

In step S68, the process of updating the number of paid-out medals (FIG. 59) is performed according to the winning combination. This processing is based on the display determination in step S66, when the small win (medal payout) wins, the medal payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) and the medal payout number data corresponding to the winning small win Execute the update process of the buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL).
In the next step S69, it is determined whether or not a special combination (1BB) has been won. When it is determined that the special combination has been won, the process proceeds to step S70, and when it is determined that the special combination has not been won, the process proceeds to step S72.
In step S70, the standby time at the time of winning the special combination is set. This process is a process of setting a predetermined value in the BC register. In the present embodiment, “2000” (corresponding to about 4470 ms) is set in the BC register. More specifically, the B register value = “3” (00000011B) and the C register value = “208” (11101000B) are set. Then, in the next step S71, a 2-byte time waiting process (R_2BYTE_WAIT) is executed. When the process proceeds to step S71, the process proceeds to FIG. 49 described later.

  In this way, the reason why the wait time is set at the time of winning the special role is that the effect at the time of winning the special role is output on the side of the sub-control board 80, and during the time of the effect, the bet switch 40 is set by the player. This is to prevent the effect cancellation by the operation. In this way, by providing a wait time in the main processing and stopping the main processing, it is possible to surely show the player the effect at the time of winning the special combination. Note that the interrupt processing is configured to be executed even while the 2-byte time waiting processing (R_2BYTE_WAIT) is being executed.

In the next step S72, the payout means 63i pays out medals corresponding to the winning combination. In this process, when the number of stored sheets is less than "50", the addition processing of the number of stored sheets is performed until the number of stored sheets reaches "50". Is controlled to pay out medals from the hopper 35a to the player.
Next, the process proceeds to step S73. In step S73, the main control board 60 performs a game end check process (M_GAME_CHK). When the process proceeds to step 72, the process proceeds to the process of FIG. 61 described later.

  In step S73, the signal of the full sensor 38, which is the D5 bit of the input port 2, is determined. When the signal is on, a full error is displayed. The full error is referred to as “FE error” in the present embodiment, and “FE” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 72.

In the next step S74, an output request at the end of the game is set. This process is a process of setting a control command for transmitting a notification that one game has ended to the sub control board 80.
The “output request set” is often executed also in the processing described below, but means processing for setting a control command to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80, as in step S74. I do. Further, the control command here does not mean only the control command to be actually transmitted, but also means the control command that is the source of the control command to be actually transmitted.
Next, proceeding to step S75, the main control board 60 executes the control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET). This process is a process of storing a control command to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in a control command buffer (_BF_SUBCMD of addresses “F113” to “F153”).
Then, when the process of step S75 is completed, the process returns to step S40 again.
As described above, the main process shown in FIG. 41 is repeated for each game.

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the game start set (MS_GAME_SET) in step S42 in FIG.
First, in step S80, a game standby display time is set (stored in a predetermined storage area (not shown) of the RWM 61). In the present embodiment, a “26846” interrupt ($ 60000 ms, that is, about 60 seconds (1 minute)) is set as the game standby display time. When the game standby display time is set in step S81, the value is decremented by "1" for each interruption process from this point.

  When the game standby display time becomes “0”, the acquired number data is cleared in step S45 (medal insertion wait) of FIG. As a result, “00” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 72. For example, even if the number of medals paid out for the previous game is “9” and the player has settled the game by operating the adjustment switch 43 and ended the game, “00” is displayed after about one minute. Is done. This has the effect that the number of empty spaces can be reduced by allowing the clerk of the hall or another player to recognize them as empty spaces.

Next, the process proceeds to a step S81, in which a pressing order instruction number is initialized. This process corresponds to a process of clearing the push order instruction number stored at the address “F0B8” of the RWM 61.
In the next step S82, data of the symbol combination display flag is obtained. This process is a process of storing the symbol combination on the activated line after the reel 31 is stopped in the previous game, that is, the data of the symbol combination display flag (_FL_WIN) in the A register.
In a next step S83, it is determined whether or not the 1BB operation symbol is displayed. In this process, when the D3 bit stored in the A register value is “1”, it is determined as “Yes”, and when it is “0”, it is determined as “No”. When it is determined that the 1BB operation symbol is displayed, the process proceeds to step S84, and when it is determined that the 1BB operation symbol is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S87.

  In step S84, the obtainable number at the time of 1BB operation (at the time of 1BB game) is stored. This process is a process of storing (storing) the value of “450” in the above-mentioned “_CT_BIG_PAY” (RWM 61). This “450” is the maximum number that can be obtained in the 1BB game. Then, the process proceeds to step S87.

In a next step S87, an operation state flag (_FL_ACTION) is generated. In this step S87, the following processes 1) to 5) are executed.
1) First, the address of the operation state flag is stored in the HL register. As described above, since the address of the operation state flag is “F015”, the H register value = “F0” and the L register value = “15”.
2) Next, an OR operation is performed on the A register value and the address information stored in the HL register, and the operation result is stored in the A register. Here, the data of the symbol combination display flag (_FL_WIN) is stored in the A register in step S82, and the information of the address stored in the HL register is the information of the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION).

This will be specifically described, for example, as follows.
Example 1)
When the combination of 1BB symbols is displayed,
A register value: 00001000B
Information value of address of HL register: 00000000B
A register value after "OR" operation: 00001000B
Becomes
Example 2)
When the symbol combination of 1BB is already displayed and 1BB and RB are operating,
A register value: 00000000B
Information value of address of HL register: 00011000B
A register value after "OR" operation: 00011000B
Becomes

Example 3)
When the symbol combination of 1BB is already displayed and 1BB is operating but RB is not operating,
A register value: 00000000B
Information value of address of HL register: 00001000B
A register value after "OR" operation: 00001000B
Becomes

3) Store the A register value in the C register.
For example, the following examples 1) to 3) are given as examples.
Example 1) and Example 3)
A register value: 00001000B
C register value: 00001000B
Example 2)
A register value: 00011000B
C register value: 00011000B

4) An AND operation is performed on the information stored in the A register and the information in which the bit corresponding to 1BB is set to “1”, and the operation result is stored in the A register.
For example, the following examples 1) to 3) are given as examples.
Example 1) and Example 3)
A register value: 00001000B
Information in which the bit corresponding to 1BB is set to "1": 00001000B
A register value after AND operation: 00001000B
Example 2)
A register value: 00011000B
Information in which the bit corresponding to 1BB is set to "1": 00001000B
A register value after AND operation: 00001000B

5) Perform an operation of rotating the A register value to the left, and store the operation result in the A register.
For example, the following examples 1) to 3) are given as examples.
A register value (before calculation): 00001000B
A register value (after operation): 00010000B

In a next step S88, the operation state flag is updated. This process is a process of performing an “OR” operation on the A register value and the C register value and storing the operation result in the A register.
For example, the following examples 1) to 3) are given as examples.
Example 1)
A register value: 00010000B
C register value: 00001000B
A register value (after operation): 00011000B
Example 2)
A register value: 00010000B
C register value: 00011000B
A register value (after operation): 00011000B
Example 3)
A register value: 00010000B
C register value: 00001000B
A register value (after operation): 00011000B

In a next step S89, the operation state flag is saved (stored). In this process, the value stored in the A register is stored in the address of the RWM 61 indicated by the HL register value (that is, the operation state flag). As a result, the information on the operating state flag up to that time is replaced with the information on the operating state flag updated in step S88.
For example, when a symbol combination of 1BB is displayed (in 1BB winning) as in Example 1), the D3 bit corresponding to 1BB of the operating state flag changes from "0" to "1".
When 1BB and RB are in operation as in Example 2), the state is maintained (the D3 bit corresponding to 1BB and the D4 bit corresponding to RB of the operation state flag are "1").

  Furthermore, when 1BB is operating but RB is not operating as in Example 3), the D4 bit corresponding to RB of the operating state flag changes from “0” to “1”. Although details of this point will be described later, in this embodiment, in the 1BB game, the RB operation flag is turned off (“0”) at the end of the 2 games (or at the time of winning twice). When the end condition is not satisfied (when the D3 bit corresponding to 1BB of the operation state flag is "1"), the flag is set to "1" in step S89 (game start set).

In the next step S90, it is determined whether or not the RB operation has started. In this process, an XOR operation is performed on the information stored in the A register and the information stored in the C register, the operation result is stored in the A register, and it is determined whether the zero flag is “1”. It is.
Taking the above examples 1) to 3) as examples, the following is obtained.
Example 1) and Example 3)
A register value: 00011000B
C register value: 00001000B
A register value (after "XOR" operation): 00010000B (zero flag # 1)
Example 2)
A register value: 00011000B
C register value: 00011000B
A register value (after “XOR” operation): 00000000B (zero flag = 1)

When the zero flag is "1", the determination is "No" and the process proceeds to step S92. When the zero flag is "1", the determination is "Yes" and the process proceeds to step S91. As described above, in step S90,
a) At the start of the 1BB game b) After the end of the RB operation, if the end condition of the 1BB game is not satisfied, it is determined to be “Yes”.
In the next step S91, the number of games and the number of winnings during the RB operation are stored. This process corresponds to a process of storing (storing) “2” in the number-of-games counter “_CT_BONUS_PLAY” during RB operation and storing (storing) “2” in the winning counter “_CT_BONUS_WIN” during RB operation. . Then, the process proceeds to step S92.

  In addition, both the number-of-games counter “_CT_BONUS_PLAY” at the time of RB operation and the number-of-wins counter “_CT_BONUS_WIN” at the time of RB operation are both set to “2” as an initial value, and the number of games or the number of wins is “1”, respectively. It is a counter that is decremented by “1” each time it increases. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The initial values of these counter values are set to “0”, and each time the number of games or winnings increases by “1”, the counter value is incremented by “1”, and these counter values become “2”. May be determined.

  In the next step S92, based on the data of the symbol combination display flag acquired in step S82, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination of the replay is displayed (whether the replay has won). When it is determined that the replay symbol combination is displayed, the process proceeds to step S93, and when it is determined that the combination is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S95.

In step S93, the main control board 60 reads a bet medal. This process is a process of reading the number of medals previously bet in the game. Next, proceeding to step S94, the automatic bet amount data is set. This process is a process of updating the data of “_NB_REP_MEDAL” that stores the automatic bet amount (stores “3”).
Next, the process proceeds to step S95, in which the command transmission table 1 is set. This process is a process of storing the head address where the data of the command transmission table 1 is stored in the HL register. Here, as shown in FIG. 43, the head address where the data of the command transmission table 1 is stored is “1D1F”. Therefore,
HL register value = 1D1F
Becomes

  In a next step S59, a control command continuous set process (M_CMD_LIST) is executed. This processing is for transmitting a command to the sub-control board 80 based on the command transmission table 1 set in step S95. When the process proceeds to step S59, the process proceeds to a process in FIG. Then, the process proceeds to a step S97 to shift to a medal acceptance start process (MS_MEDAL_START) (FIG. 48).

FIG. 43A is a diagram showing the command transmission table 1 set in step S95, and FIG. 43B is a diagram showing the relationship between each data and the address of the command transmission table 1.
In the figure, “(TBL_CMD_LEV1_E-$-1) / 2” in the first row defines the number of command transmissions, and this data is stored in the address “1D1F” as shown in the figure (B). , Which means that the value is “06H”. “(TBL_CMD_LEV1_E-$-1) / 2” indicates a value obtained by dividing the number (“12”) from “1D20” to “1D2B”, which are the addresses constituting the command data, by “2”, and that value Becomes “6”.

In the present embodiment, each address stores one-byte data, and one control command transmitted to the sub-control unit 80 includes two-byte data. For example, in the operating state, the upper one-byte data is “@CMD_ACTION” and the lower one-byte data is “_FL_ACTION”. The upper one-byte data is control command data (definition data) meaning a command type, and the lower one-byte data is control command data meaning its contents (variable). In FIG. 43 and FIG. 44 described later, “LOW” indicates lower data.
Here, the data of “_FL_ACTION” means the data of the operation state flag at the address “F015”. Therefore, in the command transmission table 1, “15H” is stored in the address “1D20”. This data indicates that the lower address of the RWM 61 is data of “15”. In this embodiment, when the power is turned on, “F0H” is stored in the Q register as the address indicating the upper address (Q register value = F0H).

“@CMD_ACTION” is the definition data of the operating state, and is stored at the address “1D21” in the present embodiment.
As described above, the command in the operating state is “32H (00110010B)” in which the upper 1-byte data is stored in the address “1D21”, and the lower 1-byte data is the value stored in the address “F015”. For example, when “00000001” is stored in “F015”, the control command indicating the operation state is “00110010/00000001” (“/” indicates a boundary between the upper data and the lower data).

The command data indicating the number of 1BB acquisitions (lower) is data in which the upper data is “@CMD_BB_LOW”, which is the definition data, and the lower data is “LOW_CT_BIG_PAY + 0”. The definition data “@CMD_BB_LOW” is “41H” stored at the address “1D23”, and the lower data is the value stored at the address “1D22” at the lower address (the upper address is “F0” as described above). )), That is, data stored in “F060”.
Similarly to the above, the command data indicating the number of acquired 1BB (upper) is “@CMD_BB_HIG” as the upper data and lower data is “LOW_CT_BIG_PAY + 1” as the lower data. The definition data “@CMD_BB_HIG” is “42H” stored at the address “1D25”, and the lower data is the value stored at the address “1D24” at the lower address (the upper address is “F0” as described above). )), That is, data stored in “F061”.

The command data indicating the main game state has upper data corresponding to the definition data “@ CMD_INF1”, and this value is “60H” stored at the address “1D27”. The lower data is “LOW_NB_GAM_STS”, and the data of the address at which the value stored in the address “1D26” is the lower value (the value of the upper address is “F0” in the same manner as above, the same applies hereinafter), that is, “ F08F ”.
In the command data indicating the number of precursor games and the number of AT games, upper data corresponds to the definition data “@ CMD_INF2”, and this value is “61H” stored at the address “1D29”. The lower data is “LOW_CT_GAM_STS”, and the data stored in the address “1D28” is a lower address, that is, the data stored in “F099”.

In the command data indicating the RT state, the upper data corresponds to the definition data “@CMD_RT_STS”, and this value is “33H” stored at the address “1D2B”. The lower data is “LOW_NB_RT_STS”, which is data of an address where the value stored in the address “1D2A” is lower, that is, data stored in “F001”.
As described above, as the command data defined in the command transmission table 1 in the present embodiment, each data is stored in order from the address “1D1F” to “1D2B” of the RWM 61.

  As is clear from the above, in the present embodiment, six control commands are transmitted using the command transmission table 1 for each game. For this reason, for example, even when the 1BB game is not being played, the 1BB acquired number (lower) and (higher) are transmitted. The data of the number of acquired 1BB when the 1BB game is not in progress is “0” as a matter of course. For example, it may be determined whether or not the game is a 1BB game, and only when it is determined that the game is a 1BB game, the 1BB acquired number (lower) and (higher) may be transmitted.

On the other hand, if the control command of the 1BB acquisition number (lower order) and (higher order) is transmitted as “0” data even if the game is not in the 1BB game as in the present embodiment, the game is in the 1BB game. Since the transmission of the control command based on the control command transmission table 1 can be executed without determining whether or not there is, the processing can be simplified.
In the transmission of the control command using the command transmission table 1, the transmission order of each control command of the operating state, the number of acquired 1BBs, the main game state, the number of precursor games / the number of AT games, and the RT state is shown in FIG. However, the present invention is not limited to these commands and is not limited to these six types of control commands.

FIG. 44A is a diagram showing the command transmission table 2 set in step S58 of FIG. 41, and FIG. .
In (A) of the figure, “(TBL_CMD_LEV2_E-$-1) / 2” on the first line defines the number of command transmissions, and this data has the address “1D32” as shown in (B) of the figure. , And its value is “03H”. “(TBL_CMD_LEV2_E-$-1) / 2” indicates a value obtained by dividing the number (“6”) from the address “1D33” to “1D38” constituting the command data by “2”, and the value is “ 3 ".

As described in the command transmission table 1, each address stores one-byte data, and one control command transmitted to the sub-control means 80 is composed of two-byte data. For example, in the push order instruction number, the upper one byte data is “@CMD_ORD_INF” and the lower one byte data is “LOW_NB_ORD_INF”.
“@CMD_ORD_INF” is the definition data of the pressing order instruction number, and in this embodiment, is “39H” stored at the address “1D34”.
The lower order data of the push order instruction number is the data of the address whose value stored in the address “1D33” is lower, that is, the data stored in “F0B8”.

  As described above, the control command of the push order instruction number is “39H (00111001B)” in which the upper 1-byte data is stored in the address “1D34”, and the lower 1-byte data is the value stored in the address “F0B8”. Become. For example, when “00000100” is stored in “F0B8”, the command data indicating the pressing order instruction number is “00111001/00000100” (“/” indicates a boundary between the upper data and the lower data).

In the command data indicating the effect group number, the upper data corresponds to the definition data “@CMD_ACT_GRP”, and this value is “3AH” stored at the address “1D36”. The lower data is “LOW_NB__ACT_GRP”, which is data of an address where the value stored in the address “1D35” is lower, that is, data stored in “F0B7”.
The command data indicating the accessory condition device number has upper data corresponding to the definition data “@CMD_CND_BNS”, and this value is “3BH” stored at the address “1D38”. The lower data is “LOW_CND_BNS”, which is data in which the value stored in the address “1D37” is lower, that is, data stored in “F040”.

As described above, as the command data defined in the command transmission table 2 in the present embodiment, each data is stored in order from the address “1D32” to “1D38” of the RWM 61.
In the transmission of the control command using the command transmission table 2, the transmission order of each control command of the pressing order instruction number, the effect group number, and the accessory condition device number is not limited to that shown in FIG. Nor is it limited to these three types of control commands.

The command transmission tables 1 and 2 described above are stored in the data area shown in FIG. 2, so that the program area can be prevented from being squeezed.
Specifically, rather than using a program stored in the program area each time to perform a process of specifying an address of data to be transmitted, a transmission program is stored in the program area, and the above-described command is stored in the data area. If the transmission table is stored, the transmission processing can be performed only by referring to the command transmission table. In particular, when there are two timings at which a control command is to be transmitted continuously as in the present embodiment, the same program is used, which leads to a reduction in capacity.

FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a control command continuous set (M_CMD_LIST), which corresponds to the processing of step S59 in FIG. 41 and step S96 in FIG.
The command transmission number set in step S201 corresponds to a process of storing the data at the address indicated by the value stored in the HL register in the B register. As described above, when the command transmission table 1 set processing (step S95 in FIG. 42) or the command transmission table 2 set processing (step S58 in FIG. 41) is executed, the start address of the command transmission table 1 or the command transmission table 2 is respectively obtained. Is stored in the HL register. The head address stores data corresponding to the number of command transmissions. For example, when the command transmission table 1 is set, “1D1F” is already stored in the HL register.

Hereinafter, a continuous control command set when the command transmission table 1 is set will be described.
First, when the command transmission table 1 is set as described above, “1D1F” is already stored in the HL register.
Therefore, when the data at the address indicated by the value stored in the HL register is stored in the B register,
B register value = 06H (number of command transmissions)
Becomes
In the next step S202, a table address update process is performed. This process is a process of adding “1” to the value stored in the HL register. For example, when one command transmission table is set,
HL register value = 1D20 (H)
Becomes

Next, the process proceeds to step S203 to acquire a control command. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The value stored in the HL register is stored in the E register. For example, when the HL register value is “1D20”, as shown in FIG.
E register value = 15 (H)
Becomes
(2) Add "1" to the value stored in the HL register, and store the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register in the D register.
In the example above,
HL register value = 1D21 (H)
D register value = 32 (H)
Becomes
(3) “1” is further added to the HL register value.
In the example above,
HL register value = 1D22 (H)
Becomes

Next, the process proceeds to step S204, where a control command set 1 process (R_CMD_SET) is executed. When the process proceeds to step S204, the process proceeds to a process of FIG. 46 described below. This processing is for transmitting a control command to the sub-control board 80.
Next, the process proceeds to step S205, and it is determined whether or not the present process has been completed. In step S205, "1" is subtracted from the B register value. Then, it is determined whether or not the B register value is “0”. When it is determined that the B register value is “0”, it is determined that the control command continuous setting process is to be ended, and the process according to this flowchart is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the B register value is not “0”, the process returns to step S203.

  By the above processing, for example, when the command transmission table 1 is set, six control commands, which is the number of command transmissions, are generated. As described above, one control command includes upper one-byte data (definition data) and lower one-byte data (variable data). Then, every time a control command is generated, a process for transmitting to the sub-control board 80 is performed by the control command set 1 process of step S204.

On the other hand, when the command transmission table 2 is set, the processing in FIG. 45 is as follows.
First, in step S201, "1D32" is already stored in the HL register. Therefore, when the process of storing the data at the address indicated by the value stored in the HL register in the B register is performed,
B register value = 03H
Becomes

In the next step S202, a table address update process is performed. This process is a process of adding “1” to the value stored in the HL register. So, in this example,
HL register value = 1D33 (H)
Becomes

Next, the process proceeds to step S203 to acquire a control command. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The value stored in the HL register is stored in the E register. For example, when the HL register value is “1D33” as described above, as shown in FIG.
E register value = B8 (H)
Becomes
(2) Add "1" to the value stored in the HL register, and store the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register in the D register.
In this example,
HL register value = 1D34 (H)
D register value = 39 (H)
Becomes
(3) “1” is further added to the HL register value.
In this example,
HL register value = 1D35 (H)
Becomes

Next, the process proceeds to step S204, where control command set 1 processing (R_CMD_SET) (FIG. 46) is executed.
Then, the process proceeds to step S205, and it is determined whether or not the present process has been completed. In step S205, "1" is subtracted from the B register value. Then, it is determined whether or not the B register value is “0”. When it is determined that the B register value is “0”, it is determined that the control command continuous setting process is to be ended, and the process according to this flowchart is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the B register value is not “0”, the process returns to step S203.

  By the above processing, for example, when the command transmission table 2 is set, three control commands which are the number of command transmissions are generated. As described above, one control command includes upper one-byte data (definition data) and lower one-byte data (variable data). Then, every time a control command is generated, a process for transmitting to the sub-control board 80 is performed by the control command set 1 process of step S204.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the processing of the control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET).
First, in step S501, a second control command is obtained. In this process, the address of the RWM 61 is obtained based on the data stored in the Q register and the E register, and the data stored in the address of the RWM 61 is stored in the A register.
Here, “F0” is stored in the Q register when the power is turned on. The predetermined value is stored in the E register in step S203 of FIG. For example, when the command transmission table 1 is set, “15H” is stored in the E register in the first processing. Then, the address when the Q register value is the upper address and the E register value is the lower address, that is, the value stored in “F015” (the value of the operation state flag) is stored in the A register value.
Further, the data stored in the A register is stored in the E register.
As described above, the data of the operation state flag is stored in the A register and the E register.

In the next step S502, an interrupt prohibition process is executed. This process is the same as step S55. In the next step S503, control command set 2 (C_CMD_SET) (FIG. 47) is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S504, in which the interrupt processing prohibited in step S502 is released (that is, interrupt permission). Through the above processing, the interrupt processing is prohibited while the control command set 2 is being executed.
Then, in the control command set 2, the control command is written as described below. However, during the execution of the control command set 2, the interrupt processing is prohibited as described above. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a malfunction (for example, writing to an address different from a normal write address) due to execution of an interrupt process during writing of a control command.

Here, an interrupt flag for storing the inhibition / release of the interrupt is provided. The interrupt flag is turned on when the timing of executing the next interrupt process (within 2.235 ms from when the interrupt process was disabled) arrives after the interrupt process is disabled in step S502. Then, when canceling the prohibited interrupt processing, the main CPU 63 clears the interrupt flag thereafter.
When it is time to execute the interrupt processing, the main control board 60 determines whether the interrupt flag is on or off, and determines whether the interrupt processing is prohibited or permitted.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the control command set 2 (C_CMD_SET).
First, in step S511, the address of the control command buffer is set. This process is a process of setting the head address of the control command buffer.
Specifically, a value obtained by adding “1” to the start address of the control command buffer (_BF_SUBCMD) (“F113” in this embodiment as shown in FIG. 16), that is, “F114” is stored in the HL register. . This allows
HL register value = F114
Becomes

In the next step S512, a control command write pointer value is obtained. The control command write pointer is for designating to which address of the RWM 61 the control command data is to be written. Since the current write pointer is stored, the control command write pointer is read. The control command write pointer value (_NB_CMDSTORE) is stored at the address “F018” of the RWM 61 (FIG. 16).
In this process, the control command write pointer value is stored in the A register value. For example, when the control command write pointer value (the value stored in “F018”) is “1”, the A register value is set to “1”.

In the next step S513, the designated address is obtained. In this process, a write address (for the RWM 61) is obtained from the head address of the control command buffer and data indicating the current position of the write pointer.
Specifically, a process is performed in which a value obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is set as the HL register value. For example,
HL register value = F114 (H)
A register value = 1 (H)
HL register value (after addition) = F115 (H)
Becomes

Next, the process proceeds to step S514 to acquire data of the designated address. This process is a process of reading data stored in the storage area of the RWM 61 at the address obtained in step S513 of the pre-process.
Specifically, a value obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is set as the HL register value, and the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register.
In the example above,
HL register value = F115 (H)
A register value = 1 (H)
HL register value (after addition) = F116 (H)
Becomes

In “control command <64?” In the next step S515, it is determined whether or not the value of the data at the designated address (the A register value stored in step S514) is “0”. , “Yes”.
Here, the determination of “No” in step S515 is when the A register value is not “0”. When the A register value is not “0”, it means that data has already been written to the control command buffer at the address indicated by the control command write pointer value (_NB_CMDSTORE), and that data cannot be written to the address. In this manner, when there is data at the designated address, the data writing process is not executed, so that overwriting when there is data at the designated address is prevented.
When “Yes” is determined in step S515, the process proceeds to step S516, and when “No” is determined, the process according to this flowchart ends.

In the next step "store control command in RWM" in step S516, "1" is subtracted from the HL register value. Then, the E register value is stored at the address indicated by the HL register value, and the D register value is stored at the address indicated by the “HL + 1” register value. That is,
HL register value = HL register value-1
E register value = address value indicated by HL register value D register value = address value indicated by “HL + 1” register value
For example, when the HL register value at the time of proceeding to step S516 is “F116”,
E register value = value stored at address “F115” D register value = value stored at address “F116”
Here, the data stored in the D register and the data stored in the E register are one control command. Further, the data stored in the D register becomes definition data indicating the command type, and the data stored in the E register becomes variable data indicating the content of the command type.

In the next step S517, the control command write pointer value is updated.
In this process, first, the control command write pointer value (the value stored at the address “F018”) is stored in the HL register.
Next, “1” is added to the value stored in the HL register. Here, if the result of adding “1” exceeds “64 (decimal number)”, it is set to “0”.
Then, the value after the addition (the value stored in the HL register) is stored in the control command write pointer value (address “F018”). Thus, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

As described above, six control commands defined in the command transmission table 1 are transmitted in each game and game start set (MS_GAME_SET) (steps S95 and S96). Further, after the lottery of the condition device, three control commands defined in the command transmission table 2 are transmitted (steps S58 and S59).
Here, among the three control commands defined in the command transmission table 2, the accessory condition device number (F040), that is, information as to whether or not 1BB has been won is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. On the other hand, the winning and replay condition device number of the address “F039” is not transmitted. Thus, even if a goto action is performed on the sub-control board 80 or a communication line between the main control board 60 and the sub-control board 80, the winning and replay condition device numbers are prevented from being illegally known. can do.

Further, as specified in the command transmission table 2, the pressing order instruction number (information stored in the address “F0B8”) is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 for each game. However, in FIG. 52 to be described later, in step S214, when the pointing state is not instructed, that is, during non-AT, the pressing order designation number is not stored in the RWM 61 (address “F0B8”) in step S218, so that the data of the address “F0B8” It becomes "0". For this reason, in a game during non-AT, even if the game has won the push order bell (for example, the condition device number “23”), the push order instruction number stored in the RWM 61 is “0”, and the push The order designation number “0” is transmitted to the sub-control board 80.
Therefore, similarly to the above, it is impossible to illegally obtain the pressing order instruction number (correct answering order) by a goto action and operate the stop switch 42 in the correct answering order (acquire a high-bell) in the game. As a result, it is possible to prevent a gossip action due to incorrect acquisition of the correct answer pressing order.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the effect group number is transmitted, but the effect group number does not correspond one-to-one with the condition device number as shown in FIG. Therefore, for example, in the game in which the sub-control board 80 receives the information of the effect group number “13”, it can be determined that the sub-control board 80 has won one of the winning and replay condition device numbers “23” to “28”. Also, it cannot be determined which winning and replay condition device number has been actually won. Therefore, the order of pushing the correct answer in the game is unknown. Therefore, similarly to the above, even if the effect group number is illegally acquired by the goto action, the correct push order in the game cannot be known, so that the goto action can be prevented.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the start of medal acceptance (MS_MEDAL_START) in step S97 of FIG.
First, in step S131, the data of the number of bet medals is cleared. That is, this is a process of clearing the bet number in the previous game, and specifically, a process of setting the value of the medal bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL) to “0”.
Next, the process proceeds to step S132, in which a process of turning off the input display LEDs (73e to 73g) is performed. Specifically, a process of setting the D0 to D2 bits of the input number display LED signal data (_PT_MEDAL_LED) to “0” is performed.
In a next step S133, a medal management flag is initialized. Specifically, a process of setting the D0, D2 to D4, D6, and D7 bits of the medal management flag (_FL_MEDAL_STS) to “0” is performed.

  In the next step S134, the main control board 60 checks the operation state flag. The reason why the operation state flag is checked here is to determine whether or not a replay operation is to be performed in the next step S135. In the present embodiment, in step S134, the value of the D0 bit (replay) of the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION) is read.

Next, proceeding to step S135, based on the reading in step S134, it is determined whether or not the replay operation is being performed, that is, whether or not the D0 bit is “1”. When the D0 bit is "1", that is, when it is determined that the replay operation is being performed, the process proceeds to step S136, and when it is determined that the replay operation is not being performed, the process proceeds to step S148.
When it is determined that the replay operation is not being performed, and the process proceeds to step S148, the process of turning on the blocker 45 is executed, and the process according to the present flowchart ends. When the blocker 45 is turned on, the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 43 are not returned but are detected by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b and sent to the hopper 35a. That is, when the replay is not activated, maintenance of medals is uniformly permitted.
Therefore, in the medal acceptance start processing of the flowchart, the processing after step S136 corresponds to an automatic medal betting processing at the time of the replay operation.

  In step S136, a standby time during the replay operation is set. In the present embodiment, the count value “237” (237 × 2.235 ms = about 529.7 ms) of the number of interrupts is set in order to set the wait time to about 500 ms. Therefore, “00000000B” is set as the B register value, and “11101101B” is set as the C register value. Next, the process proceeds to step S137, where a waiting process for a 2-byte time is executed. This process is a process of subtracting the value of the BC register for each interrupt and waiting until the value becomes "0".

The reason for providing the standby process is to prevent the replay display LED 73a from being turned on immediately after the game is over (step S141), and from automatically betting immediately after the game is over (step S144). Because this is not preferred). Thereby, the timing of the automatic bet can be made appropriate.
Further, for example, at the time of winning a replay, it is possible to provide the player with an effect at the time of winning the replay (including the sound effect at the time of winning the replay) by using the waiting process of the two-byte time (the waiting process of the two-byte time). During, the game progress is stopped, so you can not cancel the production).

The betting sound at the time of the automatic betting is output based on the control commands stored in steps S142 and S143.
Note that the wait time can be varied according to the type of the winning replay. For example, at the time of the transfer replay prize, a wait time different from the normal replay prize (longer than the normal replay prize) may be set.

Next, the process proceeds to step S138, in which the number of stored sheets is read (the process of reading the current number of stored sheets). Here, the stored number display data (_NB_CREDIT_LED) is read, and the stored number is checked.
In the next step S139, it is determined whether or not the stored number is the limit number (in the present embodiment, 50). When it is determined that the number is the limit number, the process proceeds to step S141, and when it is determined that the number is not the limit, the process proceeds to step S140. The process here is

In step S140, control is performed so that the blocker is turned on, that is, acceptance of medals is permitted. Then, the process proceeds to step S141.
As described above, first, when the replay operation is not being performed, the blocker 45 is always turned on, and the reception of medals is permitted. When the replay operation is not performed, the bet medals (three in the normal game) are consumed and the bet can be made even if the stored number is the upper limit number (50) in the previous game. .

Second, when the number of stored medals is not at the limit during the replay operation, the blocker 45 is turned on, and acceptance of medals is permitted. If the number of stored medals is not the limit number, at least the number of stored medals can be added by medal care.
Thirdly, when the number of stored medals is at the limit during the replay operation, the blocker 45 is not turned on (the off state of the blocker 45 is maintained). This is because when the replay operation is performed and the number of stored medals is the upper limit number, medals cannot be bet and the number of stored medals cannot be added, so no medals are accepted.

In step S141, a replay display LED lighting process is performed. In this step S141, a process of turning on ("1") the D3 bit of the medal management flag (_FL_MEDAL_STS) is executed.
The process of actually turning on the replay display LED 73a is performed by the LED display control of step S606 in the interrupt process (FIG. 64) described later.
As described above, since the lighting process of the replay display LED 73a is executed after the execution of the waiting process for two bytes in step S137, the replay display LED 73a is not turned on at the moment when the replay is displayed (winning), but the replay is displayed. Then, after about 0.5 seconds, the light is turned on.

Then, in the next step S142, an output request setting process for transmitting a command indicating that an automatic bet has been made to the sub-control board 80 is performed, and in the next step S143, a control command set 1 process is executed. .
In the next step S144, a process of adding one medal (meaning an automatic bet process in this case), that is, an automatic bet (addition) of medals one by one in order to perform an automatic bet based on a winning in replay. Perform processing. When the process proceeds to step S144, the process proceeds to FIG.

Next, the process proceeds to step S145, in which a standby time for an automatic bet based on replay is set. In the present embodiment, the count value of the number of interrupts “46” (46 × 2.235 ms = about 103 ms) is set to set the wait time to about 100 ms. Therefore, “00000000B” is set as the B register value, and “00101110B” is set as the C register value. Next, the process proceeds to step S146 to execute a waiting process for a 2-byte time. This process is a process of subtracting the BC register value for each interrupt and waiting until the value becomes "0". When the two-byte waiting process in step S146 is completed, the process proceeds to step S147, in which it is determined whether or not the number of medals has reached the limit (three). I do.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of medals has not reached the limit, the process returns to step S144, and the one-medal addition (automatic bet) process is executed again.

  As described above, in the automatic bet at the time of the replay winning, the waiting process of the two bytes time in steps S145 and S146 is executed at the same time as the automatic betting of the medals one by one. , Every about 100 ms. As a result, the insertion number display LED signal data (_PT_MEDAL_LED) is also updated each time about 100 ms elapses. Therefore, it is possible to show the player that the insertion display LEDs 73e to 73g are sequentially turned on (every approximately 100 ms). Furthermore, when the sub-control board 80 outputs an automatic betting sound (a sound such as “pull”) from the speaker 22, it is possible to synchronize a change in lighting of the insertion display LEDs 73e to 73g with the automatic betting sound.

  Further, in the example of FIG. 48, it is determined in step S139 whether or not the storage limit number has been reached. If the storage limit number has not been reached, the process of turning on the blocker 45 to enable maintenance of medals (step S139) (S140) is executed. However, for example, at the time of a replay winning, it is possible to set the maintenance of the medals to be disabled. In the case of such control, when it is determined in step S135 that the replay operation is being performed, the processes in steps S138 to S140 may be omitted.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the 2-byte time waiting process (R_2BYTE_WAIT).
In step S31, it is determined whether or not the 2-byte standby time has elapsed. In this process, the value of the BC register is determined, and it is determined whether the value is “0” (whether the value of the B register is “0” and the value of the C register is “0”). Specifically, for example, when the B register value = "1" and the C register value = "0", it is determined that the value is not "0". Alternatively, when the B register value = "0" and the C register value = "0", it is determined to be "0".
If it is determined in step S31 that the value is "0", the process according to this flowchart ends. If it is determined that the value is not "0", the process proceeds to step S32.

  In step S32, an interrupt waiting process (C_INTR_WAIT; FIG. 50) is executed. This process is a process of waiting until one interrupt time (2.235 ms) elapses. Then, when the interrupt waiting process ends, the process proceeds to step S33, where the process of updating the waiting time is executed, and the process returns to step S31. This process is a process of subtracting “1” from the BC register value. Specifically, for example, when B register value = “1” and C register value = “0”, subtracting “1” gives B register value = “0”, C register value = “255” (decimal number) ). Alternatively, for example, when B register value = “0” and C register value = “1”, subtracting “1” results in B register value = “0” and C register value = “0”.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the interrupt waiting process (C_INTR_WAIT).
In acquiring the interrupt counter value in step S35, the interrupt counter value is stored in the A register. Here, in the present embodiment, the interrupt counter value is stored as 16 bits in the two addresses “F02B” and “F02C”. Is stored in the A register.

Next, the process proceeds to step S36, and it is determined whether or not the interrupt counter value (the value of the lower 8 bits stored at the address "F02C") has changed. Specifically, a process of subtracting the “interrupt counter value stored at the address“ F02C ”” from the “A register value” is executed. If the operation result is “0” (zero flag = “1”), , “No”. Then, when it is determined that there has been a change, the processing according to this flowchart ends, and when it is determined that there has been no change, the processing of step S36 is continued.
The zero flag is a flag for determining whether the result of the operation is “0” and indicates a specific bit of a flag register (F register) provided in the MPU. When the specific bit is “0” (zero flag = “0”), it indicates that the operation result is not “0”. When the specific bit is “1” (zero flag = “1”), the operation result is “0”. ".

  Further, as described above, when an 8-bit value is used as the interrupt counter value, the interrupt counter value is stored only in the address “F02B”. Therefore, in step S35, the value of the address “F02B” is stored in the A register. In step S36, it is determined whether or not the value stored at the address “F02B” has changed.

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the process of adding one medal (MS_MEDAL_INC) in step S144 of FIG.
In the present embodiment, the process of adding one medal in FIG. 48 will be described as a subroutine of the automatic bet process at the time of a replay winning. However, the process is not limited to the automatic bet at the time of a replay. This is a process commonly used when storing bets based on the operation of the bet switch 40. As described above, even when the betting processes to be executed are different, the program capacity can be reduced by using the common process (program).

First, in step S171, the main control board 60 reads a bet on medals. In the next step S172, a process of adding "1" to the read bet medal number ("+1") is performed. Then, the calculation result is stored in the C register. For example, if the number of bet medals so far is “0”, by adding “1”,
C register value = 00000001B
Becomes

In this process, the value of the medal bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL) stored in the RWM 61 is read (step S171), the read bet medal number data is stored in a predetermined register (for example, an A register), and the value of the A register is read. Is added to "1", and the A register value after the addition is stored (updated) in the medal bet number data.
For example, when the read bet medal number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL) is “0”,
_NB_PLAY_MEDAL = 0
A register value = 00000000B
A register value = 00000001B (after adding "1")
_NB_PLAY_MEDAL = 1
Becomes

In the next step S175, the main control board 60 performs a process of clearing the display of the acquired number display LED 72. In the present embodiment, the processing is to clear the data of the acquired number data (_NB_PAYOUT) stored in the RWM 61.
In this process, an operation is performed so that the value of the A register becomes “0” (for example, an exclusive OR of the A register value and the A register value), and the A register value after the operation is stored in the acquired number data. Execute (update) processing.
The process of actually displaying the acquired number display LED 72 is performed by LED display control (step S606) in the interrupt process.
Also, as described above, the one-medal addition processing of FIG. 51 is executed in any of the automatic bet processing at the time of a replay winning, the maintenance bet of medals, and the storage bet based on the operation of the bet switch 40. When these processes are executed, the acquired number data is cleared, and the display of the acquired number display LED 72 is updated.

Next, proceeding to step S176, the main control board 60 generates the lighting data of the input display LEDs 73e to 73g. The process of actually turning on the input display LEDs 73e to 73g is performed by the LED display control (step S606) in the interrupt process described later, similarly to the above.
Here, the insertion display LED lighting data is generated one by one. Therefore, when the number of inserted sheets is “3”, the operation is performed three times.
When the process first proceeds to step S176, the data for one-sheet insertion is generated as the number-of-inserted-display LED data. Determine whether or not. If it is determined that all the data for the number of inserted sheets has not been generated, the process proceeds to step S176, and the generated number-of-inserted-number display LED data is not generated again. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S177 that the generation of the lighting data for the number of inserted sheets has been completed (for example, when three pieces of the insertion display LED lighting data are generated when three sheets are inserted), the process proceeds to step S178.

In step S178, the main control board 60 performs control to store the lighting data of the insertion number display LED in the RWM 61 (insertion number display LED signal data (_PT_MEDAL_LED)).
The actual execution of the lighting control using the insertion number display LED signal data is executed by an interrupt process described later.

After step S178, the process proceeds to step S179, where the main control board 60 sets the medal limit number.
Here, the medal limit number means the maximum value of the number of medals that can be bet in the game (or the number of medals that must be bet in the game). Specifically, when the maximum number of medals that can be bet is different for each RT, it means the maximum number of medals that can be bet at that RT. Particularly, in the present embodiment, it is set so that a game is played by betting three medals at any RT. Therefore, the maximum number of medals in this embodiment is three. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, during a normal game (other than the 1BB game), the medal limit number is set to three, and during the 1BB game, the medal limit number is set to two (that is, in the 1BB game, a two-bet game is performed). Is also possible.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S180, where the main control board 60 performs a reading process of the bet medals (same as step S171). Then, in the next step S181, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the bet number is the limit number. Specifically, by subtracting the bet number from the medal limit number, if "0", it is determined that the bet number is the limit number. If it is determined that the bet number is not the limit number, the process according to this flowchart ends, and if it is determined that the bet number is the limit number, the process proceeds to step S182. In step S182, a medal limit flag is set. Here, a process of setting the D7 bit of the medal management flag (_FL_MEDAL_STS) to “1” is executed. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the pressing order instruction number setting process in step S53 in FIG.
FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a main game state check table. In FIG. 53, (A) shows the contents of the main game state check table, and (B) shows each of the main game state check tables. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a relationship between data and addresses.
In step S211 in FIG. 52, the main game state information is obtained. This process is a process of storing data stored in the main game state (_NB_GAM_STS) of the RWM 61 in the A register.
Next, the process proceeds to step S212, in which a main game state check table (TBL_STS_CHK) is set.

Here, the main game states of the present embodiment include eight types of main game states 0 to 7 as described above. Then, as shown in FIG. 53 (A), data indicating whether or not the pressing order is instructed is associated with each main game state. In FIG. 53 (A), “0 (H)” indicates that the pressing order is not instructed, and “FF (H)” indicates that the pressing order is in the instructing state.
Furthermore, the main game state check table is stored in the storage area of the ROM 62 at addresses “1ECD” to “1ED4”. The start address is “1ECD”, and the data “0 (H)” stored in the “1ECD” indicates the data of the main gaming state 0 (the presence / absence of the push order instruction).

The description returns to FIG.
"Set of main game status check table" in step S212 means storing the head address of the main game status check table (TBL_STS_CHK) in the HL register. That is,
HL register value = 1 ECD
Becomes
In the next step S213, specified address data is set. In this process, the value obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is used as the HL register value, and the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register. That is, this is a process of adding the head address value of the main game state check table and the value of the main game state, and setting data at an address corresponding to the value after the addition. In other words, the data stored in the main game state (_NB_GAM_STS) is used as an offset value, and the corresponding data is obtained from the head address of the main game state check table.

For example, when the A register value is “1”,
HL register value = 1 ECD (before addition)
A register value = 1
HL register value = 1 ECE (after addition)
A register value = 0
Becomes
When the A register value = “2”,
HL register value = 1 ECD (before addition)
A register value = 2
HL register value = 1 ECF (after addition)
A register value = FF (H)
Becomes
As described above, by performing the arithmetic processing using the data stored in the main game state (_NB_GAM_STS) as the offset value, it is easy to determine whether the current main game state is the push order instruction state or not. Can be calculated.

In the next step S214, it is determined whether or not it is in the instruction state. Here, when the A register value is “0”, it is determined that the instruction state is not set (No). On the other hand, when the A register value is “FF (H)”, it is “≠ 0”, so it is determined to be “Yes” (instructed state).
If it is determined that it is not in the instructed state, the process according to this flowchart ends, and if it is determined that it is in the instructed state, the process proceeds to step S215.
Therefore, when it is not in the instruction state, that is, during non-AT, it is determined as “No” in step S214, so that step S218 and step S220 described later are not executed. That is, the push order instruction number of the address “F0B8” is “0”, and the acquired number data (push order instruction data) of the address “F00E” is “0”.

In step S215, a winning number is set. Here, the winning number indicates a condition device number that has been won in the game. The condition device number (winning and replay) won in the game is stored in “winning and replay condition device number (_NB_CND_NOR)” in the address “F039” of the RWM 61. Then, in step S215, the value of this address is stored in the A register.
Next, the process proceeds to step S216, where a pressing order instruction number table is set. This processing is to store the head address of the ROM 62 in which the pressing order instruction number table (TBL_NAV_CTL; FIG. 34) is stored in the HL register. This allows
HL register value = 1 EDC (H)
Becomes

In the next step S217, designated address data is set. In this process, the value obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is used as the HL register value, and the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register. In other words, the data stored in the winning and replay condition device number (_NB_CND_NOR) is used as an offset value, and the corresponding data is obtained from the top address of the pressing order instruction number table.
For example, when the A register value is “1”,
HL register value = 1 EDC (before addition)
A register value = 1
HL register value = 1 EDD (after addition)
A register value = 0 (data value stored at address "1EDD")
That is, the A register value at this time indicates the pressing order instruction number corresponding to the condition device number.
Next, the process proceeds to step S218, where the pressing order instruction number is stored in the RWM 61. That is, the value stored in the A register is stored in the pressing order designation number (_NB_ORD_INF) of the address “F0B8” of the RWM 61.
As described above, by performing the arithmetic processing using the data stored in the winning and replay condition device number (_NB_CND_NOR) as the offset value, the pressing order number corresponding to the condition device number can be easily calculated and stored in the RWM 61. Can be.

In the next step S219, it is determined whether or not there is no push order instruction in the game. In this process, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the A register is “0”. If the value is “0”, it is determined that there is no pressing order instruction (Yes). It is determined that there is a pressing order instruction (No).
When it is determined that there is no push order instruction, the display of the push order instruction information is not performed, and the process according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a pressing order instruction, the process proceeds to step S220.

In step S220, the push order instruction data is generated. This process is a process of adding “100 (decimal number)” to the value stored in the A register and storing the value after the addition in the A register. For example, when the A register value before the addition is “2”,
A register value = 2: before addition A register value = 102 (decimal number): after addition
As described above, in the present embodiment, a value obtained by adding “100 (decimal number)” to the push order instruction number is referred to as “push order instruction data” and is distinguished from the push order instruction number. Further, as described later, when the push order instruction data is displayed by the acquired number display LED 72, for example, when the push order instruction number is “2” and the push order instruction data is “102 (decimal)”, “= 2” (push order instruction information) is displayed.
The same applies to other pressing order numbers. For example, when the push order instruction number is “N”, the push order instruction data is “100 + N (decimal number)”, and the push order instruction information (display content) is “= N”.

In the next step S221, the value stored in the A register is stored in the acquired number data (_NB_PAYOUT) of the address “F00E” in the RWM 61. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
In the present embodiment, the maximum number of medals acquired in the game is "9" at the time of the correct answer in the pushing order at the time of winning the pushing order bell. Therefore, when the value stored in the acquired number data (_NB_PAYOUT) is less than “100 (decimal number)”, the acquired number data is indicated, and when the value is “100” or more, it is determined that the data is the push order instruction data. It is possible to do.

In this way, when the pressing order instruction information is stored in the acquired number data at the timing of step S53 in FIG. 41, this data is acquired in step S636 in the “LED display control (FIG. 65)” of the interrupt process described later. Then, it is displayed on the acquired number display LED 72 as the push order instruction information.
The displayed push order instruction information is cleared at the timing of step S65 in FIG. Further, at the end of the game, when the number obtained by the player due to the winning of the role is stored in the obtained number data (step S72), the obtained number is set to “LED display control (FIG. 65)” as described above. At the acquisition number display LED 72.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the effect group number setting process in step S54 of FIG.
First, in step S231, the condition device number won in the game is acquired. The condition device number (winning and replay) won in the game is stored in “winning and replay condition device number (_NB_CND_NOR)” in the address “F039” of the RWM 61. Then, in step S215, the value of this address is stored in the A register.
Next, proceeding to step S232, the effect group number table is set. This process is a process of storing the head address of the ROM 62 storing the effect group number table (TBL_ACT_GRP; FIG. 36) in the HL register. This allows
HL register value = 1E53 (H)
Becomes

In the next step S233, the designated address data is set. In this process, the value obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is used as the HL register value, and the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register.
For example, when the A register value is “1”,
HL register value = 1E53 (before addition)
A register value = 1
HL register value = 1E54 (after addition)
A register value = 1 (data value stored at address "1E54")
That is, the A register value at this time indicates the effect group number corresponding to the condition device number.
Next, proceeding to step S234, the effect group number is stored in the RWM 61. In this process, the value stored in the A register is stored in the effect group number (_NB_ACT_GRP) of the address “F0B7” of the RWM 61. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.
In other words, this is a process in which the data stored in the winning and replay condition device number (_NB_CND_NOR) is used as an offset value, and the corresponding data is obtained from the head address of the effect group number table.
As described above, by performing the arithmetic processing using the data stored in the winning and replay condition device number (_NB_CND_NOR) as the offset value, the effect group number corresponding to the condition device number can be easily calculated and stored in the RWM 61. Can be.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the symbol stop signal setting process in step S56 of FIG.
Here, prior to the description of FIG. 55, the symbol stop signal tables 1 and 2 will be described.
FIG. 56 is a diagram showing the symbol stop signal table 1 (TBL_IF2_SET1). FIG. 56A shows the contents of the symbol stop signal table 1, and FIG. It is a figure showing a relation.
FIG. 57 is a diagram showing the symbol stop signal table 2 (TBL_IF2_SET2). FIG. 57 (A) shows the contents of the symbol stop signal table 2, and FIG. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 56A, the symbol stop signal table 1 stores ten symbol stop signal data. Furthermore, each symbol stop signal data is composed of four data. For example, "small hand aim" is provided as one symbol stop signal, and the symbol stop signal data of "small hand aim" is composed of four "0, 3, 12, 8".

These four pieces of data are, from the left side, respectively, a push order instruction number, an optimal operation timing of the left reel 31 (middle), an optimal operation timing of the middle reel 31 (middle), and an optimal operation timing of the right reel 31 (middle). Is shown.
For example, in "Small role aim"
“0”: Indicates a pressing order instruction number. “0” indicates that there is no pressing order (no problem).
"3": The optimal operation position of the stop switch 42 of the left reel 31 means that the left stop switch 42 is operated so that the third symbol stops at the middle stage (immediately before passing through the middle stage).
"12": The optimal operation position of the stop switch 42 of the middle reel 31 means that the middle stop switch 42 is operated so that the twelfth symbol stops at the middle stage.
“8”: The optimal operation position of the stop switch 42 of the right reel 31 means that the right stop switch 42 is operated so that the symbol 8 stops at the middle stage.
In FIG. 56, “127” indicating the operation timing at the pressing order instruction numbers “1” to “9” means that the operation timing is unquestioned (any operation position).

In FIG. 17, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the operation timing at which the third “Replay A” stops at the middle stage when the left reel 31 stops, the fifth “Cherry” and the sixth “Watermelon A” are enabled. It is possible to stop at the line.
When the twelfth “watermelon A” is operated at the operation timing at which the twelfth “watermelon A” stops at the middle stage when the middle reel 31 stops, the twelfth “watermelon A” can be stopped at the active line.
Further, when the right stop switch 42 is operated at the operation timing at which the No. 8 “Red 7” stops at the middle stage when the right reel 31 stops, the No. 9 “watermelon A” can be stopped at the active line.
From the above, when each stop switch 42 is operated in the above position, there is a small role that may be missed, that is, the weak cherry and the strong cherry of the condition device numbers “15” and “16”, and the condition device numbers “48” and “16”. When the weak watermelon and the strong watermelon of “49” are won, the winning combination can be made without missing these winning combinations.

  As shown in FIG. 57 (A), the symbol stop signal table 2 stores one symbol stop signal data. Further, the symbol stop signal data is composed of four pieces of data as described above. The symbol stop signal provided in the symbol stop signal table 2 is a symbol stop signal for enabling the winning condition condition device, that is, enabling 1BB to be won, and is data of a pressing order and operation timing for aligning "BAR". .

Therefore, the pressing order data of the symbol stop signal is "0", the data of the operation timing of each reel 31 is "19, 18, 17", and "black BAR" stops on the activated line. The operation timing is shown.
As shown in FIG. 57 (B), the start address of the symbol stop signal table 2 (TBL_IF2_SET2) in the ROM 62 is set to “2C88”, and the symbol stop signal is set to “2C88” to “2C8B”. Signal data is stored.
The symbol stop signal table 2 in FIG. 57 is used in a game in which 1BB can be won, such as when 1BB is won alone or when the condition device is not won inside 1BB. On the other hand, for example, in a game in which 1BB and a small role or a replay are overlapped and a small role or a replay wins, the small role aim of the symbol stop signal table 1 is used (in a game in which the replay wins, the small role aim is a small role aim). Even so, the replay wins with "PB = 1").

  As described above, the symbol stop signal is a signal including the pressing order instruction number of the stop switch 42 and the operation timing of each reel 31, and is a test signal transmitted to the testing machine. Upon receiving the symbol stop signal (test signal), the tester executes a simulation of operating the stop switch 42 according to the symbol stop signal. Then, when a simulation of operating the stop switch 42 according to the symbol stop signal is executed, it is determined (confirmed) whether or not the reel 31 stops at a correct position, and whether or not the payout rate is within an appropriate range. Can be determined (confirmed).

Referring back to FIG. 55, the symbol stop signal set (S_IF2_SET) will be described.
First, in step S241, the symbol stop signal table 1 shown in FIG. 56 is set. This process is a process of storing the start address of the symbol stop signal table 1 in the HL register. That is,
HL register value = 2C60 (H)
Becomes
In the next step S242, it is determined whether or not there is a pressing order instruction. In this process, the data of the push order instruction number (_NB_ORD_INF) stored in the address “F0B8” of the RWM 61 is stored in the A register. If the A register value is not "0", it is determined that "Yes" (the order of the push order is present), and if it is "0", it is determined that "No" (the order of the push order is not present).
When it is determined that there is a pressing order instruction, the process proceeds to step S246, and when it is determined that there is no pressing order instruction, the process proceeds to step S243.

  In step S243, it is determined whether or not the (prize and replay) condition device number is “0”. In this process, the winning and replay condition device number (_NB_CND_NOR) stored at the address “F039” of the RWM 61 is stored in the A register, and it is determined whether the A register value is not “0”. When it is determined that it is not “0” (that is, when the condition device of the game is not non-winning), the process proceeds to step S248, and when it is determined that it is “0”, the process proceeds to step S244.

In step S244, it is determined whether or not 1BB operation is being performed. In this process, the accessory condition device number (_NB_CND_BNS) stored at the address “F040” of the RWM 61 is stored in the A register, and it is determined whether or not the A register value is “0”. When it is determined to be "0", it means that 1BB is not operating, and when it is determined that it is not "0", it is when 1BB is operating.
When it is determined that the operation is not 1BB operation, the process proceeds to step S248, and when it is determined that the operation is 1BB operation, the process proceeds to step S245.

In step S245, the symbol stop signal table 2 is set. This process is a process of setting a symbol stop signal table 2 instead of the symbol stop signal table 1 initially set in step S241. Specifically, the data stored in the A register is decremented by "1". When the process proceeds to step S245, since the A register value is "1" at that time, the A register value becomes "0" by this decrement.
Further, the head address of the symbol stop signal table 2 is set in the HL register. This allows
HL register value = 2C88 (H)
Becomes

In the next step S246, an offset value is set. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The data stored in the A register and the data stored in the A register value are added, and the added data is stored in the A register. That is, the data value of the A register is doubled.
(2) Add the data stored in the A register value and the data stored in the A register, and store the added data in the A register. That is, the data value of the A register is doubled.
The data values stored in the A register are quadrupled by the above processes (1) and (2). For example, when the data of the A register before the operation is “1”, the data after the operation is “4”.

Next, the process proceeds to step S247 to acquire address data. This process is a process of adding the value stored in the A register to the value stored in the HL register.
For example, when “2C60” is first stored in the HL register and “1” is stored in the A register, the calculations in steps S246 and S247
A register value = 4
HL register value = 2C64
Becomes
That is, since the A register value before the calculation in step S246 was “1” (push order instruction number 1), the start address (2C64) of the push order instruction number 1 of the symbol stop signal data is calculated by the calculations in steps S246 and S247. ) Can be specified.

In the next step S248, a serial communication circuit data register is set. Here, processing of storing the address of the transmission register in the serial communication circuit of the chip built in the main CPU 63 in the DE register is performed. In the present embodiment, the address of the transmission register is “FE53”.
Next, the process proceeds to step S249 to execute processing for transmitting (outputting) the pressing order instruction number (writing the pressing order instruction number to the address of the transmission register). In this case, the data stored in the HL register is stored in the A register, and the data stored in the A register is stored in the address indicated by the DE register. As described above, even at this point, the HL register value is the head address of the symbol stop signal data to be transmitted.

Next, the process proceeds to step S250 to execute processing for transmitting (outputting) the designated position of the first reel 31 (the left reel 31 in the present embodiment) (writing the designated position of the left reel 31 to the address of the transmission register). ). In this process, a value obtained by adding “1” to the value indicated by the HL register is stored in the A register, and the data stored in the A register is stored in the address indicated by the DE register.
Next, the process proceeds to step S251 to execute processing for transmitting (outputting) the designated position of the second reel 31 (the middle reel 31 in the present embodiment) (writing the designated position of the middle reel 31 to the address of the transmission register). ). In this process, a value obtained by adding “2” to the value indicated by the HL register is stored in the A register, and the data stored in the A register is stored in the address indicated by the DE register.

Next, the process proceeds to step S252 to execute processing for transmitting (outputting) the designated position of the third reel 31 (the right reel 31 in the present embodiment) (writing the designated position of the right reel 31 to the address of the transmission register). ). In this process, a value obtained by adding “3” to the value indicated by the HL register is stored in the A register, and the data stored in the A register is stored in the address indicated by the DE register.
Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.
According to the above processing, for example, when transmitting a symbol stop signal corresponding to “small role aim” in FIG. 56, “00H” is transmitted in step S249, “03H” is transmitted in step S250, and “03H” is transmitted in step S251. "0CH" is transmitted, and "08H" is transmitted in step S252.

The process of FIG. 55 is the process of step S56 in FIG. 41, which is the main process, so that each game is performed. When the slot machine 10 and the testing machine are electrically connected, a game and symbol stop signal is transmitted by the processing in FIG.
On the other hand, even when the slot machine 10 and the testing machine are not connected, for example, even when the slot machine 10 is installed in the hall, every game, the processing of step S56 in FIG. 41 is executed. Therefore, the processing in FIG. 55 is executed. However, since the slot machine 10 and the test machine are not connected, the symbol stop signal is not transmitted to the outside.

  As described in steps S603 and S619 in FIG. 64 described later, in the present embodiment, power interruption detection is performed during interrupt processing. For this reason, in the symbol stop signal setting process executed while the interrupt is prohibited, the power is not cut off during the process. In other words, even when the power is turned off during the symbol stop signal setting process, the power-off detection signal is input (the D0 bit of the input port 2 is "1"). ), The symbol stop signal setting process is executed to the end.

FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the reel rotation start preparation process (M_REEL_READY) in step S60 in FIG.
In step S531, it is determined whether the minimum game period has elapsed. In the present embodiment, the minimum game time (the minimum time from the start of rotation of the reel 31 to the start of rotation of the reel 31 in the next game) is set to about 4.1 seconds. Here, the value of the minimum game time (_TM2_GAME) stored at the address “F03A” of the RWM 61 is read, stored in the A register, and whether or not the value stored in the A register is not “0” (the zero flag is “1”) Is not determined). If it is not “0” (the zero flag is not “1”), it is determined to be “No”.

  If it is determined that the minimum game time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S532, and the minimum game time is stored. In this process, “1836” (1836 × 2.235 ms = about 4100 ms) is stored in the minimum game time (_TM2_GAME) of the RWM 61. When the minimum game time is stored in the RWM 61 in step S532, "1" is subtracted from the next interrupt processing in step S605 described later. When the "1836" interrupt is executed from the time of step S532 and the value of the minimum time becomes "0", it remains at "0" thereafter. Then, in step S532 of the next game, “1836” is stored again.

In a next step S533, a condition device number is obtained. This process is a process of storing information of the accessory condition device number (_NB_CND_BNS) of the address “F049” in the H register, and storing information of the winning and replay condition device number (_NB_CND_NOR) of the address “F048” in the L register. is there.
In the condition device information output bit set in the next step S534, a process of setting the D7 bit of the H register to “1” and setting the D6 bit of the L register to “1” is performed.
In the present embodiment, when the D7 bit in the upper two bits of the condition device information is “1”, it indicates the accessory condition device information, and when the D6 bit is “1”, the winning and replaying It is set to point to the condition device information (see FIG. 16).

Next, the process proceeds to step S535, in which the condition device information is saved. In this process, the H register value is stored in the accessory condition device information (_NB_CNDINF_B) at the address “F04D”, and the L register value is stored in the winning and replay condition device information (_NB_CNDINF_N) at the address “F04C”. is there.
Next, the process proceeds to step S536 to store the condition device information output time. This process is a process of storing “25” in the condition device output time (_TM1_COND_OUT) of the address “F030” of the RWM 61. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, during the “24 × 2.235 ms = 53.64 ms”, the bonus item condition device information (_NB_CNDINF_B) and the winning and replay condition device information (_NB_CNDINF_N) are output to the outside. The condition device output time set here is subtracted from the next interruption process by "1" in step S605 described later.

FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the medal payout number update processing in step S68 of FIG.
First, in step S591, medal payout number data is acquired. Since the winning combination (combination of symbols) can be specified based on the display determination in step S66 of FIG. 41, the number of medal payouts corresponding to the combination of symbols is read from a data table or the like.

  In the next step S592, medal payout number data is stored. In this process, the medal payout number data acquired in step S591 is stored (stored) in “_NB_PAY_MEDAL” of the address “F06C” in the RWM 61. Since the value of “_NB_PAY_MEDAL” is “0” at the time of the processing in step S592, a process of writing new data is performed. For example, when winning one copy, the data value is updated from “0” to “1”. When a winning combination having a medal payout is not won, whether or not to perform the process of step S591 is optional. For example, there are a method of skipping step S591 and a method of executing the process of step S591 and writing a data value “0”.

In the next step S593, the medal payout number data buffer is stored. In this process, the medal payout number data acquired in step S591 is stored (stored) in “_BF_PAY_MEDAL” of the address “F06D” in the RWM 61. As the value of “_BF_PAY_MEDAL” remains the value written in the previous game, a process of writing (overwriting) the number of medal payouts (“0” when there is no medal payout) in the game is executed.
Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

  In the above-described medal payout number update process of FIG. 59, the value of “_NB_PAY_MEDAL” stored in step S592 is thereafter subtracted by “1” each time one medal payout is performed, and becomes “0” at the end of medal payout. Become. On the other hand, the value of “_BF_PAY_MEDAL” stored in step S593 is maintained (not changed) until it is updated in the next game, that is, until the process in step S593 is performed in the next game.

FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the medal payout process (MS_WIN_PAY) by winning in step S72 of FIG.
First, in step S451, an output request at the start of medal payout is set. In this process, a command indicating the number of acquired (paid) sheets is stored in a predetermined register. In the next step S452, control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET) is executed. This process is a process of storing a command in the command buffer of the RWM 61.
Next, the process proceeds to step S453, where a medal number setting process is executed. This processing is divided into the following two. As the first of this processing, the value of the medal payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) is stored in the D register. Second, the value of the medal bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL) is stored in the E register. In the next step S454, the operation flag is checked. This process is a process of determining whether each bit of the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION) is on or off.

Next, the process proceeds to step S455 to determine whether or not 1BB operation is being performed. In the present embodiment, the 1BB operation state flag is determined based on whether or not the D3 bit of the operation state flag is “1”. When it is determined that the 1BB operation state flag is “1”, the process proceeds to step S456, and when it is determined that the 1BB operation state flag is not “1”, the process proceeds to step S460.
In step S456, obtainable number data at the time of 1BB operation (during 1BB game) is obtained. This process is a process of storing the data of the obtainable number (_CT_BIG_PAY) at the time of 1BB operation of the RWM 61 in the A register. Then, in the next step S457, it is determined whether or not the acquired number upper limit at the time of 1BB operation has been reached. Here, the information in the D register (medal payout number data) is subtracted from the value stored in the A register, the operation result is stored in the A register, and the value stored in the A register is not negative (carry flag ≠ “1”). )). When it is determined that it is not minus, it is determined to be “No”.
If it is determined to be negative, the process proceeds to step S458, and if it is not negative, the process proceeds to step S459.

In step S458, the obtainable number at the time of 1BB operation is cleared. This process is a process of performing an “XOR” operation on the A register value and the A register value, and storing the operation result in the A register. As a result of this arithmetic processing, the A register value always becomes “0”. Then, the process proceeds to step S459.
In step S459, the obtainable number at the time of 1BB operation is updated. Specifically, the A register value is stored in the obtainable number (_CT_BIG_PAY) when the RWM 61 operates 1BB. Then, the process proceeds to step S460.

In step S460, a process of setting the number of tokens to be paid out is performed. This process is a process of storing the E register value (the value of the E register is medal bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL) by the process of step S453) in the A register. Thereby, the value of the medal bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL) is stored in the A register.
In the next step S461, it is determined whether or not the replay is displayed. This process is to determine whether or not the D0 bit of the symbol combination display flag (_FL_WIN) is "1". When it is determined that the replay display is being performed, the process proceeds to step S467, and when it is determined that the replay display is not performed, the process proceeds to step S462.

In step S462, a medal payout number setting process is performed. This processing is to store the D register value (the D register value is medal payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) by the processing in step S453) in the A register. As a result, the value of the medal payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) is stored in the A register. Then, the process proceeds to step S467.
By the above processing, at the time of replay winning, the A register value becomes the medal bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL) value set at step S453, and when the replay is not winning (that is, at the time of the small role winning), the A register value is: The medal payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) value set in step S462 is used.

Next, the process proceeds to step S467, and it is determined whether or not medals are paid out. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the medal payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) is “0”. In this process, the value of the address “F06C” of the RWM 61 may be read and a zero check may be performed. However, at the time of step S467, the medal payout number data is stored in the D register in step S453. Therefore, it is possible to read the D register value and perform a zero check. Then, when it is determined that the value is "0", that is, when it is determined that there is no payout of medals, the processing according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not “0”, that is, when it is determined that there is a payout of medals, the process proceeds to step S468.
In step S468, the stored number of sheets is read. Next, the process proceeds to step S469 to determine whether or not the number of stored medals has reached the limit value. When the stored number is "50", it is determined that the stored number has reached the limit value, and the process proceeds to step S473. When it is determined that the stored number is not at the limit, the process proceeds to step S470.

  In step S470, the standby time at the time of adding the stored medals is set. In the present embodiment, the count value “46” (46 × 2.235 ms = about 100 ms) of the number of interrupts is set in order to set the wait time to about 100 ms. Therefore, “00000000B” is set as the B register value, and “00101110B” is set as the C register value. Next, the process proceeds to step S146, where a 2-byte time waiting process (R_2BYTE_WAIT) is executed. This process is a process of subtracting the value of the BC register for each interrupt and waiting until the value becomes "0". When the two-byte waiting process in step S471 is completed, the process advances to step S472 to execute a process of adding one to the number of stored sheets. Then, the process proceeds to step S474.

  When the process proceeds from step S469 to step S473, one medal payout process (process of paying out actual medals to the player from the hopper 35a) is executed. By the above processing, the stored number is added until the stored number reaches the limit value, and when the stored number is the limit, a process of paying out the actual medals from the hopper is executed.

In step S474, the display of the acquired number display LED 72 is set to "+1". This process is a process of updating the acquired number data of the address “F00E” by “+1”. For example, when the previous display is “2”, this corresponds to a process of updating the display to “3”.
In the next step S475, a process of subtracting “1” from the medal payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) is performed. In step S475, only the medal payout number data at address "F06C" is updated, and the value of the medal payout number data buffer at address "F06D" is not updated.
Next, the process proceeds to step S476 to determine whether or not the medal payout is completed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the updated medal payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) has become “0”. When it is determined that the medal payout number is “0”, the flow proceeds to step S477, and when it is determined that the medal payout number is not “0”, the flow proceeds to step S468.

  In step S477, an output request at the end of payout of medals is set. In this process, a command indicating the end of the medal payout is stored in the register. In the next step S478, control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET) is executed. This process is a process of storing a command in the command buffer of the RWM 61. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

In the above payout processing, when performing payout in which one storage number is added, a standby time of about 100 ms is set by the processing of steps S471 and S472. Thereby, it is possible to show the player that the stored number display LED 71 is counting up. For example, when the display of the stored number display LED 71 before the storage addition is “08” and eight medals are stored and added thereto, “display“ 08 ”→ 100 ms weight processing → display“ 09 ”→ 100 ms ... → 100 ms wait processing → display “16”. On the other hand, if the standby time is not provided at the time of adding one stored number, the display changes instantaneously from "08" to "16".
Then, as in the present embodiment, when adding the stored number of sheets, by executing a waiting process for two bytes for each addition, the payout sound output from the sub-control board 80 side (“Plururu ...”) ) Can be synchronized with the count-up of the number of stored sheets.

On the other hand, when the stored number exceeds the maximum number of “50” and medals are actually paid out in the processing after step S473, the waiting processing for the 2-byte time in steps S470 and S471 is not provided.
This is because, in order to pay out one actual medal, the hopper motor 36 is driven to pay out, and as described above, it takes about 100 ms to pay out one medal. As a result, the payout time per medal is about 100 ms, and therefore, when paying out the actual medals, the waiting process for the 2-byte time is not provided. Therefore, when actually paying out medals, it is possible to synchronize the payout sound output from the sub-control board 80 side without providing a waiting process for a 2-byte time.

FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the game end check processing (M_GAME_CHK) in step S73 of FIG.
In step S541, a process of clearing the flag of the condition device is performed. This process is a process of clearing the condition device other than the special combination, and when it is determined that the combination of the symbols corresponding to the special combination has stopped on the activated line, a process of clearing also the condition device of the special combination is executed. In the next step S542, the replay display LED is turned off. This process corresponds to a process of setting the D3 bit of the medal management flag (_FL_MEDAL_STS) to “0”. Next, the process proceeds to step S543 to clear the replay operation flag. This process is to set the D0 bit of the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION) to “0”.

In the next step S544, 1BB operation management (M_BB_CTL; FIG. 62) is performed. This process is a process for determining whether or not the 1BB game end condition is satisfied during the 1BB game, which will be described later. In the next step S545, it is determined whether or not the RB operation is being performed. This processing determines whether the RB operation state flag, which is the D4 bit of the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION), is “0”, and determines that the RB operation state flag is not “0” (zero flag ≠ 1) (at the time of RB operation). RB operation management (M_RB_CTL; FIG. 63) is performed when it is determined that there is, and when it is determined to be “0” (not during RB operation), the processing according to this flowchart ends.
In FIG. 41, the processing for waiting for two bytes at the time of displaying the special combination is executed in steps S70 and S71. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be performed before step S541 in the game end check processing. .

FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing 1BB operation management (M_BB_CTL) in step S544 of FIG.
In step S551, the operation state flag is checked. This process executes a process of storing the value of the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION) in the A register. Further, the value stored in the A register is right-shifted (one digit). Specifically, for example, at the time of replay operation, the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION)
A register value = 00000001B
Becomes
In addition, if you rotate one digit to the right,
A register value = 00000000B (carry flag on)
Becomes

Also, for example, at the time of 1BB operation (and at the time of RB operation), the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION)
A register value = 00011000B
Becomes
In addition, if you rotate one digit to the right,
A register value = 0000100B (zero flag off (@ "1"))
Becomes
In the next step S552, it is determined whether or not 1BB operation is being performed. In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the zero flag after the rotation is “0”, and if the zero flag is “0”, it is determined as “No” (not during 1BB operation).

If it is determined in step S552 that 1BB operation is being performed, the process proceeds to step S553. If it is determined that 1BB operation is not being performed, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
In step S553, the acquired number of sheets at the time of 1BB operation is obtained. This process is a process of storing the value of the obtainable number (_CT_BIG_PAY) during the 1BB operation stored in the RWM 61 (addresses “F060” and “F061”) in the A register.

  In the next step S554, it is determined whether or not the 1BB operation end condition is satisfied (whether or not the obtainable number has become “0”). This process is performed by determining whether the value stored in the A register is “0” (whether the zero flag is not “0”). If it is determined that the 1BB operation end condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S555, and if it is determined that the 1BB operation end condition is not satisfied, the process according to this flowchart ends.

  In step S555, the value of the A register is stored in the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION). When the process proceeds to step S555, the A register value is “0”, so that the updated operation state flag (_FL_ACTION) becomes “00000000B”. Next, the process proceeds to step S556, in which an output request at the end of the 1BB operation is set. In the present embodiment, “3F01” is stored in the DE register. Then, in the next step S557, the control command set 1 is executed, and the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the RB operation management (M_RB_CTL) in step S546 of FIG.
In step S561, “1” is subtracted from the number of games (_CT_BONUS_PLAY) during the RB operation stored in the RWM 61 (address “F073”). In the next step S562, it is determined whether or not the number of games at the time of the RB operation after the update in step S561 is “0” (whether the zero flag is “1”). When it is determined that the number of games during the RB operation is “0”, the process proceeds to step S566, and when it is determined that the number of games is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S563.

  In step S563, it is determined whether or not the value of the medal payout number data buffer (“_BF_PAY_MEDAL” of the address “F06D”) is “0”. This determination is a process for determining whether or not to subtract the value of the number of winnings at the time of RB operation, and determines whether or not there has been a payout due to the winning of the small role in the game. In other words, when a small win is won in the game (when the player has a medal payout), the medal payout number is stored in “_BF_PAY_MEDAL” in step S593 of FIG. 59 (medal payout number update processing) described above. By determining whether or not the data value is “0”, it is determined whether or not there is a payout due to winning of the small role in the game.

  With this configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not the small role has won, without requiring a special (dedicated) process for determining whether or not the small role has won when the RB is activated. . That is, when the small win is awarded, the "storage of the number of payouts" is performed based on the winning. Therefore, the payout number is read, and if the payout number is a specific value ("0" in the present embodiment), the small win is executed. It is determined that there is no winning, and if the value is a value other than the specific value (a value other than “0” in the present embodiment), it can be determined that the small winning combination has been won.

  More specifically, in the present embodiment, when there is a payout of medals in the game (at the time of winning a small role), the medal payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) is stored in the above-mentioned medal payout number data. The payout number of the game is also stored in the buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL). Then, the value of the medal payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) is decremented as the medal is paid out, and becomes "0" at the end of the medal payout. On the other hand, the value of the medal payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL) is not updated (subtracted) by the payout process. For this reason, the determination as to whether or not there is a payout due to the winning of the small role in the game refers to the value of the medal payout number data buffer.

Then, in step S563, when it is determined that the value of the medal payout number data buffer is “0” (when a small role is not awarded), the process according to this flowchart ends, and when it is determined that the value is not “0” (At the time of winning a small role), the process proceeds to step S564.
In step S564, “1” is subtracted from the winning number (_CT_BONUS_WIN) during the RB operation stored in the RWM 61 (address “F074”). Next, the process proceeds to step S565, and it is determined whether the operation of the RB has been completed. In step S565, it is determined whether the value obtained by subtracting “1” from the number of winnings in step S564 is “0” (zero flag = “1”). If it is determined that the value is “0”, the process proceeds to step S566, and if it is determined that the value is not “0”, the process according to this flowchart ends.

In step S566, the RB operation state flag is set to “0”. This process updates the D4 bit of the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION) to “0”.
Next, the process proceeds to step S567 to set a standby time at the end of the RB operation. This process is a process of setting a value corresponding to the standby time in the BC register. In the present embodiment, “5” (about 11 ms) is set in the BC register. More specifically, the B register value = "0" (00000000B) and the C register value = "5" (00000101B) are set. Then, in the next step 5680, a 2-byte time waiting process is executed. After waiting for two bytes, the process according to this flowchart ends.

  If the operation status flag (D4 bit of _FL_ACTION) corresponding to the RB is cleared (set to “0”) in step S566, the process returns to step S74 in FIG. 41 after executing the 2-byte time waiting process. Then, when the process proceeds to step S40 again, the process proceeds to the game start set process of step S42. In the game start set processing, the D4 bit (RB) of the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION) is set to "1" by updating the operation state flag in step S88 of FIG. Thereby, the RB operation state flag becomes “0” when the number of games or the number of winnings during the RB operation becomes “2” and satisfies the ending condition of the RB operation, but does not satisfy the ending condition of the 1BB game. At this time (when the D3 bit (1BB) of the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION) is “1”), it is set to “1” again after the “5” interrupt has elapsed. By providing such processing, even if the operation state flag corresponding to RB is cleared in step S566, the operation state flag corresponding to RB can be immediately turned on while the 1BB game is continued. The reason why the RB operation state flag is temporarily set to “0” will be described later.

FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process (I_INTR) by the main control board 60 (main CPU 63). As described above, the main control board 60 performs the interrupt processing shown in FIG. 64 at a period of 2.235 ms in parallel with the main processing of FIG.
First, when the process proceeds to the interrupt process in step S601, in step S602, save process of register values and prohibition process of duplicate interrupt are performed as initial processes. Here, in order to use the register of the main CPU 63 used in the main processing in the interrupt processing, the current register value is saved in the stack area of the RWM 61. Further, the interrupt disable flag is turned on so that the next interrupt processing is not started during the interrupt processing. The reason for this is that, for example, an interrupt processing execution request may be made during the execution of the power-off processing.

In the next step S603, it is determined whether or not a power-off is detected. Here, when the power supply voltage becomes equal to or lower than a predetermined value by a voltage monitoring device (power supply cutoff detection circuit) provided on the main control board 60 (not shown), the power supply is supplied to the D0 bit of the input port 2 in FIG. Since the disconnection detection signal is input, it is detected whether or not the signal has been input.
When the power-off is detected, the process proceeds to a power-off process (IS_POWER_DOWN) in step S619, and when it is determined that the power-off is not detected, the process proceeds to step S604.

In step S604, the interrupt counter value is updated.
In the next step S605, timer measurement is performed. This process is a process for subtracting the time set in the main process. Specifically, the minimum game time (_TM2_GAME) set in step S532 is subtracted, the condition device output time (_TM1_COND_OUT) set in step S536 is subtracted, and the minimum game time (4) is set in step S531. .1 seconds).
Next, the process proceeds to step S606 to perform LED display control (I_LED_OUT; FIG. 65). Here, according to the state of the slot machine 10, the setting value, the stored number, the acquired number, the error display content (error code), and the like are turned on using the 7-segment LED (digits 1 to 5).

  As described above, in the case of the non-recoverable error shown in FIG. 41 and the like, an error display is output by the main processing. However, the display of the setting value during the setting change or the setting check, the stored number, the acquired number, and the recoverable error are: This LED display control is performed every time the interruption process is performed.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S607, in which the input ports 0 to 2 are read. As a result, whether or not the bet switch 40, the start switch 41, the stop switch 42, and the like are operated, the switch signal, and the input signals of various sensors are read, and the data (level data, rising edge) based on the input ports 0 to 2 are read. Data and falling data) are generated and stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 61. In the next step S608, a check process of a built-in random number is performed. In the present embodiment, a flag that is turned on when an error occurs in the built-in random number is provided, and it is determined whether this flag is on.

  Specifically, for example, when an abnormal clock frequency of the random number for the lottery is detected (such as when the random number is updated slowly), the error flag is turned on. More specifically, it is provided with SCLK (oscillation source: 12 MHz) and RCK (oscillation source: 9 MHZ) input to the MPU, and the built-in random number is updated based on RCK. At this time, if “RCK <SCLK / 2” is satisfied, the error flag is turned on.

  Then, the process proceeds to step S609 to determine whether an error has occurred in the built-in random number (whether or not the error flag is ON). If it is determined that no error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S610, and the process proceeds to step S610. If it is determined that an error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S620, and the process proceeds to a non-recoverable error process. The error display content at this time is “E7”.

  In step S610, drive control of the reel 31 is performed. This control is performed in units of the reels 31 (left, middle, and right), and includes a stop, a constant speed, an acceleration, a deceleration, a deceleration start, and a standby according to the operation state. When the drive control of the reel 31 ends, the process proceeds to step S611, and a port output process is performed. In this process, the excitation output of the (reel) motor 32 and the hopper motor 36 and the excitation output of the blocker 45 are performed.

In the next step S612, an input error check process is executed. This process is a process for determining whether or not there is any abnormality in various sensors.
In the next step S613, a control command is transmitted (I_CMD_OUT; FIG. 67). This process is a process of transmitting a control command (a non-transmitted control command stored in the command buffer of the RWM 61) set in the output request set and the control command set 1 to the sub-control board 80, for example.
Specifically, when a control command is set in the command buffer in the output request set and the control command set 1, interrupt processing after that point (if the command buffer is empty, in principle, the next arrival after that point) In this interrupt processing, a control command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in step S613.

  In the next step S614, the data for the external signal stored in the RWM 61 is stored in the register. Then, in the next step S615, an external signal is output (signal transmission to the external central terminal board 100) by writing (setting) data to the output port 5.

In the next step S616, output processing of the test signal and the condition device information (FIG. 69) is performed. This process is a test to determine whether the slot machine 10 is properly designed in accordance with the law by writing (setting) the data to the output ports 9 and 10 based on the data stored in the RWM 61. This is a process of transmitting a test signal to the device.
Next, the process proceeds to step S617, where a random number updating process is performed. In the next step S618, the register value saved in step S602 is restored, and the next interruption is permitted. Specifically, the register data stored at the start of the interrupt processing is restored, and the interrupt prohibition flag is turned off so that the next interrupt processing can be started. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

As shown in the above-described processing, the ON / OFF of the stored number display LED 71, the acquired number display LED 72, the status display LEDs 73 (73a to 73g), and the set value display LED 64 are controlled by the interruption processing every 2.235 ms.
Further, when a control command that has not been transmitted to the sub-control board 80 is stored in the command buffer for each interrupt processing, the transmission processing is performed.

It should be noted that no interrupt processing is performed during the non-recoverable error processing.
The non-recoverable error is a serious error that cannot occur normally, and executes processing based on abnormal data (data update of the RWM 61 based on data from an input port, transmission of a control command to the sub-control board 80) and the like. In order to prevent this, the interrupt itself is prohibited.

In other words, at the time of a non-recoverable error, since the control command is not transmitted from the main control board 60 to the sub-control board 80, there is no point in executing the control command set 1.
Furthermore, when an unrecoverable error occurs, if a command that has not been transmitted is stored in the control command buffer, the command is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80. This is because the control command stored in the buffer may be incorrect.

FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in step S606 in FIG.
First, in step S621, the output ports 3 and 4 are turned off. The output port 3 is an output port corresponding to an LED digit signal, and the output port 4 is an output port corresponding to an LED segment signal. By outputting "00000000B" to these output ports 3 and 4, output of all LEDs is temporarily stopped. Thus, when switching the display of the LEDs, it is possible to prevent different LEDs from being simultaneously lit and seen (covered and displayed) even for a moment (afterimage prevention).

In the next step S622, the LED display request counter (_CT_SEG_DSP) (address “F00F”) is updated. Updating the LED display request counter is a process of shifting the bit that is ON, that is, “1”, right by one digit. The updated value is stored in the address “F00F” of the RWM 61. Then, the process proceeds to step S623.
In step S623, it is determined whether the LED display request counter is “0”. That is, it is determined whether or not the LED display request counter updated in step S622 is “0”. When it is determined to be “0”, the process proceeds to step S624, and when it is determined that the value is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S625.

  In step S624, the LED display request counter is initialized. Here, the initialization of the LED display request counter is set to “00010000B” and stored at the address “F00F” of the RWM 61. Then, the process proceeds to step S625. Therefore, when the LED display request counter is updated from “00000001B” to “00000000B” in step S622, it is determined that the LED display request counter is “0” in step S623, and thus is updated to “00010000B” in step S624. . That is, "00000001B" is updated to "00100000B" in one interrupt process.

In step S625, an LED display request counter and an LED display request flag are acquired. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The address “F00F” of the LED display request counter is stored in the HL register, and the value stored in the HL register is stored in the E register.
(2) Add “1” to the value of the HL register, and store the data (that is, the LED display request flag) stored at the address indicated by the HL register value (F010) after adding “1” in the A register.
(3) “1” is added to the value of the HL register. By this processing, the HL register value becomes “F011” and becomes the address value indicating the error display data of the RWM 61.

Next, in step S626, a segment display confirmation set of the digit to be displayed this time is performed. In this processing, an AND operation is performed on the data (LED display request flag data) stored in the A register and the data (LED display request counter data) stored in the E register, and the operation result is stored in the A register. . As a result, the data of the currently lit LED is obtained.
For example,
LED display request counter value: 00001000B
LED display request flag value: 000011111B
After AND operation: 00001000B
Becomes
Or, for example,
LED display request counter value: 00010000B
LED display request flag value: 000011111B
After AND operation: 00000000B
Becomes

Then, the data stored in the A register is stored in the D register.
In the next step S627, it is determined whether or not there is a display request. In the operation of step S626, it is determined whether or not the A register value is “0”. If it is not “0”, it is determined that there is a display request (Yes), and if it is “0”, there is no display request (No). Is determined. If “Yes” in step S627, the process proceeds to step S628, and if “No”, the process proceeds to step S643.

In step S628, error display data is obtained. As described above, at this point, the value indicated by the HL register value is the address value (F011) indicating the error display data. Therefore, the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the B register. .
In the next step S629, the LED segment table 2 is set. The LED segment table 2 is the data table shown in FIG. 6, and the head address of the data stored in the ROM 62 is "1816 (H)" as shown in FIG. Therefore, this address value is stored in the HL register.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S630 to acquire setting value data. Here, the current setting value stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 61 is read and stored in the A register. Next, the process proceeds to step S631, where it is determined whether there is a setting value display request. In this determination, it is determined whether or not the D4 bit (digit 5) is “1” (“00010000B”) as a result of the AND operation. When it is “1”, that is, when it is determined that there is a setting value display request, the process proceeds to step S642, and when it is determined that there is no setting value display request, the process proceeds to step S632.

In step S632, the stored number display data stored at the address “F00D” of the RWM 61 is acquired and stored in the A register. In the next step S633, the upper digit offset is acquired. This process is a process of dividing the data stored in the A register by “10 (decimal number)”, storing the quotient value in the A register, and storing the surplus value in the C register.
In the next step S634, it is determined whether or not there is a request to display the upper digit of the stored number. This process determines whether the D0 bit of the D register (the value obtained by ANDing the LED display request counter value and the LED display request flag value) is “1”, and when it is “1”, “Yes”. Is determined. When it is determined that there is a display request for the upper digit of the stored number, the process proceeds to step S642, and when it is determined that there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S635.

In step S635, it is determined whether or not there is a request to display the lower digits of the acquired number. In this process, it is determined whether or not the D1 bit of the D register is “1”, and if it is “1”, “Yes” is determined, and the process proceeds to step S641. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no request to display the lower digits of the acquired number, the process proceeds to step S636.
In step S636, acquired number data or pressing order instruction data is acquired. This process is to store the acquired number data (or pressing order instruction data) stored at the address “F00E” in the A register. Here, in FIG. 41, at the timing of step S53, the pressing order instruction data is stored in “F00E”, and at the timing of step S72, the acquired number data is stored.

  In the next step S637, it is determined whether or not an error is displayed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the B register value is “0”, and if it is “0”, “No” is determined. If it is determined in step S637 that the error is not being displayed, the process proceeds to step S639. If it is determined that the error is being displayed, the process proceeds to step S638.

In step S638, LED segment table 1 (see FIG. 6) is set. In this process, “1811 (H)” (FIG. 7), which is the head address of the LED segment table 1, is stored in the HL register.
Next, the flow advances to step S639 to acquire an offset for the upper digit. In this process, an operation of dividing the data stored in the A register by “10 (decimal number)” is executed, the quotient is stored in the A register, and the remainder is stored in the C register.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the maximum payout number in one game is “9”, so that the acquired medal number does not exceed “10”. However, for example, when the maximum payout number is "15" and a calculation of dividing by "10" is executed, the quotient is "1" and the remainder is "5", so "1" is stored in the A register. Then, "5" is stored in the C register.
Furthermore, when the push order instruction data is "102 (decimal number)" at the address "F00E" and the operation of dividing by "10" is executed, the quotient is "10 (decimal number)" and the remainder is "2". Therefore, "0AH" is stored in the A register, and "2H" is stored in the C register.

  In the next step S640, it is determined whether there is a request to display the upper digit of the acquired number display LED 72. In this process, it is determined whether or not the D2 bit of the D register is “1”, and when it is “1”, it is determined that there is a display request. When it is determined that there is a display request, the process proceeds to step S642, and when it is determined that there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S641.

In step S641, an offset for the lower digit is obtained. This process is a process of storing the data stored in the C register in the A register.
Next, the process proceeds to step S642 to acquire segment output data. This process is a process of adding the data stored in the HL register and the data stored in the A register, and storing the data of the address on the ROM 62 indicated by the added data in the D register.
For example,
HL register value = 1816 (H) (before addition)
A register value = 1 (H)
HL register value = 1817 (H) (after addition)
D register value = 00000110 (B): Data for displaying “1”.

When the pressing order instruction data is stored in the acquired number data of “F00E”,
HL register value = 1816 (H) (before addition)
A register value = 0A (H)
HL register value = 1820 (H) (after addition)
D register value = 01001000 (B): Data for displaying “=”.

Next, the flow advances to step S643 to determine whether or not there is a display request for the segment P. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The data stored in the LED display data (_PT_STS_LED) at the address “F012” of the RWM 61 is stored in the A register.
(2) Perform an AND operation on the data stored in the A register and the data stored in the E register. If the calculation result is "0", it is determined that there is no display request. When it is determined that there is a segment P display request, the process proceeds to step S644, and when it is determined that there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S645.

  In step S644, segment P output data is set. This process is to set the D7 bit (bit corresponding to the segment P) of the data stored in the D register to “1”. Next, the process proceeds to step S645 to output LED display data. Specifically, the data stored in the E register is stored in the output port 3, and the data stored in the D register is stored in the output port 4. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, one digit is turned on by one interruption process. That is, for each interruption (every 2.235 ms), the LED to be turned on is switched in the order of digit 5 → digit 4 →... → digit 1 → digit 5 →. Therefore, for example, after the upper digit of the stored number display LED 71, which is digit 1, is turned on, the next light is turned on after "11.175 ms" after 5 interrupts.

Here, the brightness of the LED is determined by a time interval of ms from the time of lighting to the time of next lighting. In the present embodiment, one digit is controlled so as to be lit once every “11.175 ms” as described above, but from the eyes of the player (human), the digits 1 to 4 are almost Since it seems that it is always lit, there is no problem.
On the other hand, in the case of an unrecoverable error, for example, a process of repeating lighting switching between the upper digit and the lower digit is performed every 0.128 ms. As a result, the switching period of the lighting LED at the time of the non-recoverable error becomes shorter than the interruption period, and becomes higher than the LED lighting luminance in the interruption processing.

FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the power-off processing (IS_POWER_DOWN) when the power-off is detected in FIG. 64 and the process proceeds to step S619.
First, in step S651, the outputs of all output ports are turned off. Next, the process proceeds to step S652, and the power-off processing completed flag is stored in the RWM 61. This process is a process of storing data indicating that the normal power-off process has been executed in the RWM 61. Specifically, “01 (H)” is stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 61. As a result, when the normal power-off processing is performed, “01 (H)” is stored as the power-off processing completed flag via step S652. "01 (H)" is not stored in the address.

In the next step S653, checksum data of the RWM 61 is calculated. This processing is to calculate a checksum including a work area (RWM 61) used by the program, and the target program use area includes a program work area, an unused area, a stack area, and the like.
Then, in the next step S654, it is determined whether or not the calculation of the entire range of the checksum has been completed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the calculation of the checksum has been completed, the process proceeds to step S655.

  In step S655, the calculated checksum is stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 61. Here, the data stored in the RWM 61 is 1-byte data (also referred to as complement data) which becomes “0” when all the data in the program use area and the value stored at the predetermined address are added at the time of the checksum of the RWM 61. ). More specifically, all data in the program use area (program work area, unused area, stack area, etc.) of the target RWM 61 is added, and the value of the lower 8 bits at that time is, for example, “00000001” (01H). If there is, the checksum data stored at the predetermined address is "11111111" (FFH).

  When the checksum of the RWM 61 is executed at the start of the program, the checksum data is added to all the data in the program use area of the RWM 61 in the same range as described above. If the calculated checksum data is "0", it is determined that the value is a normal value, and if it is not "0", it is determined that the value is an abnormal value.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S656, where a reset wait state is set. Here, when the voltage reaches a predetermined value, a reset signal is output from the voltage monitoring device (power cut-off detection circuit) provided on the main control board 60, so that a state of waiting for the output of the reset signal is set. Here, when the power supply voltage becomes equal to or lower than the predetermined value, the voltage monitoring device inputs a power-off detection signal to the D0 bit of the input port 2 (FIG. 8), and thereafter, a predetermined time elapses by a circuit including a capacitor and a resistor. After that, the reset signal is inputted to the MPU. At this time, the capacitor and the resistance value are designed so that the time at which the processing at the time of power-off is performed normally is performed.

FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the control command transmission in step S613 of FIG.
First, in step S661, the address of the control command buffer is set. This processing is to store “F113 (H)” which is the head address of the control command buffer (_BF_SUBCMD) in the HL register.
In the next step S662, a read pointer value of the control command is obtained. This process stores the control command read pointer value of the address “F017” in the RWM 61 in the A register.

The “designated address set” in the next step S663 is a process of adding the data stored in the HL register and the data stored in the A register and storing the added data in the HL register.
Further, in the “address set of the control command buffer to be transmitted” in step S664, similarly to step S663, the data stored in the HL register and the data stored in the A register are added. This is a process of storing data in the HL register.
Through the processing in steps S663 and S664, data that is twice the data stored in the A register is added to the data stored in the HL register.

In the next step S665, it is determined whether or not there is a control command. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the E register.
(2) The data stored at the address indicated by the value obtained by adding “1” to the HL register value is stored in the D register.
(3) When the data stored in the E register and the data stored in the D register are “0”, it is determined that there is no control command (No).
When it is determined that the control command is included, the process proceeds to step S666. When it is determined that the control command is not included, the process proceeds to step S670.

In step S666, a control command is output. In this process, the data stored in the E register is output to the output port 7, and the data stored in the D register is output to the output port 8.
In the next step S667, output from the output port 2 is performed. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The value of the input number display LED signal data (_PT_MEDAL_LED) at the address “F01D” is stored in the A register.
(2) Perform an OR operation on the data stored in the A register and “10000000B”, and store the operation result in the A register.
(3) The data stored in the A register is output to the output port 2.
As a result, the D7 bit (sub-control data strobe signal) of the data output to the output port 2 is always "1".

In the next step S668, the transmitted command storage buffer is cleared. In this process, the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value and the data stored at the address indicated by the value obtained by adding “1” to the HL register value are cleared (set to “0”).
Next, the flow advances to step S669 to update the control command read pointer value. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The address of the control command read pointer value (_NB_CMDREAD) at the address “F017” is stored in the HL register.
(2) Add “1” to the HL register value.
(3) It is determined whether or not the HL register value after addition exceeds "31" (decimal number). If it does not exceed "31", the value is stored in the control command read pointer value. On the other hand, when it exceeds "31", "0" is stored in the control command read pointer value.

In the next step S670, output from output port 2 is performed. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The value of the input number display LED signal data (_PT_MEDAL_LED) at the address “F01D” is stored in the A register.
(2) The data stored in the A register is output to the output port 2.
As a result, the D7 bit (sub-control data strobe signal) of the data output to the output port 2 is always “0”.

Therefore, the sub-control data strobe signal becomes "1" at the output of step S667, and the sub-control data strobe signal becomes "0" at the output of step S670.
Next, the flow proceeds to step S671 to output control command clear data. This process is to output “00000000B” to the output ports 7 and 8. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 68 is a time chart showing signal transmission timing in the control command transmission processing (I_CMD_OUT) in FIG.
When the interrupt processing is started, in step S666 of the control command transmission processing, the second control command (sub-control data signals 1 to 8) is output to the output port 7, and the first control command (sub-control data Signals 9 to 16) are output.

When the transmission of the first control command and the transmission of the second control command is started, a sub-control data strobe signal is transmitted in step S667. Here, the time from the start of the transmission of the first control command and the second control command to the start of the transmission of the sub-control data strobe signal (“A” in the figure; steps S666 to S667). Is about “1.75 μS”, for example.
The time during which the sub-control data strobe signal is transmitted (“B” in the figure; from step S667 to step S670) is, for example, about “4.25 μS”. In the figure, “C” (from steps S670 to S671) is, for example, about “1.19 μS”.
Then, after the first control command and the second control command are transmitted in the process of step S666, “00H” which is the control command clear data is output to the output ports 7 and 8 by the process of step S671.

FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the test signal / condition device information output processing in step S616 of FIG.
In step S571, output data of the test signal is set. This process is a process of storing information stored in the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION) in the A register. Then, in the next step S572, a test signal is output. This process is a process of outputting the information stored in the A register to the output port 10. Thereby, information based on the information stored in the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION) is output (transmitted) from the output port 10. Therefore, the signal of the operation state flag can be output to the tester as a test signal.

In the process of FIG. 69, the above-described steps S571 and S572 correspond to the output processing of the information of the operation state flag, and the following steps S573 to S579 correspond to the output processing of the condition device information.
As described above, in the present embodiment, information based on the information stored in the operation state flag is output from the output port 10. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, predetermined information (assuming that a part of the information indicating the operating state is stored in each address) is obtained from the addresses of the plurality of RWMs 61 without the operating state flag. Alternatively, a method may be used in which information corresponding to the operation state flag is created (combined) by arithmetic processing using a register, and the information is written (set) to the output port 10 as a test signal.

In the next step S573, clear data of the condition device information is set. This process is a process of storing information stored in the condition device output time (_TM1_COND_OUT) stored in the RWM 61 in the A register.
As described above, in FIG. 58, when it is determined in step S531 that the minimum game time (about 4.1 seconds) has elapsed, in step S536, the value of “25” is added to the condition device output time (_TM1_COND_OUT). It is memorized. Then, this value is decremented by “1” at every interruption (specifically, at the time of the timer measurement process of step S605 in FIG. 64). Therefore, after the value of “25” is stored, it becomes “0” after the interruption of “25”.

  In the next step S574, it is determined whether or not it is time to output the condition device information. This processing determines whether the value stored in the A register is “0” (zero flag = 1), determines “No” when “0”, and “Yes” when not “0”. Judge. When it is determined that the condition device information is being output, the process proceeds to step S575, and when it is determined that the condition device information is not being output, the process proceeds to step S579.

  In step S575, the address of the RWM 61 in the accessory condition device information is set. Specifically, the address of the accessory condition device information (_NB_CNDINF_B), that is, “F04D (H)” is stored in the HL register. Thus, the H register value = “F0 (H)” and the L register value = “4D (H)”. In the next step S576, it is determined whether or not it is time to output the accessory condition device information. This processing is an operation of subtracting “12.5 (25/2)” from the value stored in the A register (the condition device output time (_TM1_COND_OUT) is stored in the A register in step S573). Is performed, and when it is determined that the calculation result is larger than “0” (carry flag # 1), the processing is to determine “Yes”. That is, it is determined whether or not half of the time has elapsed from the initial value “24” of the condition device output time. If it is determined that it is the time of outputting the accessory condition device information, the process proceeds to step S578. If it is determined that the time is not the output of the accessory condition device information, the process proceeds to step S577.

  In step S577, the address of the RWM 61 of the winning and replay condition device information is set. In this process, “1” is subtracted from the HL register value in order to store the address of the winning and replay condition device information (_NB_CNDINF_N), that is, “F04C (H)” in the HL register. Accordingly, the HL register value = “F04C (H)” (the H register value = “F0 (H)” and the L register value = “4C (H)”).

Next, the process proceeds to step S578 to acquire condition device information. This process is a process of storing the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register. Therefore, when the HL register value = “F04C (H)”, the value of the winning and replay condition device information (_NB_CNDINF_N) is stored. The value of the device information (_NB_CNDINF_B) is stored.
Next, the process proceeds to step S579, where the information stored in the A register is output to the output port 9. As a result, the condition device information is output (transmitted) from the output port 9. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

In the above-described test signal / condition device information output processing, the information of the operation state flag can be output (transmitted) to the tester for each interrupt processing. For example, by receiving the signal on the tester side, it is possible to determine whether the ON / OFF of the operation state flag of the slot machine 10 is correctly performed.
If the value of the condition device output time (_TM1_COND_OUT) is “0” in step S574, “No” is determined, and the process proceeds to step S579. In this case, since the A register value is “0”, “0” (00000000B) is output as the condition device information.

When the value of the condition device output time (_TM1_COND_OUT) is not "0" (when it is "1" to "24"), condition device information is output for each interrupt process.
As the initial value of the condition device output time, “25” is set in step S536 of FIG. 58, but after “1” is subtracted in step S605 of FIG. 64, the test signal / condition device information of step S616 Proceed to output processing. Therefore, when “25” is set in step S536 and the process first proceeds to step S574 in FIG. 69, the condition device output time value is “24”.

  Further, in the case of outputting the condition device information, if the condition device output time (_TM1_COND_OUT) is "13" to "24" (also referred to as a first period) in step S576, step S577 is not executed. Therefore, the condition device information to be output is the accessory condition device information (_NB_CNDINF_B). On the other hand, if the condition device output time (_TM1_COND_OUT) is “1” to “12” (also referred to as the second period) in the determination of step S576, the process of step S577 is executed, and the output condition The device information is winning and replay information device information (_NB_CNDINF_N).

Furthermore, when the value of the condition device output time (_TM1_COND_OUT) is “0” for each interrupt process, the value of the condition device information is “0”, and the value of the condition device output time (_TM1_COND_OUT) is other than “0”. , A value other than “0” is output as the condition device information.
Then, the condition device information is updated in step S533 in FIG. Therefore, the condition device information is updated after the lapse of the minimum game time (4.1 seconds) (when “Yes” in step S531). Thereby, when the received condition device information other than “0” changes, the tester side receives the condition device information other than “0”, and then receives the next change other than “0”. By measuring the time until the condition device information is received, it can be determined whether or not the minimum game time (4.1 seconds) is secured. Therefore, the minimum game time can be measured on the test machine side only by outputting the condition device information without separately providing information on the minimum game time.

Next, the output of the test signal (operation state flag) in step S572 and the output of the condition device information in step S579 in FIG. 69 will be described.
FIG. 70 is a diagram illustrating the on / off state of the D3 bit (1BB) and the D4 bit (RB) in the information of the operation state flag output as the test signal in step S572.

The example of FIG. 70 shows an example in which a 1BB game is being played, the D3 bit (1BB) of the operation state flag is on, and the D4 bit (RB) repeats on / off.
When the 1BB game is started, the D3 (1BB) and D4 (RB) bits of the operation state flag become "1", so that the D3 bit (1BB) and the D4 bit (RB) are used as test signals by interrupt processing. Is turned on ("1").

  Then, after the RB operation, if it is determined that the two games are completed and the RB operation end condition is satisfied (“Yes” in step S565 of FIG. 63), the RB operation state flag is set to “0” in the same step S566. Then, in the next steps S567 and S568, a standby process is performed for the number of interrupts “5” (about 11 ms). Thereafter, the flow returns to step S74 in FIG. Then, the process again proceeds to the game start set process of step S42, and if the end condition of the 1BB game is not satisfied in the update of the operation state flag in step S88 of FIG. 42, the D4 bit (RB) of the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION) is set. It is set to "1".

With this, in the 1BB game, when the end condition of the 1BB game is not satisfied, the RB operation state flag is set to “1” during two games, so that the test signal of the RB operation is continuously output, and after the two games are completed. , "5" during the interrupt (about 11 ms), and "1" again. As a result, a signal waveform shown in FIG. 70 is obtained.
Here, the main processing is stopped between steps S567 and S568 in FIG. That is, even if the operation switch is operated, the operation is not accepted. After the operation state flag of the RB changes from “1” to “0”, for example, when a 2-byte waiting process for several seconds is executed, the player cannot operate the operation switch, that is, It is considered that the processing is stopped (frozen) can be sensed physically.

On the other hand, if the interval is set between “5” interruptions (approximately 11 ms) as in the present embodiment, even if the main processing is stopped, the player will feel uncomfortable (break the rhythm of the player playing the game). ) Is considered to be rare. If the main processing is stopped for about 11 ms, it is considered that the player hardly feels that the main processing is stopped.
On the other hand, if the time during which the operation state flag of the RB is “0” is too short, when the test signal is output to the tester side, it is correctly determined that the operation state flag of the RB is “0”. Detection may not be possible. In consideration of these points, in the present embodiment, the interval is set between “5” interrupts (about 11 ms).

As a result, the above-mentioned time is used as a time during which the player does not feel that the main processing (game progress) has stopped and the tester can correctly detect that the RB operation state flag is “0” as the test signal. It was set.
In the present embodiment, the interval is set between “5” interrupts (about 11 ms). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, between “2” interrupts (about 4.5 ms) and “25” interrupts (about 56 ms). If so, it is considered that the same effect as above can be exerted.

FIG. 71 is a diagram showing an output example of the condition device information in step S579 of FIG.
In the example of FIG. 71, within the 1BB, the condition device number “23” (small win A1) is won in the “N” game item (winning and replay), and in the next “N + 1” game item (winning and replay). An output example of the condition device information when the condition device number “1” (replay A) is won is shown. It is assumed that 1BB does not win in the "N" game.
First, when it is within 1BB, the D0 bit of the accessory condition device information (_NB_CNDINF_B) is “1”. Therefore, the accessory condition device information (_NB_CNDINF_B) is “10000001B”.
When the condition device number “23” is won in the “N” game, the D0 to D5 bits of the winning and replay condition device information (_NB_CNDINF_N) are “010111” (= “23”). And the replay condition device information (_NB_CNDINF_N) is “010101111B”.

  In the “N” game, while the condition device output time value is “24” to “13”, “Yes” is determined in step S576 of FIG. 69, and the accessory condition device information set in step S575 is output. I do. Next, while the condition device output time value is “12” to “1”, “No” is determined in step S576 in FIG. 69, and the winning and replay condition device information set in step S577 is output. Next, when the condition device output time value becomes “0”, “No” is obtained in step S574 of FIG. 69, so that the condition device information (“00000000B”) cleared in step S573 is output.

  Then, the next game is started, the lottery is performed at the (N + 1) -th game, and if the (prize and replay) condition device number “1” is won, the condition device output time values are “24” to “13”. , "10000001B" is output as in the case of the "N" game item, and "01000001B" is output while the condition device output time value is "12" to "1". As a result, a signal waveform shown in FIG. 71 is obtained.

  Here, from the time when the output of the character condition device information of the “N” game is started (when the condition device output time value is “24”), the output of the character condition device information of the “N + 1” game is started. Until the game is started (when the condition device output time value is “24”), when the game is consumed in the shortest time, the minimum game time is 4.1 seconds (“1836” interrupt). . Therefore, as described above, the testing machine measures the time from when the output of the accessory condition device information is started to when the output of the accessory condition device information is started in the next game. If one second has elapsed, it can be determined that the slot machine 10 guarantees the minimum game time.

<Second embodiment>
In the first embodiment, in FIG. 42, the command transmission table 1 is set in step S95, and the control command continuous setting process (M_CMD_LIST; FIG. 45) is executed in the next step S96.
Similarly, in FIG. 41, the command transmission table 2 is set in step S58, and the control command continuous setting process is executed in the next step S59.
The control commands continuously transmitted here are, for example, when the command transmission table 1 is set, as shown in FIG. 43, (1) operating state, (2) 1BB acquisition number (lower), (3) 1BB acquired number (upper rank), (4) main game state, (5) precursor game number / AT game number, (6) RT state. When the command transmission table 2 is set, as shown in FIG. 44, (1) the pressing order instruction number, (2) the effect group number, and (3) the accessory condition apparatus number.
On the other hand, in the second embodiment, a process of continuously setting a plurality of commands is executed by a method other than the command transmission table set and the control command continuous set.

FIG. 72 is a view for explaining the second embodiment, in which (A) shows a command to be set continuously, and (B) and (C) show flowcharts corresponding to the second embodiment. .
As shown in FIG. 72 (A), it is assumed that three consecutively set commands are an accessory condition device number, an effect group number, and a pressing order instruction number. That is, three control commands transmitted using the command transmission table 2. However, it is not limited to this.
In the second embodiment, the address of the RWM 61 of the control command transmitted (set) continuously is set to a serial number. In the example of FIG. 72A, data of the accessory condition device number, the effect group number, and the pressing order instruction number are stored at addresses “F0B6” to “F0B8” of the RWM 61, respectively.
Also, as shown in FIG. 3A, the first control commands of the data of the accessory condition device number, the effect group number, and the pressing order instruction number are 39 (H), 3A (H), and 3B, respectively. (H).

  Next, as shown in (B) in the figure, instead of the command transmission table set and the control command continuous set described above, a command output request set in step S701, a control command transmission number set in step S702, and a continuous A command set (M_CONCMDS_SET; FIG. 72 (C)) is performed.

First, in the command output request set in step S701, the following processing is executed.
(1) The data of the first control command among the control commands for transmitting the accessory condition device number is stored in the D register. In this example, as shown in FIG.
D register value = 39 (H)
Becomes
(2) In the E register, the lower address of the RWM 61 in which the accessory condition device number is stored in order to generate the second control command among the control commands for transmitting the accessory condition device number.
Since the address of the RWM 61 in which the accessory condition device number is stored is “F0B6” as shown in FIG.
E register value = B6 (H)
Becomes

In the next step S702, the number of control command transmissions is set. In this example, since three commands are transmitted, the number of control command transmissions is “3”. This value is stored in the B register. Therefore,
B register value = 3 (H)
Becomes
In the next step S703, the continuous command set (M_CONCMDS_SET) shown in FIG. 72C is executed.
First, since the control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET) in step S711 is the same as that in FIG. 46, the description is omitted. By executing the control command set 1, the control command to be transmitted is stored in the control command buffer.

In the next step S712, an output request for the next control command is set. Here, the D register value and the E register value are each incremented by “1”. In the example above,
D register value = 3A (H)
E register value = B7 (H)
Becomes
Next, the process proceeds to step S713 to determine whether the control command set has been completed. Here, the B register value is decremented by "1", and when the value after decrement is "0", it is determined that the control command set has been terminated, and the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
On the other hand, if the value after the decrement is not “0”, it is determined that the control command set has not been completed, and the process returns to step S711.

In addition, as described above,
D register value = 3A (H)
E register value = B7 (H)
Then, when the process returns to step S711, the control command of the effect group number is transmitted. Next, when the process proceeds to step S712, the D register value and the E register value are each further incremented by “1”.
D register value = 3B (H)
E register value = B8 (H)
Becomes Thus, the control command of the pressing order instruction number is transmitted by the control command set 1 in step S711.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the addresses of the control commands to be transmitted are serially provided in the transmission order (the RWMs 61 are continuously arranged), so that the control commands as shown in FIG. 45 (first embodiment) are provided. No continuous set is required.
However, when the command transmission tables 1 and 2 are provided and the control command continuous setting process is provided as in the first embodiment, it is not necessary to provide the addresses of the RWMs 61 in the order in which the control commands are transmitted. Therefore, the restrictions on the address arrangement (order) of the RWM 61 are alleviated in the first embodiment. On the other hand, by configuring as in the second embodiment, the command transmission tables 1 and 2 as in the first embodiment become unnecessary.

In the second embodiment, control commands are transmitted in the order of addresses “F0B6”, “F0B7”, and “F0B8”. On the other hand, it is also possible to transmit control commands in the order of addresses “F0B8”, “F0B7”, and “F0B6”.
In this case, in the command output request set in step S701,
D register value = 3B (H)
E register value = B8 (H)
And
Further, when the process proceeds to step S712, the D register value and the E register value are each decremented by “1”, and
D register value = 3A (H)
E register value = B7 (H)
And Even if it is set in this way, it becomes the same as above. However, the transmission order of the control commands is: push order instruction number → effect group number → accessory condition device number.
Further, the six control commands shown in the command transmission table 1 of the first embodiment can be transmitted by the method of the second embodiment.

<Third embodiment>
In the first embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 55 and 57, the symbol stop signal table 2 (FIG. 57) is set at the time of winning 1BB or at the time of not winning the condition device inside 1BB.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. When a specific winning and replay condition device is won in the 1BB, the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB is stopped on the activated line in preference to the symbol combination corresponding to the winning condition device. In such a case, the symbol stop signal table 2 may be set.
For example, in the first embodiment, since the strong chance of the condition device number “50” is “PB = 1”, the strong chance is stopped regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 42 and the winning of 1BB is carried over. Even if it is, 1BB cannot be won. For this reason, in the present embodiment, when the condition device number “50” is won, the small stop aim of the symbol stop signal table 1 is transmitted as the symbol stop signal regardless of whether or not it is inside 1BB.

On the other hand, it is assumed that a chance of “PB ≠ 1” is provided. Then, when the player wins the chance during the 1BB, the symbol stop signal table 2 is set to enable the winning 1BB to win, and a symbol stop signal for aiming at "black BAR" is set. May be sent.
For example, it is assumed that the combination of the patterns of the chance eyes is “watermelon A / watermelon B” − “blank” − “black BAR”. Thus, the chance becomes “PB ≠ 1”.
Then, considering that it is better to stop the eye of the chance won in the game or to win the 1BB which has won the winning, it is better to win the 1BB. Conceivable. Therefore, in this case, a symbol stop signal for performing “black BAR” aiming is transmitted.

Further, it is assumed that a small combination of “PB ≠ 1” and a small combination of one or two (less than three) payouts (hereinafter referred to as “first specified small combination”) is provided. Then, when the first specific small role is won in the 1BB, the player wins 1BB in the game rather than winning the first specific small role in the game to obtain one or two profits. It is also possible to think that it is better to start the 1BB game.
For this reason, when the first specific small combination is won in the 1BB, the symbol stop signal table 2 is set, and a symbol stop signal for aiming at "black BAR" is transmitted.

Further, in the case of providing a second special small role of "PB # 1" and having a payout number of 3 (the same number as the number of inserted medals), the second specific small win is won inside 1BB. In such a case, it may be considered that it is more advantageous to win the second specific small role in the game and obtain three profits. For example, when four or more small wins are won in the next game, there is a possibility that the difference number can be made positive in the next game. In this case, a symbol stop signal for aiming at the small combination is transmitted.
On the other hand, if it is considered that it is better to give priority to the winning of 1BB over winning of the second specified small role, giving priority to winning the 1BB which has been won in the game, and aiming for “black BAR” Is transmitted to perform the symbol stop.

  In addition, when a small number of payouts of four or more “PB ≠ 1” is won (hereinafter, referred to as a third specific small role), the player who wins the third specific small role in the game has The difference in the number of games is positive. Therefore, in this case, the symbol stop signal table 1 is set and a symbol stop signal for aiming at the small combination is transmitted.

As mentioned above, although one Embodiment of this invention was described, this invention is not limited to the said Embodiment, For example, the following various modifications are possible.
(1) The display of the acquisition number display LED 72 during the non-AT (after the start switch 41 is operated) may be turned off in addition to “00”. Alternatively, it may be “* 0” (“*” means turn off). In order to turn off at least one digit of the acquisition number display LED 72, the LED display request flag may be set to “0”, or the LED segment table may have data of the turned off state.

(2) The upper digit display of the pressing order instruction information is not limited to “=”. For example, it may be composed of specific alphabetic characters that are not used for error display, specifically, “J”, “L”, and the like.
The display of the pressing order instruction information may be displayed by one digit. However, when displayed as a single-digit number, it is difficult to distinguish between the pressing order instruction information and the acquired number. However, if the pressing order instruction information is displayed only in the upper digit (digit 3) (the lower digit digit 4 is turned off), it can be substantially different from the display of the acquired number.

(3) It is also possible to display the condition device number itself as the display of the pressing order instruction information. For example, when the condition device number “25” (push order bell) is won, “25” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 72.
(4) In the present embodiment, at step S220 in FIG. 52, “100 (decimal number)” is added to the push order instruction number to generate push order instruction data. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the push order instruction number may be set to “101” to “109” (decimal) from the beginning, and may be set so that “100” need not be added.

(5) In the present embodiment, as the program to be transmitted to the tester, the symbol stop signal setting process (S_IF2_SET) in FIG. 55 and the output of the test signal / condition device information in FIG. Normally, all programs including these programs are stored in the program area of the ROM 62 in FIG. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a program irrelevant to a game, such as a program transmitted to a testing machine, can be stored in the second program area. As a result, the storage capacity of the first program area in which the main processing (M_MAIN) in FIG. 41 is stored can be given a margin.
In particular, in the case of a conventional machine in which the AT is managed by the sub-control board 80, the program relating to the AT could be stored in the ROM 82 of the sub-control board 80.
In a slot machine that does not execute the AT, for example, a conventional slot machine such as a so-called normal A type, a sufficient capacity for storing a program related to transmission of a test signal in the first program area can be secured.

However, in the case of the type in which the AT is managed on the main control board 60 side as in the present embodiment, there is a possibility that the storage capacity of the first program area may not be sufficient. Therefore, a program related to transmission of a test signal, which is a program unrelated to a game, may be stored in the second program area.
Further, the second program area stores a program relating to error detection irrelevant to the progress of the game, so that the storage capacity of the first program is given more room.

  (6) Furthermore, the command transmission tables 1 and 2 shown in the first embodiment are originally programs for transmitting commands, but as shown in FIGS. 43 (B) and 44 (B), It is stored as data. For this reason, the command transmission tables 1 and 2 can be stored not only in the program area of the ROM 62 but also in the data area. By doing so, it is possible to store the command transmission table in the data area when the program capacity is full but the data capacity is surplus.

(7) In the main process of FIG. 41, the interrupt is prohibited in step S55 before the symbol stop signal setting process in step S56, and after the symbol stop signal setting process is completed, the interrupt is permitted in step S57. As described above, in addition to providing interrupt prohibition / permission in the main process, it is also possible to provide interrupt prohibition / permission during the symbol stop signal setting process.
Specifically, the following patterns are given as patterns other than those shown in FIGS.
a) The interrupt is prohibited in step S55 of FIG. In FIG. 55, the interruption permission is executed at the end of the symbol stop signal setting process (after step S252). Thereby, step S57 in FIG. 41 becomes unnecessary.
b) Step S55 in FIG. 41 is not executed. In FIG. 55, before step S241, an interrupt prohibition process is executed. Then, after the symbol stop signal setting process is completed, the process returns to the main process, and the interruption is permitted in step S56.
c) In the main processing, neither the interruption prohibition in step S55 nor the interruption permission in step S57 is executed. On the other hand, in FIG. 55, before step S241, an interrupt prohibition process is executed. Further, after step S252, interruption permission is executed. Then, the process returns to the main processing.

  (8) The interrupt cycle is set to 2.235 ms, but is not limited to this value. For example, various times, such as 1 ms, may be mentioned. When the lighting time of a digit is set to one interruption time as in the present embodiment, the lighting time of one digit depends on the interruption time. Furthermore, since the 2-byte time waiting process uses an interrupt counter, the waiting time (the value stored in the BC register) also changes depending on how long the interrupt cycle is set.

(9) In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of games when the RB is activated is set to “2”, and the upper limit of the number of winnings when the RB is activated is set to “2”. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In accordance with the current rules, the upper limit of the number of games when the RB is activated is “12” or less, and the upper limit of the number of winnings when the RB is activated is “8” or less. Good.
(10) In the above embodiment, at the start of the game, the effect group number is uniformly selected and transmitted to the sub-control board 80. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selection of the effect group number and the transmission to the sub control board 80 may be performed during the non-AT. On the other hand, during the AT, the selected condition device number may be directly transmitted to the sub-control board 80 without selecting the effect group number or the like. In the AT, the correct answering order is reported, so even if the condition device number is directly transmitted to the sub-control board 80, there is no concern that the information is incorrectly acquired and the correct answering order is known.
It should be noted that, as in the present embodiment, if the effect group number is always selected and transmitted to the sub-control board 80 regardless of the non-AT / AT, it is not necessary to determine the non-AT / AT for each game. Thus, the processing load on control is reduced.

  (11) In the above embodiment, the replay lottery is not performed in the RT5 (1BB game), but it is of course possible to perform the replay lottery in the RT5 (1BB game). For example, it is possible to provide a replay that can be aligned with “7” or “BAR” according to the pressing order and the keying, and to notify the pressing order and the keying when the replay is won. No. Then, after showing "7" or "BAR" match to the player, AT winning or addition of the number of AT games is performed.

(12) In the present embodiment, since only one kind of 1BB (“black BAR” arrangement) is provided as a special combination, only the symbol stop signal table 2 is provided, and a symbol stop signal is provided in a game in which 1BB can win. Table 2 was set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and another 1BB or another special role may be provided. In that case, a symbol stop signal table unique to the special role is provided, and a game in which the special role can be won. Then, a symbol stop signal table corresponding to the special combination is set.
For example, it is assumed that a special role composed of a combination of symbols "red 7"-"red 7"-"red 7" is provided as another special role. In this case, in a game in which the special combination can be won, setting the symbol stop signal table 3 (targeting red 7) can be mentioned. The data of the symbol stop signal table 3 (targeting red 7)
"DEFB 0, 17, 13, 7"
Becomes

(13) In the flowchart shown in the present embodiment, the order of processing is not limited to the order shown in the figure, and if the order of processing can be changed, the order of processing can be changed. .
(14) In the present embodiment, the slot machine 10 has been described as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention is also applicable to a ball-and-ball game machine, an enclosed game machine, and the like.
(15) The present embodiment and the above-described various modifications are not limited to being implemented alone, and can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Appendix>
The inventions (initial inventions) described in the original specification and the like of the present application include, for example, the following initial inventions 1 to 11, in order to solve the problems to be solved by the original invention and the problems according to the original invention, respectively. Means and effects of the first invention are as follows. However, the initial invention does not mean to be limited to the following initial inventions 1 to 11.
The initial invention according to the claims of the present application corresponds to the following initial invention 11.

1. Initial invention 1
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 1 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine that manages an AT with main control means.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a slot machine that manages an AT (notification game) with a main control unit (main control board) and a slot machine that manages an AT with a sub control unit (sub control board) are known.
Here, in the former case, it is necessary to generate a control command such as whether the current state is AT or not, and transmit the control command to the sub-control means (for example, see JP-A-2014-150881). .
However, in the above-described conventional technology, the notification of the pressing order during the AT is performed exclusively by the sub-control means, so that without the sub-control means, it is impossible to function as a gaming machine. is there.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to enable the main control means to function as a gaming machine.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 1 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The first solution is
Main control means (main control board 60) for controlling the progress of the game,
A display device (acquired number display LED 72) controlled by the main control means,
There are a plurality of types of main game states (main game state 0 to main game state 7) controlled by the main control means,
The main control means includes:
Lottery means (condition device lottery means 63b);
Storage means (address “F08F” (_NB_GAM_STS) of the RWM 61) capable of storing a main game state;
The main control unit determines that the main game state stored in the storage unit is a specific main game state (during an AT such as the main game state 2 or 3), and that the lottery result of the lottery unit is a predetermined number. In a game in which a lottery result is obtained (for example, a pressing order bell win of the condition device numbers “23” to “40”), information (pressing order instruction information) of an operation mode (correct answering order) of the stop switch that is advantageous to the player is provided. Is displayed on the display device.
Further, the second solving means is the first solving means,
The main control means includes:
When the main game state stored in the storage means is the specific main game state, and the lottery result of the lottery means is the predetermined lottery result, a player is determined based on the lottery result. A predetermined process for selecting an operation mode of the stop switch that is advantageous to the user (selection of a pressing order instruction number (steps S215 to S218 in FIG. 52)) is executed,
The main game state stored in the storage means is another specific main game state (during non-AT such as main game state 0 or 1) different from the specific main game state, and the lottery means When the lottery result is the predetermined lottery result ("No" in step S214 in FIG. 52), the predetermined process is not executed.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 1 According to the initial invention, the main control means displays information on the operation mode of the stop switch which is advantageous to the player when the game is in a specific main game state. Thus, it can function as a gaming machine.

2. Initial invention 2
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 2 Same as Initial Invention 1.
(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 2 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The first solution is
Main control means (main control board 60) for controlling the progress of the game,
A display device (acquired number display LED 72) controlled by the main control means,
The main control means includes:
Lottery means (condition device lottery means 63b);
An operation mode determination table (push order instruction number table) in which a lottery result number of the lottery means is stored in association with information on the operation mode of the stop switch;
In the game (main gaming state 3, AT) displaying information on the operation mode of the stop switch, the main control means determines the operation mode of the stop switch from the operation mode determination table using the lottery result number of the lottery means as an offset value. Information (push order instruction number) is obtained (steps S215 to S218 in FIG. 52), and based on the obtained information, information on the operation mode of the stop switch is displayed on the display device (steps S220 and S221 in FIG. 52). (Step S645 in FIG. 65)
It is characterized by the following.

Further, the second solving means is the first solving means,
The display device comprises an upper digit (digit 3) and a lower digit (digit 4),
The main control means executes a predetermined operation (a process of adding “100 (decimal number)”) to the information obtained from the operation mode determination table in a game that displays information on the operation mode of the stop switch. Accordingly, information to be displayed in the upper digit (“=”) of the display device and information to be displayed in the lower digit (“1” to “9”) are defined.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 2 According to the initial invention, the main control means displays information on the operation mode of the stop switch which is advantageous to the player when the game is in a specific main game state. The gaming machine can be made to function without reporting the operation mode of the stop switch.
Further, acquisition and display of information on the operation mode of the stop switch can be executed with a small storage capacity.

3. Initial invention 3
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 3 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine that manages an AT with main control means.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a slot machine that manages an AT (notification game) with a main control unit (main control board) and a slot machine that manages an AT with a sub control unit (sub control board) are known.
Here, in the former case, it is necessary to generate a control command such as whether the current state is AT or not, and transmit the control command to the sub-control means (for example, see JP-A-2014-150881). .
However, in the above-described conventional technique, the storage capacity of the main control unit is limited, and thus, when transmitting a control command from the main control unit to the sub-control unit, efficient information processing is required.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to efficiently transmit a control command to the sub-control means with a small storage capacity in the main control means.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 3 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention was
Main control means (main control board 60) for controlling the progress of the game,
A display device (acquired number display LED 72) controlled by the main control means;
Sub-control means (sub-control board 80) capable of controlling effects based on information transmitted from the main control means,
The main control means includes:
Lottery means (condition device lottery means 63b);
An operation mode determination table (push order instruction number table) in which a lottery result number of the lottery means is stored in association with information on the operation mode of the stop switch;
The main control means includes:
In a game in which information on the operation mode of the stop switch is displayed on the display device, information on the operation mode of the stop switch (push order instruction number) is acquired from the operation mode determination table using the lottery result number of the lottery means as an offset value. (FIG. 52), based on the acquired information, transmits information on the operation mode of the stop switch to the sub-control unit (steps S58 and S59 in FIG. 41),
In a game in which the information on the operation mode of the stop switch is not displayed on the display device, information on a predetermined operation mode of the stop switch (“0”) is transmitted to the sub-control unit.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 3 According to the initial invention, it is possible to acquire the information on the operation mode of the stop switch with a small storage capacity and transmit the information to the sub-control means. Further, even in a game in which the information on the operation mode of the stop switch is not displayed, the processing can be simplified by transmitting the predetermined information on the operation mode of the stop switch.

4. Initial invention 4
(A) Problems to be solved by Initial invention 4 Same as Initial invention 3.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 4
Main control means (main control board 60) for controlling the progress of the game,
Sub-control means (sub-control board 80) capable of controlling effects based on information transmitted from the main control means,
The main control means includes:
Lottery means (condition device lottery means 63b);
An effect information determination table (effect group number table) in which the effect result information of the lottery means and effect information are stored in association with each other;
The effect information is information that can output an effect corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery means, and is information that cannot specify the lottery result of the lottery means,
The main control means enables the effect information to be determined from the effect information determination table using the lottery result number of the lottery means as an offset value (FIG. 54), and transmits the determined effect information to the sub-control means (FIG. 41). Step S59),
The sub-control means controls the output of the effect based on the received effect information.

(C) Effects of Initial Invention 4 According to the initial invention, the effect information can be determined with a small storage capacity, and the information can be transmitted to the sub-control means. Furthermore, since the lottery result of the lottery means cannot be specified from the effect information transmitted to the sub-control means, it is possible to prevent a goto action.

5. Initial invention 5
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 5 Same as Initial Invention 3.
(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 5 at the beginning (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
The original invention was
Main control means (main control board 60) for controlling the progress of the game,
Sub-control means (sub-control board 80) capable of controlling effects based on information transmitted from the main control means;
A display device (acquired number display LED 72) controlled by the main control means,
The main control means includes:
Lottery means (condition device lottery means 63b);
An operation mode determination table (push order instruction number table) storing the lottery result number of the lottery means and information on the operation mode of the stop switch in association with each other;
An effect information determination table (effect group number table) in which the effect result information of the lottery means and effect information are stored in association with each other;
The effect information is information that can output an effect corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery means, and is information that cannot specify the lottery result of the lottery means,
The main control means enables the effect information to be determined from the effect information determination table using the lottery result number of the lottery means as an offset value (FIG. 54), and transmits the determined effect information to the sub-control means (FIG. 41). Step S59),
The sub-control means controls the output of the effect based on the received effect information,
The main control means obtains information on the operation mode of the stop switch from the operation mode determination table based on the lottery result number of the lottery means in a game displaying the information on the operation mode of the stop switch (FIG. 52). Based on the acquired information, information on the operation mode of the stop switch is displayed on the display device (FIG. 65).
It is characterized by the following.

(C) Effects of Initial Invention 5 According to the initial invention, the effect information can be determined with a small storage capacity, and the information can be transmitted to the sub-control means. Furthermore, since the lottery result of the lottery means cannot be specified from the effect information transmitted to the sub-control means, it is possible to prevent a goto action.
Further, the information on the operation mode of the stop switch can be acquired with a small storage capacity, and the information can be displayed.
Further, since the information on the operation mode of the stop switch is displayed by the main control means, the gaming machine can function without the notification of the operation mode of the stop switch by the sub-control means.

6. Initial invention 6
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 6 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine in which the main control means manages the AT.
Conventionally, a slot machine that manages an AT (notification game) by a main control unit (sub control board) and a slot machine that manages an AT by a sub control unit (sub control board) are known.
Here, in the former case, it is necessary to generate a control command as to whether or not the current state is AT, and transmit the control command to the sub-control means (for example, see JP-A-2014-150881).
However, in the above-described conventional technology, since the storage capacity of the program of the main control means is limited, efficient information processing has been demanded.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to improve the storage capacity of the main control means.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 6 at the beginning (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention was
Main control means (main control board 60) for controlling the progress of the game,
Sub-control means (sub-control board 80) capable of controlling effects based on information transmitted from the main control means,
The main control means includes:
A first storage unit (RWM61) capable of updating information according to the progress of the game,
Second storage means (ROM 62, command transmission table 1, command transmission table 2) storing the number of commands to be transmitted to the sub-control means and data for generating a command to be transmitted to the sub-control means;
The main control means, when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
1) A value indicating a predetermined address of the second storage means (for example, “1D1F” in the case of the command transmission table 1) is stored in a register R1 (HL register),
2) storing the number of commands to be transmitted (for example, "6" in the case of the command transmission table 1) in a register R2 (A register);
The following processes 3) to 5) are repeated until the value stored in the register R2 reaches a specific value. 3) Data for generating a command by adding a predetermined value ("1") to the register R1. 4) A command is generated from the read data (for example, in the command transmission table 1, the command indicating the operation state is “3215 (H)”). Write the command to a command buffer ("F113" to "F153") for transmitting the command to the sub control means. 5) Subtract "1" from the value stored in the register R2.

(C) Effects of Initial Invention 6 According to the initial invention, the storage capacity of the main control means can be made more efficient.

7. Initial Invention 7
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 7 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine that connects a gaming machine to a testing machine and enables a test signal to be transmitted from the gaming machine to the testing machine.
2. Description of the Related Art In a conventional gaming machine, there has been known a gaming machine in which a main control unit and a sub-control unit are provided, and the sub-control unit transmits a test signal relating to a stop execution position signal to the test machine (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-2014). -100410 publication).
However, in the prior art, since the test signal is transmitted from the sub-control means, there has been a question whether the accuracy (transparency) of the ball-out test can be sufficiently ensured.
The problem to be solved by the invention at the beginning is to enable transmission of a test signal that can sufficiently ensure the accuracy (transparency) of the ball-out test.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 7 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The first solution is
A main control means (main control board 60) for controlling the progress of the game,
A gaming machine which executes a process for outputting a test signal by the main control means when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
Lottery means (condition device lottery means 63b);
Storage means (ROM 62 storing a pressing order instruction number table), which is information corresponding to a lottery result of the lottery means and stores information on an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
The lottery result of the lottery means includes a lottery result having an advantageous pressing order of the stop switch (for example, winning and replay condition device numbers “23” to “40”) and an advantageous pushing order of the stop switch. No lottery results (eg, winning and replay condition device numbers “1”, “15”, “48”, etc.)
The main control means includes:
The lottery result by the lottery means becomes a predetermined lottery result (for example, winning and replay condition device number “15”) among the lottery results having no advantageous pressing order of the stop switch, and a special game (1BB game) Based on the information stored in the storage means, in a game that has not been won as the special role (1BB) for shifting to (1BB), the number of missed winning combinations is minimized. Information (“0, 3, 12, 8”) including the operation timing is selected, and a process (step S56 in FIG. 41) for outputting the information as a test signal is executed.
In a game in which the lottery result obtained by the lottery means is a specific lottery result (for example, a winning and replay condition device number “23”) among the lottery results having an advantageous pressing order of the stop switch, the game is stored in the storage means. Based on the information, the information (“N, 127, 127, 127” (“N, 127, 127, 127”) including the advantageous pressing order of the stop switch corresponding to the lottery result in the game and the operation timing of the stop switch being an arbitrary operation timing However, “N” is characterized by selecting one of “1” to “6”) and executing a process (step S56 in FIG. 41) for outputting the information as a test signal.

The second solution is
A main control means (main control board 60) for controlling the progress of the game,
A gaming machine which executes a process for outputting a test signal by the main control means when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
Lottery means (condition device lottery means 63b);
Storage means (ROM 62 storing a pressing order instruction number table), which is information corresponding to a lottery result of the lottery means and stores information on an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
The lottery result of the lottery means includes a lottery result having an advantageous pressing order of the stop switch (for example, the condition device number “23” to “40”) and a lottery result having no advantageous pressing order of the stop switch. (For example, condition device numbers “1”, “15”, “48”, etc.)
The main control means includes:
The lottery result by the lottery means becomes a predetermined lottery result (for example, winning and replay condition device number “15”) among the lottery results having no advantageous pressing order of the stop switch, and a special game (1BB game) In a game in which the winning information of the special role (1BB) for transitioning to (i.e., the bonus item condition device number is “0”), the winning combination may be lost based on the information stored in the storage means. Information (“0, 3, 12, 8”) including the operation timing to be minimized is selected, and a process (step S56 in FIG. 41) for outputting the information as a test signal is performed.
In a game in which the lottery result obtained by the lottery means is a specific lottery result (for example, a winning and replay condition device number “23”) among the lottery results having an advantageous pressing order of the stop switch, the game is stored in the storage means. Based on the information, the information (“N, 127, 127, 127” (“N, 127, 127, 127”) including the advantageous pressing order of the stop switch corresponding to the lottery result in the game and the operation timing of the stop switch being an arbitrary operation timing However, “N” is characterized by selecting one of “1” to “6”) and executing a process (step S56 in FIG. 41) for outputting the information as a test signal.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 7 According to the initial invention, an appropriate test signal (symbol stop signal) can be directly transmitted from the main control means in accordance with the presence or absence of the winning of the special role and the lottery result in the game. Therefore, it is possible to transmit a test signal that sufficiently secures the accuracy (transparency) of the ball-out test.

8. Initial invention 8
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 8 Same as Initial Invention 7.
(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 8 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention was
A main control means (main control board 60) for controlling the progress of the game,
A gaming machine which executes a process for outputting a test signal by the main control means when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
A gaming machine that can be transmitted to the outside,
Lottery means (condition device lottery means 63b);
Storage means (ROM 62 storing a pressing order instruction number table), which is information corresponding to a lottery result of the lottery means and stores information on an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch;
When the special combination (1BB) which is advantageous to the player is won by the lottery means, the means for carrying over the special combination winning information (address of the RWM 61) until the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination is stopped and displayed. Storage means for the accessory condition device number provided in “F040”).
The lottery result of the lottery means includes a lottery result not including a winning combination (for example, a winning and replay condition device number “0”) and a lottery result including one or more winning combinations (for example, a winning and replay condition device number “0”). 23 "), and
The main control means includes:
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined lottery result (winning and replay condition device number "0") among lottery results having no advantageous pressing order of the stop switch, and the special role is won, and In a game in which the combination of the symbols corresponding to the special combination can be stopped, the game includes the operation timing of the stop switch for enabling the combination of the symbols corresponding to the special combination to be stopped based on the information stored in the storage means. Information ("0, 19, 18, 17") is selected from the storage means, and a process for outputting the information as a test signal (step S56 in FIG. 41) is executed.
The lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result (for example, winning and replay condition device number “48”) among the lottery results that do not have an advantageous pressing order of the stop switch, and the special role is won. In addition, in a game in which the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination cannot be stopped, information including an operation timing for minimizing the loss of the winning combination (“0”) based on the information stored in the storage means. , 3, 12, 8 ”) and execute a process (step S56 in FIG. 41) for outputting the information as a test signal.

(C) Effects of Initial Invention 8 According to the initial invention, in a game that has been won as a special role, an appropriate test signal (symbol stop signal) is transmitted directly from the main control means in accordance with the result of the lottery in the game. Therefore, it is possible to transmit a test signal that sufficiently secures the accuracy (transparency) of the ball-out test.

9. Initial invention 9
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 9 Same as Initial Invention 7.
(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 9 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The first solution is
A main control means (main control board 60) for controlling the progress of the game,
A gaming machine which executes a process for outputting a test signal (symbol stop signal) by the main control means when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the process proceeds to step S56 in FIG. 41),
Lottery means (condition device lottery means 63b);
Storage means (ROM 62 storing a pressing order instruction number table), which stores information corresponding to a lottery result of the lottery means and information of an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch;
The lottery result of the lottery means includes a lottery result not including a winning combination (winning and replay condition device number “0”) and a lottery result including one or more winning combinations (for example, a winning and replay condition device number “23”). ) And
The main control means includes:
A first process (main process) based on a first program (FIG. 41) relating to the progress of the game,
A second process (symbol stop signal setting process) based on a second program (FIG. 55) relating to the transmission of the test signal;
While executing the process based on the first program, an interrupt process (FIG. 64) that executes a process different from the process based on the first program by interruption every predetermined time is executed.
At least during execution of the second process based on the second program, control is performed to prohibit the interrupt process (step S55 in FIG. 41),
In the second process based on the second program,
The lottery result by the lottery means becomes a predetermined lottery result (for example, winning and replay condition device number “15”) among the lottery results having no advantageous pressing order of the stop switch, and a special game (1BB game) In a game that has not been won as the special role (1BB) for shifting to the information, the information including the operation timing for minimizing the loss of the winning role (“0, 3, 12, 8 "), and executes a process (step S56 in FIG. 41) for outputting the information as a test signal.
In a game in which the lottery result obtained by the lottery means is a specific lottery result (for example, a winning and replay condition device number “23”) among the lottery results having an advantageous pressing order of the stop switch, the game is stored in the storage means. Based on the information, the information (“N, 127, 127, 127” (“N, 127, 127, 127”) including the advantageous pressing order of the stop switch corresponding to the lottery result in the game and the operation timing of the stop switch being an arbitrary operation timing However, “N” is characterized by selecting one of “1” to “6”) and executing a process (step S56 in FIG. 41) for outputting the information as a test signal.

The second solution is
A main control means (main control board 60) for controlling the progress of the game,
A gaming machine which executes a process for outputting a test signal (symbol stop signal) by the main control means when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the process proceeds to step S56 in FIG. 41),
Lottery means (condition device lottery means 63b);
Storage means (ROM 62 storing a pressing order instruction number table), which stores information corresponding to a lottery result of the lottery means and information of an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch;
The lottery result of the lottery means includes a lottery result not including a winning combination (winning and replay condition device number “0”) and a lottery result including one or more winning combinations (for example, a winning and replay condition device number “23”). ) And
The main control means includes:
A first process (main process) based on a first program (FIG. 41) relating to the progress of the game,
A second process (symbol stop signal setting process) based on a second program (FIG. 55) relating to the transmission of the test signal;
While executing the process based on the first program, an interrupt process (FIG. 64) that executes a process different from the process based on the first program by interruption every predetermined time is executed.
At least during execution of the second processing based on the second program, control is performed to prohibit the interrupt processing (S55 in FIG. 41),
In the second process based on the second program,
The lottery result by the lottery means becomes a predetermined lottery result (for example, winning and replay condition device number “15”) among the lottery results having no advantageous pressing order of the stop switch, and a special game (1BB game) In the game in which the winning information of the special role (1BB) for shifting to the game is not stored (the character condition device number at the address “F040” of the RWM 61 is “0”), based on the information stored in the storage means, Then, a process (step S56 in FIG. 41) for selecting information (“0, 3, 12, 8”) including the operation timing for minimizing the loss of the winning combination and selecting the information as a test signal is executed. And
In a game in which the lottery result obtained by the lottery means is a specific lottery result (for example, a winning and replay condition device number “23”) among the lottery results having an advantageous pressing order of the stop switch, the game is stored in the storage means. Based on the information, the information (“N, 127, 127, 127” (“N, 127, 127, 127”) including the advantageous pressing order of the stop switch corresponding to the lottery result in the game and the operation timing of the stop switch being an arbitrary operation timing However, “N” is characterized by selecting one of “1” to “6”) and executing a process (step S56 in FIG. 41) for outputting the information as a test signal.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 9 According to the initial invention, an appropriate test signal (symbol stop signal) can be directly transmitted from the main control means in accordance with the presence or absence of the winning of the special role, the lottery result in the game, and the like. Therefore, it is possible to transmit a test signal that sufficiently secures the accuracy (transparency) of the ball-out test.
Furthermore, during the execution of the process for outputting the signal based on the second program, the interrupt process is prohibited, so that it is possible to prevent the occurrence of power interruption during the output of the test signal.

10. Initial invention 10
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 10 Same as Initial Invention 7.
(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 10 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The first solution is
A main control means (main control board 60) for controlling the progress of the game,
A gaming machine which executes a process for outputting a test signal (symbol stop signal) by the main control means when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the process proceeds to step S56 in FIG. 41),
Lottery means (condition device lottery means 63b);
Storage means (ROM 62 storing a pressing order instruction number table), which stores information corresponding to a lottery result of the lottery means and information of an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch;
The lottery results of the lottery means include a lottery result that does not include a winning combination (winning and replay condition device number “0”) and a lottery result that includes one or more winning combinations (for example, a winning and replay condition device number “15”). ) And
The main control means includes:
A first process (main process) based on a first program (FIG. 41) relating to the progress of the game,
A second process (symbol stop signal setting process) based on a second program (FIG. 55) relating to the transmission of the test signal;
While executing the process based on the first program, an interrupt process (FIG. 64) that executes a process different from the process based on the first program by interruption every predetermined time is executed.
In the interrupt processing, when it is determined that the power is turned off, the power cut processing (step S619 in FIG. 64) is executed,
At least during execution of the second processing based on the second program, control is performed to prohibit the interrupt processing (S55 in FIG. 41),
In the second process based on the second program,
The lottery result by the lottery means becomes a predetermined lottery result (for example, winning and replay condition device number “15”) among the lottery results having no advantageous pressing order of the stop switch, and a special game (1BB game) In a game that has not been won as the special role (1BB) for shifting to the information, the information including the operation timing for minimizing the loss of the winning role (“0, 3, 12, 8 "), and executes a process (step S56 in FIG. 41) for outputting the information as a test signal.
In a game in which the lottery result obtained by the lottery means is a specific lottery result (for example, a winning and replay condition device number “23”) among the lottery results having an advantageous pressing order of the stop switch, the game is stored in the storage means. Based on the information, the information (“N, 127, 127, 127” (“N, 127, 127, 127”) including the advantageous pressing order of the stop switch corresponding to the lottery result in the game and the operation timing of the stop switch being an arbitrary operation timing However, “N” is characterized by selecting one of “1” to “6”) and executing a process (step S56 in FIG. 41) for outputting the information as a test signal.

The second solution is
A main control means (main control board 60) for controlling the progress of the game,
A game machine that executes a process for outputting a test signal by the main control means when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the process proceeds to step S56 in FIG. 41),
Lottery means (condition device lottery means 63b);
Storage means (ROM 62 storing a pressing order instruction number table), which stores information corresponding to a lottery result of the lottery means and information of an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch;
The lottery results of the lottery means include a lottery result that does not include a winning combination (winning and replay condition device number “0”) and a lottery result that includes one or more winning combinations (for example, a winning and replay condition device number “15”). ) And
The main control means includes:
A first process (main process) based on a first program (FIG. 41) relating to the progress of the game,
A second process (symbol stop signal setting process) based on a second program (FIG. 55) relating to the transmission of the test signal;
While executing the process based on the first program, an interrupt process (FIG. 64) that executes a process different from the process based on the first program by interruption every predetermined time is executed.
In the interrupt processing, when it is determined that the power is turned off, the power cut processing (step S619 in FIG. 64) is executed,
At least during execution of the second processing based on the second program, control is performed to prohibit the interrupt processing (S55 in FIG. 41),
In the second process based on the second program,
The lottery result by the lottery means becomes a predetermined lottery result (for example, winning and replay condition device number “15”) among the lottery results having no advantageous pressing order of the stop switch, and a special game (1BB game) In the game in which the winning information of the special role (1BB) for shifting to the game is not stored (the character condition device number at the address “F040” of the RWM 61 is “0”), based on the information stored in the storage means, Then, a process (step S56 in FIG. 41) for selecting information (“0, 3, 12, 8”) including the operation timing for minimizing the loss of the winning combination and selecting the information as a test signal is executed. And
In a game in which the lottery result obtained by the lottery means is a specific lottery result (for example, a winning and replay condition device number “23”) among the lottery results having an advantageous pressing order of the stop switch, the game is stored in the storage means. Based on the information, the information (“N, 127, 127, 127” (“N, 127, 127, 127”) including the advantageous pressing order of the stop switch corresponding to the lottery result in the game and the operation timing of the stop switch being an arbitrary operation timing However, “N” is characterized by selecting one of “1” to “6”) and executing a process (step S56 in FIG. 41) for outputting the information as a test signal.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 10 Same as Initial Invention 9.

11. Initial invention 11
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention Same as Initial Invention 6.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 11 at first (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
The first solution (second embodiment) is as follows.
Main control means (main control board 60) for controlling the progress of the game,
Sub-control means (sub-control board 80) capable of controlling effects based on information transmitted from the main control means,
The main control means includes a storage means (RWM61) capable of updating information according to the progress of the game and having a plurality of addresses.
When a predetermined condition is satisfied (when a control command is transmitted),
1) A value indicating a predetermined address (for example, (A), “B6 (H)” in FIG. 72) in the address of the storage means is stored in a register R1 (E register),
2) The number of commands to be transmitted ("3" in the example of FIG. 72) is stored in the register R2 (B register) (step S702),
The following processes 3) and 4) are repeated until the value stored in the register R2 reaches a specific value. 3) A command based on the information stored in the address specified by the register R1 is transmitted to the sub-control means. 4) Add "1" to the value stored in the register R1 and subtract "1" from the value stored in the register R2. And

A second solution (second embodiment) is as follows.
Main control means (main control board 60) for controlling the progress of the game,
Sub-control means (sub-control board 80) capable of controlling effects based on information transmitted from the main control means,
The main control means includes a storage means (RWM61) capable of updating information according to the progress of the game and having a plurality of addresses.
When a predetermined condition is satisfied (when a control command is transmitted),
1) A value indicating a predetermined address (for example, (A), “B6 (H)” in FIG. 72) in the address of the storage means is stored in a register R1 (E register),
2) The number of commands to be transmitted ("3" in the example of FIG. 72) is stored in the register R2 (B register),
The following processes 3) and 4) are repeated until the value stored in the register R2 reaches a specific value. 3) A command based on the information stored in the address specified by the register R1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit. 4) Subtract the value stored in the register R1 by “1” and subtract the value stored in the register R2 by “1”. 4) Write to the command buffer (“F113” to “F153”). And

(C) Effects of Initial Invention 11 According to the initial invention, the storage capacity of the main control unit can be made more efficient. Further, control commands can be transmitted efficiently without providing a command transmission table.

10 slot machines (game machines)
Reference Signs List 11 display window 16 door switch 21 staging lamp 22 speaker 23 image display device 24 cross key 25 push button 30 symbol display device 31 reel 32 motor 35 medal dispensing device 35a hopper 35b sub tank 36 hopper motor 37a, 37b dispensing sensor 38 full sensor 39 reel Sensor 40a 1-bet switch 40b 3-bet switch 41 Start switch 42 Stop switch 43 Medal slot 43a Passage sensor 44a, 44b Closing sensor 45 Blocker 46 Settlement switch 51 Power switch 52 Setting key switch 53 Setting change / reset switch 54 Setting door switch 60 Main control board (main control means)
61 RWM
62 ROM
63 Main CPU
63a setting change means 63b condition device lottery means 63c winning flag control means 63d AT lottery means 63e pushing order instruction number selection means 63f effect group number selection means 63g reel control means 63h winning determination means 63i payout means 63j RT control means 63k main game state Control means 64 Set value display LED
70 Display board 71 LED for display of stored number
72 Acquisition number display LED
73 Status display LED
73a Replay display LED
73b LED for enabling input
73c Settlement display LED
73d game start LED
73e 1-sheet insertion display LED
73f 2-sheet display LED
73g 3-sheet insertion LED
80 Sub-control board (sub-control means)
81 RWM
82 ROM
83 Sub CPU
83a effect output control means 100 external centralized terminal board

Claims (1)

Main control means for controlling the progress of the game,
Display means controlled by the main control means,
The main control means includes:
Based on satisfying the start condition of the special game state, control to start the special game state,
In the special game state, the special characters can be activated,
In the case where the end condition of the special game state is not satisfied, when the end condition of the special accessory is satisfied, the operation of the special accessory is terminated, and after performing the standby process for a predetermined period longer than the cycle of the interrupt process , Again, it is possible to start the operation of the special accessory,
By the main control unit, during the predetermined period is configured so that at least one of the interrupt processing is executed,
The main control means includes:
In the interrupt processing executed when the special accessory is operating in the special game state , a test including a bit string in which the bit corresponding to the special game state is on and the bit corresponding to the special accessory is on Enables processing to output signals,
In the interrupt processing executed during the predetermined period in which the special accessory is not operating in the special game state , a bit sequence in which the bit corresponding to the special game state is on and the bit corresponding to the special accessory is off process for outputting a composed test signal to enable the execution,
The main control means includes:
Display data storage means capable of storing information to be displayed on the display means,
A counter that can be updated by interrupt processing,
And a segment table that stores segment information.
A first display unit and a second display unit as the display unit;
When the counter reaches a value for turning on the first display unit, the segment information of the first display unit is designated based on the first information generated from the information stored in the display data storage unit and the segment table. Then, a predetermined segment of the first display unit can be turned on,
When the counter reaches a value for lighting the second display unit, the segment information of the second display unit is designated based on the second information generated from the information stored in the display data storage unit and the segment table. And a specific segment of the second display unit can be turned on.

Images